JP2022016583A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of executing a highly amusing performance.

SOLUTION: In a Pachinko game machine 1, when it is determined whether a special game advantageous to a player is executed, a possibility-suggestive image for suggesting a possibility of execution of the special game may be displayed during variation display of a pattern for reporting the determination result. When the possibility-suggestive image is displayed, the possibility-suggestive image is changed such that a possibility for suggesting the possibility-suggestive image increases according to operation of operation means.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 92

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs an effect based on a determination result of whether or not to execute a special game.

For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and when the symbol for notifying the determination result is displayed in a variable manner, the player. Various productions are performed to expect a big hit (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-163824

By the way, it cannot be said that the production performed by the conventional gaming machine is necessarily a production with a high degree of interest, and there is room for improvement in terms of improving the interest.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a highly entertaining production.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and
When the determination is made, a symbol display control means for causing a predetermined symbol display means to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the result of the determination.
It is provided with an effect control means for controlling the effect based on the result of the determination.
The effect control means is
As an effect different from the reach effect, which suggests that the special game is relatively likely to be executed, the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect can be executed.
As the possibility suggestion image suggesting the possibility, when the possibility suggestion image of the first display mode is displayed, and the second display suggesting that the possibility is higher than that of the first display mode. When displaying the possibility suggestion image of the aspect, there is,
It is easier to execute the first specific effect when the possibility suggestion image of the second display mode is displayed than when the possibility suggestion image of the first display mode is displayed.
The effect control means is
There are times when the first reach effect is executed and when the second reach effect is executed, in which it is easy to be notified that the determination means has determined that the special game is executed rather than the first reach effect.
When executing the second reach effect, it is possible to execute the first specific effect and then execute the second reach effect.
The third specific effect is an effect that can be executed during the second reach effect.
The effect control means is
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is to be executed, all of the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect are displayed in the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the determination. While being feasible
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is not executed, the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect are displayed in the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the determination. It is characterized by limiting everything from being executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to carry out a highly entertaining production.

It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is the figure which shows the display which the gaming machine includes. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a big hit judgment table, (B) is a big hit type judgment table, (C) is a reach judgment table, (D) is a normal symbol hit judgment table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. It is a table which shows the fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the start ball entry processing. It is a flowchart of a normal figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit / miss determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a process during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessory processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 standby processing. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart of a hit / fail determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 changing process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 confirmation process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 standby processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart of a hit / fail determination process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 changing process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 confirmation process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a big hit game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 1. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of a receive interrupt process. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is a table which shows the symbol type of the production symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect symbol game effect of a state A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect symbol game effect of the state B. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the effect mode C, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the effect mode D. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the production pattern game production of the production mode C. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect pattern game effect of the effect mode D. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a small hit fluctuation in the effect mode D, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a small hit game in the effect mode D. It is a flowchart of a small hit look-ahead effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of an effect when a specific period is started. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode selection screen during an ending period. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen from before the start to after the start of the mode selection period in a big hit game. (A) is a table showing the type of the second effect pattern (battle effect pattern of the effect mode C), and (b) is a table showing the type of the third effect pattern (battle effect pattern of the effect mode D). It is a figure which shows the display example of the notice image in an effect mode D. It is a display pattern determination table of a preview image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the flow of the production performed in the low probability low base state. It is a screen diagram (No. 1) showing a specific example of the effect performed in the low accuracy and low base state. It is a screen diagram (No. 2) showing a specific example of the effect performed in the low accuracy and low base state. It is a screen diagram (No. 3) showing a specific example of the effect performed in the low accuracy and low base state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the chance up during SPSP reach. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the flow of rank-up production. It is a screen diagram (No. 1) which shows a specific example of a rank-up effect. It is a screen diagram (No. 2) which shows a specific example of a rank-up effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot reliability of various notice productions such as rank-up productions. It is a screen view (No. 1) which shows the specific example of the 1st countdown effect. It is a screen view (No. 2) which shows the specific example of the 1st countdown effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the feature of the 1st countdown effect. It is a screen view which shows the 1st specific example of the 2nd countdown effect. It is a screen view which shows the 2nd specific example of the 2nd countdown effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the feature of various countdown productions. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode in a low probability low base state. It is a screen view (No. 1) which shows the specific example of the production which concerns on the big chance production occurrence zone. It is a screen view (No. 2) which shows the specific example of the production which concerns on the big chance production occurrence zone. It is a screen view which shows the specific example of the 1st group notice. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the display mode of each icon and the jackpot reliability. It is a screen view which shows the specific example of the 2nd group notice. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the jackpot reliability of each group notice. It is a screen view which shows the 1st specific example of a button image change effect. It is a screen view which shows the 2nd specific example of a button image change effect. It is a screen view (No. 1) which shows a specific example of a special reach effect. It is a screen view (No. 2) which shows the specific example of a special reach effect. It is a screen view (No. 3) which shows a specific example of a special reach effect. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the jackpot reliability of a special reach production.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. In the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable display of the symbol, the pachinko gaming machine capable of executing the winning game that can give a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) to the player. , An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50, and the gaming board 2 is a game. It is detachably configured from the machine frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the gaming board 2 is removed from the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for attaching a gaming board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the island equipment in the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island equipment, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end side (left side of the paper in FIG. 1) in the vertical direction, and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side end side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

Further, the front frame 51 can supply a launch handle 60 for launching a game ball with a firing intensity according to a player's operation amount (rotation angle), and a game ball that stores and stores the game ball to the launcher side. A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 61 are provided. Further, on the front frame 51, a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively referred to) that can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect executed as the game progresses. (It is also simply referred to as "directing button 63"). As for the plurality of effect buttons, the effect buttons to be used can be used properly according to the type of game effect. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment of the first embodiment, and any input detection means (for example, an input detection means in which the player can directly contact the button portion to input the input can be detected. , Appearance type, touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects that a part of the player's body is in close proximity and inputs. good.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the player can easily see the display screens 71a and 72a. It is installed so as to protrude toward the surface and to be inclined outward. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, like the image display device 7 to be described later, depend on the execution / non-execution of the game, the situation of the game, the game effect to be executed, and the like. Game production (characters, production patterns, etc.), demo production, information about the game (acquired ball output information, number of rounds, number of consecutive villas, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability / explanation of game production, etc.) , Information about the setting of the game machine (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) is displayed. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information or display the same information among these information. Further, the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information as when different information is displayed. There are cases where it is done. Further, any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information, and the remaining one displays different information. May be displayed. It should be noted that any or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as an "image display device".

Further, the image display device 7 is provided in the inner region of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in the outer region of the game area 3. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end portion) is attached to the front frame 51 via the hinge 75 (hinge portion) for the second image display device. Has been done. Therefore, the hinges 75 for the upper and lower second image display devices can be rotated in the left-right direction as an axis. More specifically, it is configured to be rotatable to the right by a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because the second image display device 71, which is provided so as to project in front of the front frame 51 when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56 as axes, pachinko. It is a configuration to prevent damage due to collision with hall equipment (ball lending machine, inter-table equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (left side of the paper in FIG. 1) of the game machine 1. .. On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the end on the open side) is fixedly provided with respect to the front frame 51 and is non-rotatable.

The game board 2 is formed with a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down, surrounded by a rail member 4. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a board surface lamp 5 for decoration. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding the game ball are projected. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

Further, an image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back surface side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbol") are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and the effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as "effect symbol display unit") is displayed. ) Is provided, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the gaming state according to the gaming state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state). The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol described later) set as the main body of the game in. The production symbol 8L is also referred to as a "left symbol", the production symbol 8C is also referred to as a "middle symbol", and the production symbol 8R is also referred to as a "right symbol".

The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the gaming state is in the normal state (low accuracy low base state, state A described later). As will be described in detail later, in this low-probability low-base state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port (second starting port 21) is set lower than in the high-base state, and whether or not the special symbol is correct or not. The judgment probability (first special symbol hit / miss judgment and second special symbol hit / fail judgment) is low probability (also referred to as "predetermined probability"), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. It is set (more than twice) (all deviation fluctuations are 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal state, rather than launching a game ball into the right game area 3B (second game area) and letting the ball enter the second starting opening 21, the second special symbol is variably displayed, the left game area 3A (second game area). It is considered to be advantageous for the player to play a game in which a game ball is fired in (1 game area) and entered into the first starting port 20 to display the first special symbol in a variable manner. That is, in the normal state, it can be said that the game state is a game state in which the first special symbol (directed symbol) is mainly used for variable display. Therefore, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are supposed to perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, the first special symbol display 41a (“first”) described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the "special symbol display unit") and the second special displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display unit"). The result of the variation display of the symbol (the result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. In addition, any (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information". Further, the special symbol hit / fail judgment is also simply referred to as “hit / fail judgment” or “first hit / fail judgment”. Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the special symbol hit / fail determination is also referred to as a “hit / fail determination executing means” or a “first hit / fail determination executing means”.

For example, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (first specific hit), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the same three-digit symbol (doublet) such as "777" (also called "big hit symbol"). say). In addition, in the case of a small hit (second specific hit), a preset chance symbol such as "135" or a special small hit symbol such as "3 ★ 3" (also referred to as a "small hit symbol") is used. Stop and display the design. In addition, when a small hit occurs, the symbol of the same mode may be stopped and displayed for the small hit symbol and the off symbol, instead of the mode in which the symbol dedicated to the small hit is stopped and displayed. In addition, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit symbols (first small hit symbol, second small hit symbol, etc.) can be distinguished from each other. ) May be stopped and displayed, or the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol pass / fail judgment is incorrect, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is stopped and displayed as a different symbol ("Missing symbol"). Also called). As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (result of the special symbol winning / failing determination) by looking at the stopped display of the effect symbol. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b. See and grasp the effect symbol displayed in the symbol display area 7b. Further, as the mode of variable display of the effect symbol, for example, a mode of scrolling up / down, left / right, diagonal direction, etc., a mode of displaying the effect using only the first effect symbol display unit 7b, and a mode of displaying the effect using only the first effect symbol display unit 7b, or a mode of displaying the effect using only the first effect symbol display unit 7b. In addition, it has an aspect of displaying the effect by using one or both of the second effect symbol display unit 71a and the third effect symbol display unit 72a. In addition to this, it may have an aspect of displaying the effect using only the second effect symbol display unit 71a or the third effect symbol display unit 72a.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying a game effect (effect symbol game effect) using the effect symbol as described above, it is executed along with a hit game (big hit game, small hit game). The hit game effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) and the demo effect for waiting for customers are displayed. In addition, in the effect pattern game effect, the hit game effect, and the demo effect, in addition to the effect symbols such as numbers, the effect images other than the effect symbols such as the background image and the character image are displayed. Further, although the details will be described later, the game state (state A, state B or state C), the state in which the game ball is fired in the left game area 3A to play the game, or the game ball is fired in the right game area 3B. The display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b is different depending on whether the game is played or the like. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously) in a variable manner, and is a game of this type. The machine is also called a "simultaneous variable machine (parallel variable machine)".

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying the first effect hold 9a according to the number of storages of the first special figure hold, which will be described later, is displayed. There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) that displays the second effect hold 9b according to the number of storages of the second special figure hold described later. Depending on the display mode (number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b in the effect hold display area, the first special figure hold displayed by the first special figure hold display 43a (see FIG. 4) described later. The number of stored images and the number of stored numbers of the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect (reach effect, etc.) to be executed. In addition, only one of the first effect hold display unit and the second effect hold display unit (for example, only the effect hold display unit corresponding to the main special symbol) may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll is provided. Further, a hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet, and receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp inlet, discharges the game ball from the warp outlet, and guides the game ball to the stage portion 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage portion 11, and can enter the first starting port 20 described later. Further, above the center decorative body 10, there is an illuminated member (board lamp 5) such as an LED, which can be turned on according to the game state, and a decorative member 13 in the shape of characters, figures, or the like is arranged. There is.

Further, a movable decorative member 14 that can be operated along with the game effect is provided above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (predetermined) with the execution of a game effect having a relatively high possibility of hitting. The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. As a result, the player enhances the interest in the game and raises the expectation for the hit.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 provided with a non-variable first starting port 20 in which the ease of entering the game ball does not change is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct ( The first special symbol hit / fail determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / miss determination.

Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, the gate 28 (general drawing start port, pass port, entry port, and specific start) through which the game ball can pass (enter) (Also called a mouth) is provided. The game ball that has entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. In addition, this gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, this gate is a gate 28 and also a start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes) into the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation condition) is satisfied, it is normal. Along with executing the symbol winning / failing determination (also referred to as “second winning / failing determination”), the normal symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination. When the hit normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opens) and the second starting port 21 becomes open. Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the normal symbol hit / miss determination as to whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opened) to open the second starting port 21 is a "hit / fail determination executing means". It is also referred to as a "second pass / fail determination execution means". The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. That is, the sensor for detecting the entry into the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and also the start gate sensor 29a.

Further, as will be described in detail later, when the gate 28 (start gate 29) is passed, the function as the start gate 29 is exhibited when the conditions for executing the big hit game are satisfied (big hit execution). It is also called a possible state or a big hit standby state). Therefore, if the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (big hit standby state) is not satisfied, the control process related to the normal symbol is performed and the big hit start process is not executed. If the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the jackpot standby state), the standby jackpot game starts and the predetermined jackpot (the predetermined jackpot) The round game in which the first large winning opening 30) is opened (the ball can be entered) starts.

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29), a first large winning opening 30 is provided. A large winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable ball entry port") is provided. The first prize-winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and the opening / closing member 32 opens and closes the first prize-winning opening 30. The opening / closing member 32 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is closed and the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32. It is possible to pass through. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first large winning opening 30. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 32 retracts toward the back surface of the game board 3 to form the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Is gone. As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the first large winning opening 30 will enter the first large winning opening 30. In this way, the opening / closing member 32 that opens / closes the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when it is in the open state (when it is open), the game ball that has flowed down is smoothly moved to the first size. In addition to allowing the ball to enter the winning opening 30, the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) can be guided in an arbitrary direction (the second starting opening 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It will be possible. It should be noted that the game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, in the first large winning device 31 (first variable entry port), due to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32, the game ball cannot enter the ball (closed state) and the game ball can enter. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game ball does not change. A second fixed winning device 25 including a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct ( The second special symbol hit / fail determination) is executed, the second special symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / miss determination. The game ball passage is branched below (downstream) of the first prize-winning opening 30 (upper and lower stages), and the upper game ball passage provided with the third starting port 26, the second starting opening 31 and the second starting opening 31 and the first. A lower side game ball passage in which the two major winning openings 35 are provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third start port 26 by coming into contact with the game nail 16 provided in the vicinity of the third start port 26. Alternatively, the ball flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. Further, since the third starting port 26 is a fixed winning device capable of constantly entering a ball, a big hit is achieved in a left-handed game (so-called first hit), and the first big hit game is executed in a right-handed game. , The game ball can be entered (held) into the third starting port 26 during the big hit game, and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the end of the big hit game.

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game ball changes. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable start port” or a “variable start port”) including the second start port 21 of the formula is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct (first). (2) Special symbol hit / fail determination) is executed, the second special symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail determination.

The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an “opening / closing member”), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first aspect (closed state) to the second aspect (open state) in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect. be. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows the game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and the game ball cannot enter the second start port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. The second starting port 21 is completely closed when the movable member 23 is closed, as long as it is more difficult for the game ball to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

Further, like the opening / closing member 32, the movable member 23 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the second starting port 21 is closed and the movable member 23 is said to be closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the inlet portion of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21. It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the movable member 23 is driven by the second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 retracts in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second starting port 21. As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the inlet portion of the second starting port 21 will enter the second starting port 21. In this way, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (when it is open), the game ball that has flowed down can be seen. The ball is smoothly entered into the second starting port 21, and the game ball that has flowed down when it is closed (when closed) is allowed to flow down in any direction by the inclined upper surface passage (second large winning opening 35 described later). Induce to.

Further, in the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the second start opening 21, a second large winning opening 35 is provided. A large winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable ball entry port") is provided. The second big winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and the opening / closing member 37 opens and closes the second big winning opening 35. Like the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) gaming ball passage, and in the closed state, the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 is closed and the opening / closing member 37 is opened / closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 without entering the second large winning opening 35. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 37 retracts in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The opening / closing member 37 that had been used disappears from the entrance of the second large winning opening 35. As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second large winning opening 35 will enter the second large winning opening 35. In this way, the opening / closing member 37 that opens / closes the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down when in the open state (when opened). Is smoothly entered into the second large winning opening 35, and the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) is guided in an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. It should be noted that the second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, the second large winning device 36 (second variable entry port) has an inaccessible state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter and an entry in which the game ball can enter due to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 37. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

Further, in the game area below the left side area (left game area 3A) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, a plurality (three) general entrances 27 are provided. The game area 3 in which various entrances and the like are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. Can be divided into. The method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called left-handed, and the method of launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called right-handed. .. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal state (low accuracy low base state, state A) at the start of the game is left-handed to aim at entering the first starting port 20. That is, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game mainly composed of a left-handed ball entering the first starting port 20 (first special symbol hit / miss determination).

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the hit / fail judgment (first special symbol hit / fail judgment) based on the entry into the first starting port 20, the big hit game and after the big hit game (special game) is completed (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy). (Low base state) is a game aimed at entering the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21, or the second big winning opening 35 by hitting right. That is, in the big hit game and the low-accuracy high-base state (state B) or the high-accuracy low-base state (state C), the ball enters the second starting port 21 by right-handed (second special symbol hit / fail determination). It will be a right-handed game. Then, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 20, the second starting opening 21, the first large winning opening 30, the second large winning opening 35, and the general entry opening 27, each entry opening is used. A predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as "prize balls" and "game profits") are paid out (given) in. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (amount of game profit) paid out based on the entry into the first large winning opening 30 is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35. It is set more than the number (amount of game profit). Specifically, the first big winning opening 30 pays out 15 prize balls for one winning ball, and the second big winning opening 35 pays out 10 prize balls for one winning ball. The prize ball will be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. On the main display 40, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol display for variable display and stop display of the second special symbol are displayed. A device 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of a normal symbol (also referred to as "specific identification information") are included. Further, the main display 40 has a first special symbol hold display 43a for displaying the number of stored numbers of the first special symbol hold determination information (first special symbol hold), and a second special symbol hold check information (first). Includes a second special figure hold indicator 43b that displays the number of stored items of (2 special figure hold), and a normal figure hold indicator 44 that displays the number of stored items of the normal symbol display 42 that is on hold (normal figure hold). ing.

Further, the main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment is a hit, and the first special symbol hit / miss judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. When the result is a hit, the round display 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, the game status display 46 indicating that the probability fluctuation function is activated, and the launch direction of the game ball, that is, right-handed A launch direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether the state should be left-handed or should be left-handed. Various indicators included in these main indicators 40 are displayed and controlled by a main control unit described later.

The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. Further, the first special figure hold display 43a and the second special figure hold display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold display unit 43.

The special symbol display unit 41 displays the special symbol (identification information) variable for a predetermined time, then displays the stop, and depending on the special symbol (stop symbol) displayed as a stop (derivative display), the first start port 20 or the second start port 20 or the second start port. The result of the hit / fail judgment (special symbol hit / fail judgment, big hit lottery) based on the entry into the 21 is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct. When the stop symbol is a predetermined special special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), it is an open pattern according to the type of the specific special symbol displayed as a stop. A special game (big hit game, small hit game) that opens the 1st big winning opening 30 or the 2nd big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "i to p", and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is the first big hit (4R first big hit), the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Further, in the case of the second big hit (4R second big hit), the four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Further, in the case of disconnection, the two LEDs of "lo" can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination. Similar to the first special symbol display 41b, the stop display mode is defined as a different display mode depending on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination (big hit, small hit, miss). Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before the derivation display), the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the variation display is, for example, from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED can be turned on so that light repeatedly flows to the light.

Here, among the stop display modes (display results of variable display) of special symbols and effect symbols, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a hit (big hit or small hit) is referred to as a "hit mode". , "Specific mode", "Specific display mode" or "Specific display result", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment is out of order is referred to as "off mode" or "non-specific mode". , Also referred to as "non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". Further, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit is also referred to as "big hit mode", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment is a small hit is "small". It is also called "hit mode". Further, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display unit), and the special symbol display unit 41. Also referred to as "variable display means" or "identification information display means".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various information such as a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct (“acquired information”” is obtained based on the entry. (Also referred to as) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure holding storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Specifically, if the information is acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a as the first special figure reservation (also referred to as "first acquisition information"). If the information is acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 21, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b as the second special figure reservation (also referred to as "second acquisition information"). An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are also generally referred to as "acquisition information storage means". ..

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the special symbol hold means to determine a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not corresponding to the special symbol hold, and to execute a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting opening 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry, that is, each special. During the execution of the variation display of the symbol or the execution of the special game based on any of the special symbol winning / failing judgments, the right of the special symbol winning / failing judgment for the incoming ball is reserved (reserved) up to a predetermined number (4 each). ) Can be done.

The number of such special figure hold indicators is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure holding display 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and the first special drawing is controlled by displaying and controlling the LEDs according to the number of the first special drawing holding. It displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: off, ●: red on, ▲: green on), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is turned on in red, such as "u □ v ●". Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, such as "u ● v □". Further, when the number of holdings is 3, the display mode can be such that both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u ● v ●". Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green as in "u ▲ v ▲" to set the display mode. Further, the second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display according to the number of the second special figure hold, the second special figure hold is held. It displays a number. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: off, ●: red on, ▲: green on), and the number of holds is 1 to 1. No. 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure holding indicator 43a.

The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display 42, after displaying the normal symbol variable for a predetermined time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the normal symbol hit / fail determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is determined by the stopped display normal symbol (stop symbol). Notify. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol hit / fail determination. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game (“specific game”) in which the second starting port 21 is opened with an opening pattern according to the current game state. Also called) is performed. Further, the means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as the auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit / miss determination depending on the lighting mode thereof. Is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed when both LEDs are lit, such as "s ■ t ■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). If the determination result is out of order, an out-of-order normal symbol in which only the t LED is lit, such as "s □ t ■", is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined fluctuation time. The mode of the variable display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off.

When the game ball passes through the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquired information”) such as a random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct based on the passage, and various acquired information. Is temporarily stored as a normal figure hold in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine a random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol corresponds to the normal symbol hold, and to execute a variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of passage, that is, the variation display of the normal symbol is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. Can reserve (hold) the right to determine whether or not a normal symbol is correct for the passage of a predetermined number of cards.

The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. Specifically, the normal figure hold display 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs according to the number of normal figure hold. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: off, ●: red on, ▲: green on), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of q is turned off and the LED of r is turned on in red as in "q □ r ●". Further, the number of hold numbers 2 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a main control board 80 (“main control unit” or “main control unit”) that controls game profits such as a special symbol hit / miss judgment, a normal symbol hit / miss judgment, and a transition of a game state. (Also referred to as a "game control unit"), a sub-control board 90 (also referred to as a "sub-control unit", "sub-control unit", or "effect control unit") that controls an effect to be executed as the game progresses, a game ball. The payout control board 110 (also referred to as “payout control unit”) that controls the payout, the effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, the pattern displayed on the effect display 102, the third effect hold display 103a, It also includes an image control board 100 (image control unit) that controls the display of the fourth effect hold display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case for storing the main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case, there is a main control board storage case. An image control board storage case containing the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub control board storage case containing the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. It is provided. Further, a payout control board case for accommodating the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for accommodating the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

A game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-mentioned special figure holding storage unit 85 (first special figure holding storage unit 85a and second special figure holding storage unit 85b) and the normal figure holding storage unit 86. ..

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output to each solenoid from the main control board 80. Specifically, the sensors include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a), a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and The general ball entry sensor 27a is connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided in the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second large winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35. The general entry port sensor 27a is provided in each general entry port 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general entry port 27.

Further, as the solenoids, the second starting port solenoid 24, the first large winning opening solenoid 33, and the second large winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36. Further, on the main control board 80, a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold display 43a, a second special symbol hold display 43b, and the like are commonly used. Figure Hold indicator 44, round indicator 45, game status indicator 46, launch direction indicator 47, and hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main display units 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and also receives a signal from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. A payout device 120 for paying out prize balls and rental balls and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected to the payout control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). Is connected. The launcher 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1), and the player performs a predetermined ball lending operation to insert a prepaid card (game). It enables ball lending based on the information stored in the value storage medium) and the like.

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 uses the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls and pay out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for the counting. When the player operates the handle 60 of the launching device 112 (see FIG. 1), the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the firing handle 60, and the firing volume 115 is the firing handle 60. Detects the amount of rotation. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a one-chip microcomputer 91 for effect control (“microcomputer for effect control”) that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. There is. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100, a voice control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 is used in the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Display of image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, third image display device 72, effect display 102, third effect hold display 103a, and fourth effect hold display 103b. Let them control. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for expanding image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 includes still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols, reserved symbols, etc.). Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display 102 consists of two LEDs, one of which performs variable display and stop display in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED displays variable display of the second special symbol. A display mode in which a variable display and a stop display are performed in accordance with the stop display, and the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct) is shown by turning on / off the corresponding LED or by color. Stop display with. Further, the third effect hold indicator 103a and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b are similarly composed of two LEDs, respectively. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining colors, the third effect hold display 103a is displayed by the number of holds displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c and the first special figure hold display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode indicating the same number of holds as the number of holds. Further, the fourth effect hold display 103b is displayed and controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the number of holds displayed on the second special figure hold display 43b. To.

The character symbol is displayed on a part or substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit) to display the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit). By covering a part or substantially the entire part), a part or all of the effect symbol 8, the first effect hold display unit 9c, or the second effect hold display unit 9d may not be visible. be. These effect display 102, third effect hold display 103a, etc. Further, a fourth effect holding display 103b is provided. It should be noted that the display modes of the effect display 102, the third effect hold display 103a, and the fourth effect hold display 103b are always visible without being hindered by the operation of the movable decorative member 14. It has become. Further, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be made to execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the light emission pattern data (lighting / extinguishing, light emitting color, etc.) of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Also referred to as lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines and determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. The movement of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the movement pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may be made to execute lamp lighting control or operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, the sub-control board 90 has a first effect button detection switch 63c and a first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) has been operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.). 2 The effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

Next, the control related to the determination of whether or not the special symbol is correct in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment, it has "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". At the time of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "off", the "off symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. When it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a "special game" is executed in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened in the opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol displayed as stopped. .. A special game executed as a big hit is called a "big hit game", and a special game executed as a small hit is called a "small hit game".

There are a plurality of types of hits, and the hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed depending on the result (specific result) of the special symbol winning / failing determination. That is, different hit types (big hits) depending on whether the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, another specific result, or the like. , Including small hits). In addition, the special game to be executed may differ depending on the hit type, and the amount of game profit that can be obtained differs depending on the special game, or the game state after the special game ends may differ. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are "4R (round) 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", and "2R first jackpot". There are "5 big hits", "2R 6th big hits", "2R 7th big hits", and "2R 8th big hits". In the "15R 3rd big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 15 times. Further, in "4R 1st big hit", "4R 2nd big hit", and "4R 4th big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 4 times. "2R 5th big hit", "2R 6th big hit", "2R 7th big hit", and "2R 8th big hit" have the number of open times (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30). Twice. In this way, in the big hit, the first big winning opening 30 is opened and the second big winning opening 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as a "big hit big winning opening (big hit variable entry opening)".

In addition, "4R 1st jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", "2R 5th jackpot", and "2R 6th jackpot" will describe the game state after the end of the jackpot game. Move to the high probability state of (activate the probability change function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also referred to as "probability variation jackpots (high probability jackpots)". This high probability state (probability change function) continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, "4R 2nd jackpot", "2R 7th jackpot", and "2R 8th jackpot" shift the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to the low probability state described later (the probability change function is not activated). .. Therefore, these three types of jackpots are also referred to as "low probability jackpots (low probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

In addition, "4R 1st jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", and "4R 4th jackpot" set the variation time of the 2nd special symbol in a short time after the end of the jackpot game, "2nd special symbol time reduction". Activates "function" and does not activate the high base generation function. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (state C). This high accuracy and low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. The game playability in the high-accuracy and low-base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but as described above, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B where various entrances are arranged, the second special It is a period in which it is possible to determine whether the symbol is correct or not, generate a small hit, and increase the number of game balls in the period between the previous big hit and the next big hit (big hit interval). In addition, by making small hits occur frequently in the high accuracy and low base state during this big hit, it can be expected that many game balls will be acquired in a short period of time by the small hits. That is, it is an advantageous period for the player, and it is a period in which it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the "4R second big hit", "2R 7th big hit", and "2R 8th big hit" activate the "second special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" after the end of the big hit game. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a low accuracy and high base state. In the case of "4R 2nd jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot", the low accuracy high base state ends based on the occurrence of the next jackpot or the execution of the variation display of the special symbol 100 times. .. When the game ends based on the execution of the variation display of the special symbol 100 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). Further, in the case of "2R 7th jackpot", the low accuracy high base state ends based on the occurrence of the next jackpot or the execution of the variation display of the special symbol 50 times. When the change display of the special symbol ends based on being executed 50 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). Further, as will be described in detail later, in the low accuracy and high base state, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged as described above, and then the next It is a period in which the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, the "2R 5th jackpot" and the "2R 6th jackpot" activate the "second special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" after the end of the jackpot game. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a high accuracy and high base state. In the case of "2R 5th jackpot", the "2nd special symbol time saving function" continues until the next jackpot occurs, and the "high base generation function" either causes the next jackpot or changes in the special symbol. It ends based on the display being executed 50 times. Also, as mentioned above, the "probability change function" will continue until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of "2R 5th big hit", after the big hit game is finished, until the variation display of the special symbol has passed 50 times, it is in the high accuracy high base state, and even after 50 times, the big hit does not occur. , The gaming state is set to the high accuracy and low base state.

In the high-accuracy high-base state, as in the low-accuracy high-base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made, and the game is expected to occur in the next big hit. As mentioned above, the high-accuracy and low-base state is an advantageous period for players who can expect to acquire many game balls in a short period of time by making small hits occur frequently by right-handed games. be. It is assumed that there are more game balls that can be acquired in the high accuracy and low base state than those that can be acquired in the high accuracy and high base state. Therefore, if the big hit does not occur until the number of times of variation display of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game has passed 50 times, the game state changes to a more advantageous game state (specific game state) than before.

In addition, the "2R 6th jackpot" is in a high-accuracy high-base state until the variation display of the special symbol has passed 100 times after the jackpot game is completed, and the jackpot does not occur even after 100 times. It is the same as "2R 5th big hit" except that the gaming state is set to the high accuracy and low base state, that is, the period during which the gaming state changes is different. Further, in the "2R 5th jackpot", the time when the gaming state changes from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state is set earlier than in the "2R 6th jackpot". Therefore, it can be said that the "2R 5th jackpot" is a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the "2R 6th jackpot".

In addition, the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game (2R 5th big hit game) related to "2R 5th big hit" and the low after the end of the big hit game (2R 7th big hit game) related to "2R 7th big hit". By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the highly accurate base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are set to a non-notification state in which the gaming state (high-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot is "2R 5th jackpot", the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state advantageous to the player) after 50 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed, and "2R". In the case of "7th big hit", the player is not notified because the game state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 50 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. Regardless of the state of the game, the game is expected to shift to a high-accuracy and low-base state, and the game is enhanced.

In addition, the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game (2R 6th big hit game) related to "2R 6th big hit" and the low after the end of the big hit game (2R 8th big hit game) related to "2R 8th big hit". By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the highly accurate base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are set to a non-notification state in which the gaming state (high-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot is "2R 6th jackpot", the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state advantageous to the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed, and "2R". In the case of "8th big hit", the player is not notified because the game state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. Regardless of the state of the game, the game is expected to shift to a high-accuracy and low-base state, and the game is enhanced.

In addition, the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game (2R 5th big hit game) related to "2R 5th big hit" and the low after the end of the big hit game (2R 7th big hit game) related to "2R 7th big hit". High-accuracy base state, high-accuracy high-base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R 6th jackpot game) related to "2R 6th jackpot", and jackpot game related to "2R 8th jackpot" (2R 8th jackpot game) By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low accuracy and high base state after the end, the player recognizes which game state it is. Make it difficult. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, these gaming states are set to non-notification states (which make it difficult to recognize) for notifying the gaming state (high-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state).

When the type of jackpot is "2R 5th jackpot", the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state advantageous to the player) after 50 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed, and "2R". In the case of "7th big hit", the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 50 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. In addition, when the type of jackpot is "2R 6th jackpot", the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state advantageous to the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. In the case of "2R 8th big hit", the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. Therefore, in the non-notification state, the player expects to shift to the high-accuracy and low-base state when the variation display of the special symbol has elapsed 50 times regardless of the gaming state. , Will enhance the entertainment of the game.

In addition, even if the game does not shift to the high-accuracy low-base state, the game is expected to continue at least the high-base state (that is, the non-notification state continues) without shifting to the low-accuracy low-base state. I do. If the non-notification state continues after 50 times of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, it is expected that a big hit will occur, and when the fluctuation display of the special symbol has passed 100 times, it shifts to the high accuracy and low base state. It will be played with the expectation that it will be played, and the interest in the game will be enhanced. In this way, in the non-notification state, points that raise the player's expectation are set a plurality of times, and it is possible to further enhance the game entertainment and maintain a high game interest for a long period of time.

In addition, as for the small hits that can occur as a result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment, the number of times the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is opened is set to six times, and one time (and) compared to other big hits. The opening time of (total) is also set short. Specifically, opening 6 times for 0.3 seconds will open for a total of 1.8 seconds. Therefore, compared to the big hit game (for example, 15R 3rd big hit game, 4R 4th big hit game, etc.), the number of game balls that can be acquired in one small hit game is set to be smaller. However, by generating small hits a plurality of times (many times), it is possible to execute a plurality of small hit games and acquire more game balls. Further, in the small hit, the second big winning opening 35 is opened and the first big winning opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second large winning opening 35 is also referred to as a "small hit large winning opening (small hit variable entry opening)". In the small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times the big winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of times of opening. In addition, the probability variation function does not operate based on the occurrence of a small hit, and if the gaming state at the time of the small hit is a high probability state, it is considered to be a high probability state even after the small hit game is completed, and when the small hit occurs. If the game state of is a low probability state, it is considered to be a low probability state even after the small hit game is completed. Similarly, the time saving function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not activated based on the occurrence of small hits.

In addition, the distribution probability to each big hit in the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 65% for the 4R first big hit and 35% for the 4R second big hit. On the other hand, the jackpots in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are 15R 3rd jackpot 50%, 4R 4th jackpot 5%, 2R 5th jackpot 5%, and 2R 6th jackpot. 5%, 2R 7th jackpot is 25%, 2R 8th jackpot is 10%. That is, in the case of a big hit by the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol hit / fail judgment) based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 whose fluctuation frequency is improved by the operation of the second special symbol time saving function described later, 15R It becomes a big hit (15R third big hit), and it becomes possible to acquire a large amount of game balls in a short period of time. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game is played in the second starting port 21 rather than being a big hit in the hit / fail determination (first special symbol hit / fail determination) performed by the game ball entering the first starting port 20. It is set so that a big hit in the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed when the ball enters is more likely to be advantageous to the player (a large number of game balls can be acquired). There is. Further, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the 15R third big hit and the occurrence of a high-accuracy low-base state in which the game ball can be increased by the small hit.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is performed based on a "special symbol hit / miss judgment random number (also referred to as" hit / miss judgment information ")", and when it becomes a big hit. The determination of the jackpot type is performed based on the "random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as" random number for determining symbol "and" information for determining symbol ")". As shown in FIG. 7A, the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 include a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, a random number for determining the jackpot type, and a "variation pattern". There is a random number (also called "variation pattern information"). Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation mode) including the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The variation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage of the gate 28 include the normal symbol hit / miss determination random numbers shown in FIG. 7 (B). The random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (determination of whether or not the normal symbol is correct). Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of 0 to 240.

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, each function of the probability variation function (probability variation function) for the special symbol and the normal symbol, the variation time shortening function for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and the opening extension function of the second starting port is activated or non-operated. It has a plurality of gaming states depending on the combination of states. For special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the probability fluctuation function is activated is called a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not activated is called a "low probability state". In the high probability state (big hit probability: 1/315), the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the low probability state (big hit probability: 1/63). That is, in the low-probability state, the hit / fail judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table for the low-probability state, but in the high-probability state, the jackpot judgment for the high-probability state in which the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number determined to be the jackpot is large. A hit / fail judgment is made using the table (see FIG. 8 (A)). That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit (the stop symbol becomes a jackpot symbol) becomes higher than when it is not activated. The means (main control unit) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (big hit probability) is referred to as a "probability setting means".

Further, for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is operating is referred to as "time saving state", and the state in which the special symbol is not operating is referred to as "non-time saving state". In the time-saving state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the confirmation display time) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time-saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table defined so that the fluctuation pattern having the short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and effective entry into the starting port (entry that can be memorized as the special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with the smooth progress of the game.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the length of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage / disadvantage of the player, it is set as the "second special symbol time saving function" as shown in FIG. There is. When the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, that is, in the state A shown in FIG. 9, when the player plays a right-handed game and puts the game ball into the second starting port 21, the second special The symbol hit / miss determination is executed, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (10 minutes off, 3 minutes for the big hit, 2 minutes for the small hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state). Is also referred to as "first condition state"). Therefore, even if the right-handed game is performed in the state A, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large amount of game balls. Therefore, in the state A, the game is advanced by the left-handed game aiming at the first starting port 20 in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of simultaneously (parallel) executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in a variable manner in the state A, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variable display of the second special symbol to end. , The first special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner.

When the second special symbol time saving function is activated, that is, in the state B or the state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as a "second condition state"), as shown in FIG. 9, the second is 2 Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, the player can perform the right-handed game without reducing the number of balls held compared to the left-handed game (maintened or slightly reduced in state B, state C). (In the case of increasing), it is possible to smoothly execute the game (second special symbol hit / miss determination, second special symbol variable game). Further, in this embodiment, the first special symbol time saving function is also operated during the period when the second special symbol time saving function is operating, but the first special symbol time saving function may not be operated.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function (second special symbol time reduction function) for the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) operate at the same time. Then, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for ordinary symbols operate in synchronization with the high-base generation function. That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) and the low base state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy). It does not work in the low base state). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as “normal symbol high probability state”). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined to be a hit is larger than that in the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C). Using the ordinary symbol hit determination table, the ordinary symbol hit / fail determination (determination of the ordinary symbol) is performed (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stop symbol will be a normal hit symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. ..

Further, in the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8E). Further, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) to open. The second starting port is opened during the operation period. Further, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the high base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 is assumed to perform the opening operation for 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). .. Further, the closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is set to 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening / closing member 37 is different between the low base state and the high base state, but the number of opening operations may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be set to open once for 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be set to open three times for 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be set to 6 times of 1.0 seconds, which may be larger than the number of times of opening in the low base state. Such a case is also referred to as the function of increasing the number of times of opening of the variable winning device 22 is activated.

In the high base state, the probability fluctuation function for the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, so that these functions are not activated as compared with the low base state. , The period in which the second starting port 21 is open becomes longer (the opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 becomes higher (also referred to as "high frequency state"). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the second special symbol winning / failing determination becomes high. As described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls on hand.

Further, if the opening time is the same, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball passes through the second starting port 21 when the number of opening times is small. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to open once for 6.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is closed during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the game ball starts to flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state during the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. The time is set so that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is in the open state while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the open state. Further, in order to prevent the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is used for the game on the front side thereof. The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the material is different). As a result, the speed at which the game ball flows down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to a speed slower than the game torrent or speed of the game ball passage on the front side thereof. Further, as a mode for reducing the flow rate, the inclination angle may be loosened, or an inhibitory member (projection or the like) for reducing the flow rate may be provided. Further, as a result, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning opening. The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if a small hit occurs and the second large winning opening 35 is in the open state (the ball can be entered), the flowing game ball enters the second starting opening 21 and is the second. It is difficult to enter the big winning opening 35.

The high base state does not have to activate all of the above functions. That is, by operating at least one of the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol, the second starting port is more than when the function is not operating. It suffices if 21 is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state of the special symbol. The function that generates such a high base state is called the "high base generation function".

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is more advantageous for the player than the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol, so that the player decides the first special symbol. There is a possibility of trying to display the second special symbol in a variable manner without displaying it in a variable manner. That is, there is a possibility of trying to perform a right-handed game even in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state). However, as described above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol. Since it is set to, even if the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the normal state, it cannot be variablely displayed many times, and the game efficiency is very poor. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to variablely display the first special symbol by the left-handed game than to variablely display the second special symbol by the right-handed game. Here, "a state in which the first special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)" means that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". It means that it is. Further, "a state in which the second special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)" means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved second special symbols is "0". It means that it is.

Further, in the high base state such as the high accuracy high base state and the low accuracy high base state, and in the high accuracy low base state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened by the second special symbol time saving function, and the right-handed game. Improves game efficiency. In such a case, it is possible to proceed with the game more advantageously by performing a right-handed game and performing a second special symbol winning / failing determination which is advantageous for the player. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. Because it is. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which is a trigger for determining whether or not the symbol is correct, a right-handed hit is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21.

Further, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 is the same as in the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state), but the ball is executed based on the entry into the second starting port 21. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is changed in a short time, a right-handed game is performed in which the second special symbol winning / failing determination, which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol winning / failing determination, can be executed. Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol are not activated, so that the player enters the second starting port 21. The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, the prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as in the high base state. However, instead, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment prevents the number of game balls from decreasing during the big hit due to the small hit (small hit probability: 300/630) that occurs with a high probability, and rather causes the small hit to occur frequently. It is also possible to increase the number of balls held by (generating multiple times).

That is, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the right-handed game causes the ball to enter the second starting port 21 frequently, so that the number of balls held is not significantly reduced. 2 Aim for the next big hit by judging whether the special symbol is correct or not. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is set to one, and even if all the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting opening 21, the game is played. The sphere does not increase (maintain). Further, in this embodiment, since about 90 to 95% of the game balls hit to the right are set to enter the second starting opening 21, the high base is used unless the ball enters another entry opening. If the condition is continued for a long period of time, the number of balls held will decrease, albeit slightly.

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy and low-base state, a small hit is frequently generated by the second special symbol hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 by the right-handed game, and the ball held in the small hit game. Along with increasing the number, we aim to generate the next big hit by judging whether the second special symbol is correct or not. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the longer the period in which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the period in the high-accuracy low-base state continues), the more small hits are generated. There are more opportunities (to perform a small hit game), which is advantageous to the player.

[Explanation of board configuration and game status]
Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various entrances are arranged from the upstream side of the game area to the gate 28 (start gate 29), the first big winning opening 30, and the first. The two starting openings 21 and the second winning openings 35 are arranged in the optimum order. Further, since the game ball flow passage in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, when each of these winning openings is closed, most of the game balls fired in the right game area 3B (90%). The above) passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first winning opening 30, then flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21, and then flows down the second second. It is configured to flow down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 of the winning opening 35 and flow down to the out opening 34. If there is an open winning opening in the middle of the flow, the ball enters the winning opening and is discharged from the winning opening to the back surface of the game board. It has a structure that does not work.

By arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is hindered from reaching the gate 28 by the opened second starting port 21 or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the normal symbol hold becomes "0" and a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbol does not change) occurs. That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream of the right game area, almost all the game balls hit to the right can be passed through the gate 28 regardless of whether or not the other winning openings are open. Further, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows down the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not hinder the ball from entering another winning opening.

When a right-handed game is performed in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the game ball first passes through the gate 28, and it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is opened. Will be done. In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is also set to a high probability (239/240), so that the game ball is gated. Immediately after passing through (1 second later), the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 is opened. That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol hit / miss determination is executed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting port 21. 2 The starting port 21 is in the open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also set to open once for 6.0 seconds, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second as long as the right-handed game is continued. After that, the cycle of opening once for 6.0 seconds, closing during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then opening once for 6.0 seconds will be repeated (1 second closing → 6). Open for 0.0 seconds → Close for 1 second → Open for about 6.0 seconds → ...).

Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is almost opened, and most of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B are (about 80 to 90%) in the second starting port 21. It will enter the ball. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the second special symbol hit / miss determination is executed. In the second special symbol winning / failing determination, in the high accuracy and high base state, there is a 1/63 probability of a big hit, a 30/63 probability of a small hit, and a 32/63 probability of a loss.

First, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is wrong, most of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B (about 80 to 90%) are in the open state after passing through the gate 28. The other game balls enter the second starting port 21 and flow downstream from the game ball passage branching in front of the second starting port 21, without flowing down to the second starting port 21. Enter the ball 26 or flow into the out port 34. As a result, the second special symbol hit / miss determination is continuously executed. In addition, since one prize ball is ejected by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed with almost no reduction in the number of balls held, and the next big hit is aimed at. Is possible. In addition, one prize ball is also ejected by entering one ball into the third starting port 26.

Next, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is a big hit, the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 is opened in the manner corresponding to the big hit type shown in FIG. .. Further, the second big winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big hit game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the game ball that flows down by the game to the right is smoothly placed in the first big winning opening without being hindered by other winning openings such as the second starting opening 21. Enter the ball at 30. Here, when the second starting opening 21 is arranged upstream from the first big winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21 shifts to the low base state during the big hit game, but in this embodiment, the second starting opening 21 is placed even in the low base state. Since the specifications are such that the ball is frequently opened, the game ball flowing down the right game area during the big hit game enters the second start opening 21 first and does not enter the second start opening 21. A situation occurs in which only the game ball enters the second large winning opening 30.

Moreover, since the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is one, the execution time of the big hit game is only extended for a long time, and the player has no merit. Rather, there is a risk that the game will be redundant, will not proceed smoothly, and will reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, by arranging the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 as in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation and smoothly proceed with the big hit game. Become. Since the first big winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 may prevent the ball from entering the second starting opening 21 when not during the big hit game. do not have.

Next, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is a small hit, the second large winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened in the opening / closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. Become. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds). However, as described above, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is open for most of the time. Therefore, about 99% (almost all) of the game balls flowing down to the second starting port 21 enter the second starting port 21 arranged on the upstream side of the second large winning opening 35. Therefore, in the high base state, a small hit occurs, and even when the small hit game in which the second large winning opening 35 is opened is executed, the second large winning opening 21 on the upstream side causes the second large winning on the downstream side. The entry into the mouth 35 is hindered, and it is difficult to enter the second major winning opening 35. Although the number is small (although unlikely), even in the high base state, the game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 when the second starting port 21 is in the closed state. When the second big winning opening 35 is reached, if the second big winning opening 35 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second big winning opening 35.

Next, the high accuracy and low base state will be described. The high-accuracy low-base state is a low-base state, but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting right. When a right-handed game is performed in a high-accuracy and low-base state, the game ball first passes through the gate 28, and a determination as to whether or not the second starting port 21 is opened (normal symbol hit / fail determination) is executed. In the low base state (high accuracy low base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a longer time (3 seconds) than in the high base state, and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is about half that of the high base state (high base state). Since it is set to 120/240), a little time after the game ball passes through the gate (3 seconds later), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 is in the open state. Will be. Since the probability of hitting is about 1/2, hits and misses occur in about half.

That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol hit / miss determination is executed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the second game ball that has passed through the gate passes through the entrance of the second starting port 21. The starting port 21 is in the open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is set to 0.9 seconds three times (the closing time between openings is 0.1 seconds), the second starting port 21 will be open as long as the right-handed game is continued. It closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and when it hits, it opens 3 times for 0.9 seconds, and when it comes off, it becomes the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds again. In the example where hits and misses occur alternately, the second starting port 21 closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, then opens 3 times for 0.9 seconds, and then the normal symbol for 3 seconds. It closes during the fluctuation time, becomes off, and closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and repeats the cycle (3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → about. 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open → ...).

Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in a high-accuracy and low-base state, the period in which the second starting port 21 is in the open state is about 30%, and the period in which the second start port 21 is in the closed state is about 70%. .. Therefore, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the second start is compared with the high-base state in which the period in which the second start port 21 is open is about 90% and the period in which the second start port 21 is closed is about 10%. It is highly possible that the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the mouth 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reaches the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 without entering the second starting port 21. .. The possibility that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment will be a small hit is different regardless of whether it is in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) or in the high accuracy low base state. do not have. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 300/630). Further, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment executed in the left-handed game does not have a small hit, and the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment executed in the right-handed game has a small hit. ing.

As described above, in the high accuracy and low base state, about 70% of the game balls flowing down the right game area (flowing down to the second starting port 21) enter the second starting port 21. Without going down, it flows down to the second big winning opening 35 provided downstream of the second starting opening 21. As a result, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is a small hit, the second large winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is opened in the opening / closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. It becomes a state. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first large winning opening 30 and flows down to the second starting opening 21, and if the second starting opening 21 is in the open state, the first 2 Enter the starting port 21, and if the second starting opening 21 is in the closed state, the ball passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21 and flows down to the second large winning opening 35, and is a small hit game. Enter the second big winning opening 35 in the open state.

Since the prize balls based on the entry into the 2nd prize opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each entry, the prize balls are entered into the 2nd prize opening 35 during the small hit game. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls held during the high accuracy and low base state. In addition, the high-accuracy low-base state continues until the next big hit occurs at least by the special symbol hit / fail judgment (only the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed as long as the right-handed game is continued). The longer the game continues, the more the player can increase the number of balls he has. In this embodiment, it is possible to obtain about 20 prize balls (two balls) on average by generating one small hit game. By generating this small hit game a plurality of times (many times) until the next big hit occurs, it is possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 pieces in 10 times). Further, as a result, as the total winning balls in the "renso period" in which the right-handed game is continued, the winning balls of the small hit game can be added in addition to the winning balls of the big hit game, and a larger number of game balls can be obtained. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Further, the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30 for big hits (for big hits only), and the second big winning opening 35 arranged downstream from the second starting opening 21 (the most downstream among them) are for small hits (for small hits). It is said to be a big prize opening (only for small hits). Further, by arranging the second big winning opening 35, which is a big winning opening for small hits, downstream from the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening / closing control) of the second starting opening 21 causes the second big winning opening. The number (ratio) of game balls that reach the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed by the opening / closing control of the second starting port 21 (time of opening state, fluctuation time of normal symbol, winning probability of normal symbol winning / failing determination), a high base state ( The high-probability low-base state has a higher probability that the game ball will enter the second large winning opening 35 than the low-probability high-base state and the high-probability high-base state). Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second big winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting opening 21 (without entering the ball), the first step is made. 2 The effect of opening / closing control of the starting port 21 is made more effective.

Further, even in the same right-handed game, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 to almost maintain the holding ball (including a slight increase or a slight decrease) (or the speed of the holding ball decrease is suppressed). (While), a state in which the game is played with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment will be a big hit (advantageous big hit) (high base state), and a small game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21. A state in which the player plays with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment will be a big hit (advantageous big hit) while increasing the number of balls held by entering the second big winning opening 35 when a hit occurs (high accuracy and low). (Base state), and has diversified playability. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the entertainment of the game. For the player, the high-accuracy low-base state in which the number of balls held can be increased is more advantageous than the high-base state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high accuracy high base state, the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (50 or 100) in the high accuracy high base state. If the jackpot is not reached until the display is completed, the gaming state is changed to the high accuracy and low base state. Further, when the game state after the big hit game is set to the high base state, it is difficult for the effect symbol display unit or the like to recognize whether the high base state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state. The game effect is executed in various display modes. As a result, even if the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is not the high-accuracy low-base state but the high-accuracy low-base state, it will change to the high-accuracy low-base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations. It will be possible to play the game with expectation. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the entertainment interest for a long period of time.

Further, in this embodiment, there are "2R 5th jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot" as the types of jackpots that shift from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state. "2R 5th jackpot" shifts from the high accuracy high base state to the high accuracy low base state after 50 times of special symbol fluctuation display, and "2R 6th jackpot" shifts 100 times of special symbol variation display. After that, the state shifts from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state. Further, as the high accuracy and low base state, it has "2R 7th big hit" and "2R 8th big hit". The "2R 7th jackpot" shifts from the low accuracy high base state to the low accuracy low base state (normal state) after 50 times of special symbol fluctuation display, and the "2R 8th jackpot" is 100 times special. After the variable display of the symbol has passed, the state shifts from the low accuracy high base state to the low accuracy low base state (normal state). In this embodiment, these "2R 5th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot", "2R 7th jackpot", and "2R 8th jackpot" are the four jackpot types related to the jackpot game and the high after the jackpot game. By executing a common effect in the base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state it is. That is, it is in a non-notification state in which the game state is not notified.

In this embodiment, 50 times depending on the distribution rate (occurrence rate) of these "2R 5th big hit", "2R 6th big hit", "2R 7th big hit", and "2R 8th big hit" which are not notified. If the high base state (non-notification state) continues even after the passage of time, it is more likely that the high base state will shift to the high accuracy low base state after 100 times than when the high base state ends after 50 times. It is supposed to be done. As a result, the player expects to shift to the high-accuracy low-base state after 50 times, and the high-base state continues without shifting to the high-accuracy low-base state even after 50 times (). Even if the non-notification state continues), it is possible to further increase the expectation for the high accuracy and low base state. This makes it possible to maintain the game entertainment for a long period of time.

In addition, even if the possibility of shifting to the high-accuracy and low-base state is set to be the same regardless of whether the transition is made after 50 times or 100 times, by changing to such a mode. On the contrary, the case of shifting after 50 times may be more likely to shift to the high-accuracy and low-base state than the case of shifting after 100 times. As a result, if the high base state continues even after 50 times, the expectation for the transition to the high accuracy low base state is lowered. Further, if another jackpot type is provided and the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays has passed, after the second predetermined number of times, which is larger than the first predetermined number, has elapsed ( You may decide to move to a high-accuracy low-base state (if you don't get a big hit by then). On the contrary, if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations are displayed, after the second predetermined number of times, which is larger than the first predetermined number, has elapsed (if it is a big hit by then). If not), it may be confirmed that the state does not shift to the high accuracy and low base state. In addition, when a predetermined condition (random number lottery, etc.) is satisfied in the middle of the non-notification state of the high base state, the game is displayed by displaying characters and characters that make it easy for the player to recognize the game state (executes a definite effect). The state may be notified.

Further, in the case where the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit or the result of the second special symbol hit / miss in the high accuracy / low base state, the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is in the above-mentioned high base state. It is the same as the case of a big hit and the case of a miss.

Further, the start gate 29 is provided at the uppermost stream in the right game area 3B by also being used as the gate 28. As a result, when the jackpot standby state is reached, the game ball is passed through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing without being obstructed by the second start port 21 or the like to pass through the start gate 29, and the jackpot game is started. It becomes possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In that case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the first large winning opening 30 and the second gate 28 may be provided. It is necessary to provide it upstream from the starting port 21 and the second large winning opening 35.

Further, when the right-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to light in a predetermined manner to notify the right-handed game area that the game should be fired. Further, when the left-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to notify the left-handed game area that the game should be fired. Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the launch direction by turning on the LEDs according to the gaming state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify the left game area that both LEDs should be turned off as a display mode such as "y □ z □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y ■ z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming states when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is performed are "low accuracy low base state", "high accuracy low base state", and "high accuracy low base state". It is possible to control either "low accuracy high base state" or "high accuracy high base state", but among them, the low accuracy low base state is also called "normal gaming state", and the high accuracy low base state is called. Also called "specific gaming state".

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation (control processing by the main control unit) of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 46. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 and executes it. .. As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, the initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial settings, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, statuses, and counters. Reset etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". In addition, the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that. In the examples and drawings, the normal symbol is "general diagram", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "special diagram 1" or "first special symbol", and the second special symbol is "special diagram". It may be called "2" or "second special drawing".

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are disabled (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by one addition. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, interrupts are enabled (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, in a cycle of 4 msec. Then, between the end of the interrupt process (S105) and the start of the next interrupt process (S105), the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Will be executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt process (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt processing (S105), the output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. do. Examples of the command and the like output here include information on the game state, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, the symbol as the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information about the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information about the content of the command.

In the input processing (S202) performed after the output processing (S201), various sensors (first starting port sensor 20a, second starting port sensor 21a, first large winning opening sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. The detection signal detected by 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the general entry opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) is read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as the winning ball information. Further, the detection signal from the lower plate full switch for detecting the fullness of the surplus ball tray 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as the lower plate full data.

Next, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is executed. The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed after the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (S105) and the other period (after the end of the interrupt processing (S105)). It is performed both in the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started). As a result, the acquired values of various random numbers are given randomness.

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), start ball entry process (S205), normal figure operation process (S206), and special figure 1 operation process (S207), which will be described later. ), Special figure 2 operation process (S208), hold ball number process (S209), and power failure monitoring process (S210) are executed. After that, various other processes (S211) are executed to end the interrupt process (S105). Then, until the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the main control main processes S102 to S104 are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
Next, the start port sensor detection process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal symbol hold balls (the number of normal symbol hold, specifically, the number of normal figure hold provided in the RAM) is counted by the counter. It is determined whether or not the value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 in S301 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If it is determined in S302 that the number of normally symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the stored normal symbol reserved ball number (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. Do and proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7B) of the random number counter for normal symbol hit / miss determination stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number value (acquisition information, normal figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol hold balls in the normal figure hold storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 20, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a (S305). If it is determined in S305 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, when it is determined in S305 that the game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of first special figure reserved, specifically, the main control unit 80). It is determined whether or not the number (the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the first special figure holds) provided in the RAM of the above reaches 4 (upper limit number) (S306). Then, when it is determined in S306 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. When it is determined in S306 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 stored (S307), and random numbers related to Special Figure 1 are acquired. Perform processing (S308) and proceed to S309.

In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, which is stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, and the random number for determining the jackpot type. The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (random number values shown in FIG. 7A), and the acquired random number values (acquisition information, special feature) are acquired. The figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in the first special figure hold storage unit 85a.

In S309, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a (S309). When it is determined in S309 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 21 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S309 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of second special figure reserved, specifically the main control). It is determined whether or not the number (value of the counter for counting the number of the second special figure holds) provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). Then, when it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. When it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the stored number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 (S311), and it is related to Special Figure 2. Random number acquisition processing is performed (S312), and the processing is completed.

In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), the value of the special symbol hit / miss determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is the same as in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308). (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7A). (Random number value), and the acquired random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the second special figure 2 in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Processing at the time of starting ball entry]
Next, the process at the time of starting and entering the ball (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs a start ball entry process (S205) after the start port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start ball entry process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by “1” (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 in S307 in the start opening sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start opening. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure hold storage unit is read (acquired information). S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the acquired random number values read out, the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not) is a big hit according to the current game state (low probability state or high probability state). It is determined whether or not it is out of order (preliminary determination), and if the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big hit is further determined (preliminary determination). The determination (preliminary determination) by this S317 is a preliminary determination (so-called “holding look-ahead”) in which the hit / fail judgment (judgment of whether or not it is a big hit) for the special figure 2 hold is performed prior to the hit / fail judgment in the special figure 2 hit / miss judgment process described later. ").

The pre-judgment as to whether or not it is a big hit can be made in the big hit judgment table (see FIG. 8A), that is, the big hit judgment table for the high probability state if it is a high probability state, or the normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the value matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. In addition, as another preliminary determination mode, as a variation pattern information determination table capable of determining variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table for a high probability state (for a high probability state). It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern information determination table of the above is provided. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the acquired random number value (value of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to do. Then, from the selected fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and whether or not a game effect with high reliability of the big hit is executed.

Next, in S318, game information (preliminary judgment information) related to the result of judgment by S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random value for special symbol hit / fail judgment matches the big hit judgment value (big hit information), and Information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random value for determining the jackpot type) (big hit type information), information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches the small hit determination value (small hit information). ), Command data including information indicating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) is generated as a special figure 2 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). In addition, as a special figure 2 start entry command, a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read by S316 may be transmitted to the sub-control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted as it is. Is not transmitted as it is, but the game information acquired based on the value of the random number acquired in Special Figure 2 (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information and the like) may be transmitted.

Further, by analyzing the special figure 2 start-in ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub control unit 90, it is possible to determine whether the information is related to a big hit, which type is the big hit type, and the information related to the small hit. The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is such a thing. Further, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entry command, whether or not the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when it is determined in a high probability state, and low. It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when it is judged by the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start entry command as hold (effect hold information), predetermines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not the command is successful in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect hold information determined to be a big hit is stored in.

From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not among the random number values read by S316 is not sent to the sub-control unit as it is, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other big hit type (big hit). Command data including information indicating the value of the random number value for determining the type) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) and the information indicating the result of the pre-judgment are generated as the special figure 2 start entry command. It is possible to set.

Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" in the same manner as in the process according to the above-mentioned special figure 2 (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends as it is. The processing of S321 to S323 is the same as that of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure hold storage unit is read (S321). Pre-judgment is performed on the read random number value (S322). Then, the command data including the game information related to this prior determination is generated as the special figure 1 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). The preliminary determination (holding look-ahead) of S322 is performed prior to the accuracy determination in the special figure 1 accuracy determination process described later.

[Usu-zu operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal drawing operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 after the start ball entry process (S205). In the normal figure operation process (S206), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. .. Then, when the "normal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "2" (S401). NO, YES for S403), normal symbol change processing (S404) is performed, and if the "normal symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S401 and S403, YES for S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. Processing (S406) is performed, and if the "normal operation status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. The normal operation status is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in S501 that it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit / miss determination process described later is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the gaming state is the high base state (state B), the normal symbol variation time is 1 second. Select a symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a low base state (states A and C), a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Further, following the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), a normal symbol random number shift process (S504), which will be described later, is performed, then a normal symbol variation start process (S505) is performed, and the process is completed. In the normal symbol variation start processing (S505), the variation display of the normal symbol is started with the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of change of the normal symbol.

[Ordinary symbol hit / fail judgment process]
Next, the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / miss determination random number counter stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) (S602). When it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, it is in a high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (hit determination) among the normal symbol hit determination tables shown in FIG. 8 (C). It is determined whether or not the value is a hit (S604) by the high-probability normal figure hit / fail judgment based on the value "0" to "238"), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values.

On the other hand, in S602, when the state B flag is not ON, that is, it is determined that the base state is low (NO in S602), the state A (state C) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C). By the low-probability normal figure hit / fail judgment based on the table (hit judgment value is "0" to "119"), it is judged whether or not it is a hit (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / fail judgment (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and if it is judged to be a miss (NO in S605), the stop display is missed. A normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the ordinary) is determined (S606), and the process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal figure) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal symbol per normal symbol (design per normal figure) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the normal symbol hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Ordinary symbol random number shift processing]
Next, the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each Fuzu hold in the Fuzu hold storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest hold storage in the normal figure hold storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth hold of the normal figure is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general map hold is digested in the order of hold.

[Processing during normal symbol change]
Next, the normal symbol change processing (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and when it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S801), the processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803), and then the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed. Other processing such as stopping at the display result (hit normal symbol or missed normal symbol) according to the judgment result of the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not is performed (S804), and the processing is completed.

[Normal symbol confirmation process]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). When it is determined that the normal figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal figure hit flag is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is a high base state (S902). When it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), the opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), move to S904. The opening pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second starting port opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the open patterns for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) are open for states A and C (for low base states). Set the pattern (S906) and move to S904. The opening pattern for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.9 seconds is performed three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second start port opening counter. In S904, the normal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is completed.

[Ordinary electric accessory processing]
Next, the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal figure is ON (S1001). The normal-figure-hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second starting port 21 has been completed in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. When it is determined that the end flag per normal figure is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). When it is determined by S1002 that the second starting port is not open (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003), and the opening time has not been reached. If it is determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second starting port (YES in S1003), the control for opening the second starting port is executed (S1004), and the process ends. If it is determined by S1002 that the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, after opening the second starting port 21 in advance. If it is determined (whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed) (S1005) and it is determined that it is not the closing time of the second starting port (NO in S1005), the process is terminated. When it is determined by S1005 that it is the closing time of the second starting port (YES in S1005), the process of closing (closing) the second starting port 21 is performed (S1006), and the value of the second starting port opening counter is performed. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start opening opening counter is "0" (S1008). When it is determined in S1008 that the value of the open counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is terminated as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the open counter is "0" (YES in S1008), the end processing for the normal figure to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end flag for the normal figure is set (S1009). S1010), finish the process. The second starting port opening counter becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times in the state B (high base state), and the state A. And even in the state C (low base state), when the second starting port 21 is opened three times, it becomes “0”. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed. , Turn off the normal figure hit end flag (S1011), turn off the normal figure hit flag (S1012), set the normal figure operation status to "1" (S1013), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal figure operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special Figure 1 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 operation process (S207) after the normal figure operation process (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big prize device (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2". (NO for S1101, YES for S1103), special symbol 1 variable processing (S1104) is performed, and if "Special Figure 1 operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1101 and S1103, YES for S1105) ), Perform special symbol 1 confirmation processing (S1106), and if "Special Figure 1 operation status" is "4" (NO for S1101, S1103, S1105, YES for S1107), special electric as a big hit game The accessory processing 1 (S1108) is performed, and if the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the processing is completed. The operation status of Special Figure 1 is "1" by default. Further, since the small hit is not set as the result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment, the special electric accessory process 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small hit is set as the result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. You may. In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric accessory processing 2 as a small hit game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby processing]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. 22. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1) is “0” (S1201). When it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0", that is, there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 (YES in S1201), then. , It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in the game (S1207). Then, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is in the game (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is not in the game (NO in S1207), the process is in progress to set the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the standby screen (during the execution of the demo screen for waiting for customers). If it is determined whether or not (S1208) and it is determined that the standby screen is in progress (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not in progress (NO in S1208), the standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process ends.

Further, in S1201, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not "0", that is, there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 (in S1201). NO), the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204), the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206), which will be described later, are performed in this order. Here, "special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not playing" means that special figure 2 is not in variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0". Means that. Of course, it means that the big hit game and the small hit game according to the special figure 2 are not executed either.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Fail Judgment Process]
Next, the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. 23. In the special figure 1 hit / miss determination process (S1203), first, as a determination value, the determination value is stored in the lowestmost area of the first special figure hold storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold). The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct (in the oldest memory) is read (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is executing the variation display related to the jackpot (S1602). When it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol does not determine whether it is a big hit, but a small hit or a small hit. It is considered to be one of the deviations (that is, it is not judged as a big hit). Since the first special symbol does not have a small hit as a result of the hit / fail judgment, when the second special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment executed during that period is All will be off. When it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol is not executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, Determine if it is in a high probability state (S1603). When it is determined in S1603 that the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, it is in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)). The hit / fail judgment is made based on the table (big hit judgment values are "3" and "397") (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S1603), the hit / fail determination is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

In S1606, it is determined whether the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is "big hit" (S1606), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (YES in S1606), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-). AS) is read out, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8 (B) (S1608), and the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1609). Fig. 1 Turn on the jackpot fluctuation flag (S1610) and finish the process. In addition, in the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is judged using the big hit type judgment table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table of. Further, when it is determined that the hit / fail of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit, either the 4R first big hit or the 4R second big hit is executed. If the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) is determined to be a big hit, the 15R 3rd big hit, 4R 4th big hit, 2R 5th big hit, 2R 6th big hit, 2R 7th big hit, 2R One of the eighth jackpots is executed (FIG. 8 (B)). On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is not "big hit" (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, the off-design is determined (S1607), and the processing is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot fluctuation flag, the first jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the first special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) is being executed. And a second jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), and the main control unit 80. The flag corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the above is set. Further, as the small hit fluctuation flag, the second small hit fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the small hit (variation display in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is set. A flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. Then, when the jackpot fluctuation flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the fluctuation display related to the jackpot is being displayed), in the other special symbol hit / fail determination, the process of determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed. Not performed. That is, control is not performed so that both special symbols execute the variable display related to the jackpot in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of game profit is given to the player in a very short time, and to appropriately suppress gambling.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204) after the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the state A (whether or not it is the low probability low base state) (S1701). Then, when it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1702), and the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON. When it is determined (YES in S1702), the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referred to in the state A jackpot table (the portion corresponding to the status A and the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Select a variation pattern based on (S1703). If the fluctuation pattern is decided, the fluctuation time is also decided. Further, in the first embodiment, one of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of the fluctuation time is selected depending on the state A jackpot table.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). When it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first hold number out-of-order table (state A and out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 and the number of holds The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the parts corresponding to 1 and 2). Further, when it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holds is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second hold number loss table (FIG. The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the variation pattern table shown in 9 (the portion corresponding to the state A and the number of pending numbers 3 and 4).

As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". Fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

If it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not state A (low accuracy low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the gaming state is state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state). Is determined (S1708). When it is determined in S1708 that the state is B (S1708), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1709), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1709). (YES in S1709), refer to the state B jackpot table (the part corresponding to state B and jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), and fluctuate based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). Select a pattern (S1710). When it is determined in S1709 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B deviation table (the part corresponding to the state B and deviation in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711).

Further, when it is determined in S1708 that the gaming state is not the state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), that is, the gaming state is the state C (high accuracy low base state) (NO in S1708). Then, when it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1712) and the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is determined to be ON (YES in S1712), the state C jackpot fluctuation table (in FIG. 9). The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the variation pattern table (the portion corresponding to the state C and the jackpot) in the variation pattern table (S1710). When it is determined in S1712 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the state C deviation table (the part corresponding to the state C and deviation in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714).

In addition, in the state B and the state C, since the game is performed mainly by the variable display of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, if the game is performed according to the game instruction (right-handed or left-handed), the first The variable display of the special symbol is rarely executed. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the states B and C is simplified (there are few types and the fluctuation time is short). In the state B, if it is a big hit, it is set to the fluctuation pattern P15, and if it is out of the way, it is set to the fluctuation pattern P16. Further, in the state C, in the case of a big hit, it is set as the fluctuation pattern P23, and in the case of the deviation, it is set as the fluctuation pattern P24.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, another process shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the process is completed. In the other processing (S1704), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern specification command is included in the variation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random number shift processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. 26. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, when the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is one lower side (for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is composed of an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003". , Address "0000" side) (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when stored up to the upper limit number). Clear the area to 0 (S1803) and finish this process. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol 1 processing during change]
Next, the special symbol 1 variable processing (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. 27. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104), first, the fluctuation time of special figure 1 (variation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. Whether or not it is determined (S1901). When it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in the S1901), the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the processing is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process shifts to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process shifts to the processing of S1904.

Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). When it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B fluctuation counter) that counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the state B (high base state). Is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). When it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned off (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is a low accuracy high base state, it shifts to a low accuracy low base state (normal state), and if it is a high accuracy high base state, it shifts to a high accuracy low base state (advantageous state).

In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and the variation display of the special symbol is stopped at the result according to the judgment result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment random number and the big hit type determination random number. (S1909) and finish the process.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Suspension Processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) is performing the variable display when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed during the variable display of the special figure 1. This is a process of temporarily suspending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 and restarting the interrupted measurement when the big hit game or the small hit game is completed. As a result, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game related to one special symbol, the hit / fail determination process or the variation display related to the other special symbol is not executed.

A special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. 28. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), then the special figure 1 interruption flag is determined. FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON, that is, whether or not the jackpot game according to the special figure 2 is being executed (S2902). When it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not it is (S2909). When it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the process ends. Then, the variable display of the special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902), and when it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), special figure 1 Turn on the interruption flag (S2903), interrupt the measurement of the variation time in Special Figure 1 (S2904), and finish the process. As a result, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

Further, when it is determined in S2901 that the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is already interrupted (YES in S2901), whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON. Is determined (S2905). When it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the jackpot game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). When it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or the small hit game related to the special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned off. (S2907), special figure 1 The measurement of the fluctuation time is restarted (S2908), and the processing is completed. As a result, the suspended display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol (time measurement of the fluctuation time) can be resumed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the interruption flag, the special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and the second special symbol. A special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as a “second interruption flag”) indicating that the variation display is being interrupted is provided, and a flag corresponding to the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Is set (remembered).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. 29. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the jackpot fluctuation display related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002), and the first Turn on the special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating the execution of the jackpot game related to the special symbol (S2003), and shift to the processing of S2004. Thereby, in the special figure 1, it can be shown that the fluctuation display related to the big hit is finished (the big hit is confirmed) and the game shifts to the big hit game.

In S2004, the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds executed during the big hit game (in the mode of opening once per round, one round is from opening to closing of the big winning opening) is set to "4". (S2004), in order to start the jackpot game, set the jackpot opening command (S2005), set the special figure 1 operation status to "4" (S2006), and finish the process. Further, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbol to be variablely displayed. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the variation display of the special symbol has ended. As a result, the jackpot standby state is set. In addition, when it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, that is, the fluctuation display is related to the deviation, so the special figure 1 operation status. Is set to "1" (S2007), and the process is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot flag, the special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the first special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed (“1st jackpot”). (Also referred to as "flag") and the special figure 2 jackpot flag (also referred to as "second jackpot flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. When the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag (also referred to as a "small hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the second special symbol is a small hit and the small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When the small hit game is executed, the small hit flag corresponding to the small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

Here, the round display 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, in the case of the 4R first big hit, the display mode is such as "2R Δ4R ▲ 15R Δ" (for example, ▲: lighting, Δ: extinguishing). Next, the special figure 2 operation process (S211) and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation process (S211), the special figure 1 operation process shown in FIGS. Since the processing is performed in the same flow as S206) etc., the description will be simplified below.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. 21. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation process (S208) after the special figure 1 operation process (S207). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can execute variable display in parallel by the special figure 1 operation process and the special figure 2 operation process. That is, the digestion of the 1st special symbol hold and the digestion of the 2nd special symbol hold ("Variation display of the 1st special symbol and the variation display of the 2nd special symbol", "1st special symbol hit / miss judgment and 2nd special symbol". It is said that the hit / fail judgment and ") can be executed in parallel. Further, in the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the second starting port (the second special symbol hit / miss judgment) is the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the first starting port (the first special symbol hit / miss). It is easier for the player to make a big hit (the amount of profit that can be obtained is large) rather than the judgment) (FIG. 8 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 30, similarly to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big prize device (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages. It is divided and "Special Figure 2 Operation Status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2". (NO for S1151, YES for S1153), special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154) is performed, and if "Special Figure 2 operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1151 and S1153, YES for S1155) ), Perform special symbol 2 confirmation processing (S1156), and if "Special Figure 2 operation status" is "4" (NO for S1151, S1153, S1155, YES for S1157), special electric as a big hit game If the character processing 1 (S1108) is performed and the "special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (all of S1151, S1153, S1155, and S1157 are NO), the special electric character processing as a small hit game is performed. 2 (S1109) is performed. The operation status of Special Figure 2 is "1" by default. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination, the special figure 2 operation process has the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) which is not included in the special figure 1 operation process.

Here, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) is a process common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211), and the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) is a process. Special figure 2 Only the operation process (S211) is processed. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel, but the jackpot game and the first special symbol related to the first special symbol. This is because it is impossible to execute (only one of them can be executed) in parallel with the big hit game related to the special symbol. In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit, but as another embodiment, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
Since the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Special Figure 2 Win / Fail Judgment Process]
The special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. 23. However, since this process is related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowest area of the second special figure hold storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first RAM area of the second special figure hold) is used. The stored random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is read out. Further, since the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment has a small hit, when it is determined that the result of the second special symbol hit / miss judgment is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. Judge whether the result of is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined by S1305 that it is a small hit (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is completed. Other processing is the same as that of the special figure 1 hit / fail determination processing (S1203).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), the process (S1401 to S1420) is the same as that of the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. 24 and 25. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to the second special symbol, it is based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the column corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. And select a variation pattern. Further, since the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the small hit variation flag is ON, the variation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the gaming state.

Further, in the states B and C, the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the second special symbol (determining whether the second special symbol is correct or not). Therefore, in the states B and C, there are more types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) than the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol, and it is possible to select a fluctuation pattern for a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the state A, the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the first special symbol (determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct). Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern of a relatively long time can be selected. Therefore, in the state A, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is simplified (there are few types and the time is short).

In the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, another process (S1404) is performed to finish this process. In other processing (S1404), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted to the lower side by one (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when stored up to the upper limit number). Clear the area to 0 (S1503) and finish this process. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", the special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. do.

[Special symbol 2 processing during change]
The special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 is performed (S1951 to S1959) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. 27. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Suspension Processing]
The special figure 2 fluctuation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 is performed (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. 28. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 finalization process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 is performed (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 finalization process (S1106) shown in FIG. 29. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special figure 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) includes a big hit type (round counter setting process) and a special symbol 2 small hit fluctuation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different, but it is as shown in FIG. 38.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. In the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, the jackpot game start process described later is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to the process of S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2102), and when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2102 that the jackpot start flag is ON (YES in S2102), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the jackpot start flag is a flag that is turned ON when the player launches the game ball into the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball through the start gate 29 in the jackpot standby state. .. After the special symbol is displayed as a fixed stop on the jackpot symbol and becomes a jackpot, the jackpot start flag is turned on by passing the game ball through the start gate, and the jackpot game progresses (the round game starts). Here, if the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29 after the big hit, the gaming machine is maintained in the big hit standby state in which the big hit can be executed. During this time, the player can leave his seat and take a break such as a toilet, a drink, or a telephone. Then, after the break is completed, the game ball is launched at an arbitrary timing of the player, and the game ball is passed through the start gate 29, so that the big hit game can be advanced. Further, the big hit end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the big winning device (first big winning device 31) has been completed (the big hit game has ended) in the big hit game.

When it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and it is determined that it is not open. If so (NO in S2104), is it time to open the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) (round start time), that is, is it time to pass the start gate 29 and start the first round? Or, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If S2105 determines that it is not the start time of the round (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2105), the round start command is set (S2106), the large winning opening processing is performed (S2107), and the processing is completed. As a result, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) according to the type of big hit.

If it is determined by S2104 that the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is open (YES in S2104), the number of balls entered into the big winning opening in that round is the specified maximum number of balls (this implementation). In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not it is time to close the large winning opening (1st major winning opening 30), that is, the large winning opening. It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening time (S2112). If it is determined by S2112 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls (10) has been reached (YES in S2111), or when it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has elapsed (YES in S2112). That is, when it is determined that any one of the two round end conditions is satisfied, the large winning opening (first large winning opening 30) is closed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If the S2115 determines that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends in order to start the next round.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), the jackpot ending command is set (S2116) as the jackpot end process to end the jackpot game, and the jackpot ending period. (S2117), turn on the jackpot end flag (S2118), and finish the process. Further, when it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the final round has been completed, it is then determined whether or not the jackpot ending period has elapsed (S2119). If it is determined by S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has passed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2120), the game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the jackpot flag is turned off (S2122). , The jackpot start flag is turned off (S2123), the special figure operation status setting process 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the process is completed.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. In the jackpot game start process (S2101), it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 has not yet passed in the jackpot standby state. If (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON (S2152), and if it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability change flag is set to OFF (S2102), S2154. Move to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103), and if it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104) and the process proceeds to S2156. .. That is, during the execution of the big hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned off before the start of the big hit game (round game) in order to control the low probability state and the low base state.

If it is determined in S2152 that the probability change flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning off the probability change flag. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning off the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the start gate (S2156), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed the start gate (YES in S2156), the jackpot game is started (opens the round game). Turn on the jackpot start flag (S2157) and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the gate has not passed through the start gate (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the gaming machine continues in the jackpot standby state. Further, when it is determined in S2151 that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, it is determined that the jackpot game has already started (S2151), the process ends. As a result, the player can start (advance) the big hit game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game status setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game completed this time is related to the probability variation jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, 5 types of 4R 1st jackpot, 15R 3rd jackpot, 4R 4th jackpot, 2R 5th jackpot, and 2R 6th jackpot are set as probabilistic jackpots. Determines whether or not falls under any of these five types. Then, when it is determined that the end of this time is the probability variation jackpot (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), and then it is determined whether the completed jackpot game is the 2R 5th jackpot (S2203). .. When it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 5th jackpot (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), the state B counter is set to "50" (S2205), and processing is performed. Finish. As a result, a high base state of up to 50 times is set after the big hit game is completed, and a high accuracy high base state is obtained.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R 5th jackpot (NO in S2203), then it is determined whether or not the finished jackpot game is the 2R 6th jackpot (S2209). If it is determined in S2209 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 6th jackpot (YES in S2209), the state B flag is turned ON (S2210), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2211), and processing is performed. Finish. As a result, a high base state of up to 100 times is set after the big hit game is completed, and a high accuracy high base state is obtained. If it is determined in S2209 that the completed jackpot game is not the 2R 6th jackpot, that is, either the 4R 1st jackpot, the 15R 3rd jackpot, or the 4R 4th jackpot (NO in S2209), the state B flag is turned off. As it is, finish the process. As a result, the game state after the big hit game ends becomes a high accuracy and low base state.

If it is determined in S2201 that the end is not a probability variation jackpot, that is, a low probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), then is the finished jackpot game the 2R 7th jackpot? Is determined (S2206). When it is determined in S2206 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 7th jackpot (YES in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2207), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2208), and processing is performed. Finish. As a result, a high base state of up to 100 times is set after the big hit game is completed, and a low accuracy high base state is obtained. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2206 that the completed jackpot game is not the 2R 7th jackpot, that is, the 4R 2nd jackpot or the 2R 8th jackpot (NO in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and the state is changed. Set "50" in the B counter (S2205) and finish the process. As a result, a high base state of up to 50 times is set after the big hit game is completed, and a low accuracy high base state is obtained.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122) will be described with reference to FIG. 42. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game generated this time is a special symbol. If it is determined that the item is related to 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 jackpot flag is turned off (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, in S3001, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001). ), Turn off the special figure 2 jackpot flag (S3004), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3005), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the large winning device (second large winning device 36) has been completed in the small hit game. When it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is open (S2302). If S2302 determines that the big winning opening is not open (NO in S2302), it is time to open the big winning opening (2nd big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small hit has elapsed. Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the first opening operation, or whether it is time to start the next opening operation after the time of the interval between multiple openings has elapsed (S2303). .. As for the small hit game, the small hit game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fixed stop display of the small hit symbol is displayed regardless of the passage of the start gate. That is, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit.

If S2303 determines that it is not the time to open the big prize opening (NO in S2303), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2303 that it is the opening time of the big winning opening (YES in S2303), the opening processing of the second big winning opening 35 is performed according to the opening pattern of the small hit (see FIG. 6) (S2304). To finish. When it is determined by S2302 that the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the opening operation of 6 times, that is, 6 times It is determined whether or not the total number of game balls entered in the opening operation has reached the specified maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined by S2306 that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is time to close the big prize opening, that is, after opening the big winning opening, the predetermined number It is determined whether or not the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). Then, when it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the six opening operations has reached the specified number of entering balls (10) (YES in S2306), the large winning opening (second large winning opening) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the process shifts to the small hit end process of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the opening counter for small hits is set. One decrement is performed (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit open counter is "0" (S2310). When it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit open counter is not "0" (NO in S2310), the next open operation is started, so that the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit opening counter is "0" (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end processing of S2311. In S2311, as the small hit end process for ending the small hit game, the small hit ending command is set (S2311), the small hit ending period is started (S2312), the small hit end flag is set (S2313), and the small hit end flag is set. Finish the process. The opening counter for small hits becomes "0" when the large winning opening is opened 6 times.

In addition, when it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), the opening operation of 6 times has been completed (or a specified number of game balls have been entered). It is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has elapsed (S2315), and if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), the special figure operation status setting process 2 is performed (S2317), and the process is completed. By generating a small hit game in a high accuracy and low base state, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls held, which enhances the interest of the game. At the start of the small hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF, and are not switched from OFF to ON. Further, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time. If it is determined that it is related to the special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is performed. Finish. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101). ), Turn off the special figure 2 small hit flag (S3104), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3105), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Reserved ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number processing (S209) after the operation processing (S208) in FIG. As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out (the number of reserved ball number). S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (command for the number of reserved balls for transmitting the information on the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is completed.

[Power failure monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power cutoff monitoring process (S210) after the hold ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 48, in the power cutoff monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not there is an input of the power cutoff signal (S2601), and when it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined by S2601 that there is an input of a power off signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether it is a probability change, whether it is a hit game, the number of reserved balls is several, the probability change / time reduction Data related to (the number of remaining fluctuations is several, etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power off flag is turned ON (S2603), and then loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

As described in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has the above-mentioned characteristic configuration, and thus has a unique effect not found in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or is compared with the conventional pachinko gaming machine. And has a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a big hit in the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct (also referred to as the first special symbol (also referred to as "first identification information") or the second special symbol (also referred to as "second identification information"). Is stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol (also referred to as "specific display mode"), a high-probability state occurs (a privilege is given), and a high-probability state (also referred to as a predetermined display mode) is satisfied. Benefits) will end.

The process of granting this high-probability state (privilege) (game state setting process (S2121)) can also be referred to as "privilege granting means". It should be noted that the first special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the variation display and the stop display are performed to show the same pass / fail judgment result. , "The special symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed by the big hit symbol" can be replaced with "the effect symbol is stopped and displayed by the hit effect symbol (specific display mode)". ..

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads out the program of the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, the CPU initialization process is first performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) and other settings, and various flags, statuses, and counters are reset.

Subsequently, the S4002 determines whether or not the power cutoff signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized, but due to a power failure or the like. If the power off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. It should be noted that these S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (at the time of turning on the power), and are not executed after that. Further, in the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 also performs the same processing as the power supply cutoff monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. 11, and the power supply cutoff signal is generated due to a power failure or the like. When it is turned on, the data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, the data related to the effect control when a power failure such as a power failure occurs is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) after the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed. The state of is restored to the state before the power failure occurred.

The S4004 disables interrupts. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random number for determining the effect includes a random number for determining the variable effect that determines the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect pattern game effect to be executed, a random number for determining the advance notice effect that determines the advance notice effect, and a random number for determining the effect symbol that determines the effect symbol. There are random numbers and so on. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random numbers, the random numbers may not be added one by one, but may be added two by two. The random number for determining the effect is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) notifying that the starting ball has arrived is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80 ( It can be used when a fluctuation start command) is transmitted, or when a fluctuation effect pattern, which will be described later, is determined. The storage location of the acquired random number for determining the effect is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also referred to as “sub-output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are controlled by the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp. Among the boards 107, the command is transmitted to the control board to which the corresponding command is transmitted. Each control board (each control unit) that received the command uses various effect devices (image display device, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. (Direction pattern game production, special game production related to hit game, etc.) is executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently enables interrupts (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of the effect symbols and the like executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. It is also possible to control the lighting of various lamps, control the operation of movable decorative members, control the sound output from the speaker, and the like.

[Receive interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91. Judgment (S4101). Then, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is completed. .. This receive interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing for creating switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d is performed (S4201). Next, the lamp data output process (S4202) for outputting the lamp data for causing the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 to emit light, and the drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203) is performed. The lamp data and the drive data are created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed in which the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4303), and the switch stored in the switch state acquisition process is performed. A switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the data is performed (S4304). After that, other processing such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the random number for determining the effect is executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. 51. In the reception command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the start ball entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that the start ball entry command has not been received (NO in S4401). , When it is determined that the start entry command has been received (YES in S4401), the production hold information storage process (S4402) is performed and the process shifts to the S4403 process. The effect hold information storage process (S4402) is the various information (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination disorder) included in the start ball entry command (special figure 1 start ball entry command or special figure 2 start ball entry command) received by S4401. Game information such as numerical values and fluctuation pattern random values) according to the type of special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) and the number of special symbol reserved balls when sending and receiving the start entry command (at the time of command generation). , It is stored in a predetermined effect hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in the shift memory format. For example, when the received start-in ball command is the special figure 1 start-in ball command corresponding to the reserved ball number "4" in the special figure 1, the pre-judgment result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 start-in ball command. Etc. are stored as the special figure 1 effect hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage content (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area in the sub control board 90 is the special figure hold storage unit (first special figure hold storage unit, second special figure) in the main control board (main control unit) 80 described above. It matches the stored contents (acquired information) of the reserved storage unit). From this, it can be said that the effect holding information storage area of the sub-control board 90 is also the “acquisition information storage means”.

Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and if it is determined that a variation start command has been received (YES in S4403), the variation effect start process described later (YES). S4404) is performed to shift to the processing of S4405, and if it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the processing shifts to S4405 without performing the fluctuation effect start processing. In S4405, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and if it is determined that a fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to display the variation effect. The variable effect end process to be terminated is performed (S4406). In the variation effect end process (S4406), a variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the sub-output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect symbol 8 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop display is displayed, and the variable effect (effect pattern game effect) is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process shifts to the processing of S4407 without performing the fluctuation effect end processing. The variable effect refers to various effects performed according to the variable display of the special symbol.

Subsequently, the S4407 determines whether or not a hit game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 when executing the hit game (big hit game, small hit game), and specifically, the start of the big hit game (generation of big hit). ), The opening command sent at the start of the round, the round end command sent at the end of the round, the ending command sent at the end of the jackpot game, the first big prize opening in the round game The 1st big prize opening command sent based on the entry to 30 and the 2nd big winning opening entry command sent based on the entry to the 2nd big winning opening in the small hit game are applicable. .. The S4407 determines whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands has been received, and if it has not been received (NO in S4407), it shifts to the processing of S4409 and if it has been received (YES in S4407). , Performs processing related to the execution of the effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command (S4408).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, the opening effect command that specifies the opening effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if it is a round start command, the command is concerned. Set the round effect command in the sub output buffer to specify the round effect according to the round specified based on, and if it is the ending command, specify the ending effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command. Set the production command in the sub output buffer. If the received command is a big winning opening command (1st big winning opening command, 2nd big winning opening entry command), the big winning opening specified based on the command (1st big winning opening) The sub-output buffer is set with a ball entry command that specifies the entry effect according to the entry into the opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35). When various effect commands related to the set winning game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 performs an opening effect or a round according to the progress of the winning game. The effect, the ball entry effect, and the like are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the processing of S4409 is performed, and this processing is completed. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other reception commands (for example, normal symbol fluctuation start command and normal symbol fluctuation stop command) other than the above-mentioned various commands is performed (S4409).

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the variation effect start processing (S4402) executed in the reception command analysis processing (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. In the variable effect start process (S4402), first, a random number process for effect determination (S4501) is performed to acquire various random numbers for effect determination such as random numbers for determining variable effect, random numbers for determining advance notice effect, and random numbers for determining effect symbols. In this embodiment, the processing of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value (acquired information), the mode of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) to be executed, the mode of the advance notice effect (including the presence / absence of the advance notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined.

Next, the S4502 analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information for designating a variation pattern) that specifies a variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the variation pattern designation command includes the variation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for designating the current gaming state, and the determination of the first special symbol hit / miss determination or the second special symbol hit / fail determination. It contains results, symbol information that specifies the jackpot type, and the like (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are those corresponding to the first special symbol and those corresponding to the second special symbol in the fluctuation pattern designation command, by analyzing the fluctuation pattern designation command, the effect symbol game production to be started this time is performed. It is possible to determine whether the (variable display of the effect symbol) is related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. It should be noted that the variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in other processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E. Specifically, the mode status "1" corresponds to the production mode A, the mode status "2" corresponds to the production mode B, the mode status "3" corresponds to the production mode C, and the mode status "4" corresponds to the production mode C. It corresponds to the effect mode D, and the mode status "5" corresponds to the effect mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect mainly using the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect modes of the game effect such as the advance notice effect and the reach effect are different. .. Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the effect mode, such as different aspects of the effect symbol 8 (for example, symbol design, number design, etc.), different characters, items, and background images. It will be different. In addition, the effect pattern game effect can also be executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode, and when a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects can be executed depending on the effect mode. Can be. In this embodiment, the effect modes A and B are executed when the low accuracy low base state is controlled, the effect modes C and D are executed when the high accuracy low base state is controlled, and the effect mode E is executed. Is executed when controlled to the low accuracy high base state and when controlled to the high accuracy high base state. Therefore, when the effect mode is any of A to D, the player confirms the effect mode to grasp whether the current game state is the low accuracy low base state or the high accuracy low base state. Is possible. On the other hand, when the effect mode is E, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state even if the effect mode is confirmed. be. In that sense, the effect mode E can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

Next, in the S4504, the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like are used, and the variable effect pattern (variable effect pattern, effect pattern) controlled mainly by the sub control unit 90. A variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) and a notice effect determination table for determining the game effect) are set (S4504). Specifically, the variation effect pattern determination table to be used and the advance notice effect determination table are set based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern specification command received from the main control unit 80. .. That is, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of advance notice effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined variable effect pattern determination table and advance notice effect determination table are set from them based on the game state (effect mode) and the like. do. For example, when the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), the variation effect pattern determination table is used as the variation effect pattern determination table at the time of a big hit corresponding to the current effect mode. The variable effect pattern determination table and the advance notice effect determination table are set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode (variable mode of the effect symbol, etc.) of the effect symbol game effect, and is a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status). (Not shown) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, the table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from those variable effect pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the variation effect acquired in S4501 and the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504, the variation effect pattern suitable for the specified variation pattern is selected and set (). S4505). As the variation effect pattern, a variation mode (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) of the effect symbol 8 displayed mainly in the effect symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the effect symbol game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach-attached effect symbol game effect) or when the character effect performed using a specific character is executed (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect or the character When the effect is not executed (reach no effect pattern game effect), etc. are determined. In the reach effect, for example, as a display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (doublet). In the case where the mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped display (temporary stop display) with the symbols constituting the jackpot mode (same effect symbol). ), And with the remaining one continuing the variable display (scroll display), whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol (three same effect symbols) that completes the jackpot mode. It is a production that shows. At this time, a game effect is executed using a predetermined character along with the variable display of the effect symbol, and whether or not the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode is determined by whether or not the predetermined character achieves the predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show by the production of. Such a game effect (reach effect or character effect described later) can also be referred to as a story effect (specific game effect) or a purpose effect (specific game effect). As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for a big hit and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, in S4505, the effect symbol 8 (also referred to as “stop effect symbol”) to be stopped and displayed is determined and set based on the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown). The effect symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the game effect is that the result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment is out of order, and if there is a reach, there are three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787". One of the production symbols is considered to be different from the other production symbols, and when there is no reach, at least one of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "635" is the other production symbol. It is said that the production pattern is different

Further, in S4506, the advance notice effect to be executed along with the variable effect pattern (effect pattern game effect) is determined. In addition, it is also referred to as a production design game production including the advance notice production to be executed. This advance notice effect shows the possibility that the result of the effect pattern game effect being executed is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode before the effect symbol is stopped or displayed (fixed stop display) (during the variable display of the effect symbol). Notification production). In S4506, based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect acquired in S4501 and the advance notice effect determination table set in S4504, the specified variation pattern and the advance notice effect matching the determined variation effect pattern are selected and set. (S4506).

Then, in S4507, based on the variation effect pattern and the advance notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, the variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect, etc. is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 ( S4507), end the variable effect start process. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 uses the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. Predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in 1 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and variation effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the variable display (blinking display) by the two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Outline of production design game production]
Next, the outline of the effect design game effect (variable effect) of this embodiment will be described. As described above, when the variable effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect based on the variable effect pattern or the like set in the S4505 is transmitted from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the display screen 7a of. As a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variable display of the effect symbol 8, the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) is configured.

In principle, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is a vertically scrolled display of the symbols in the order of "1" → "2" → "3" ... → "7" → "8" → "9" (ascending order). (Vertical scrolling), and when it reaches "9", it returns to "1" and repeats vertical scrolling. The mode of the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is determined by the variation effect pattern stored in the above-mentioned variation effect pattern determination table. For this reason, in addition to vertical scrolling, there are various modes of variable display, such as horizontal scrolling display (horizontal scrolling) and switching display in which symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. It is possible to provide the embodiment as a variable effect pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols "1" to "9" are variablely displayed in descending order. Further, it is also possible to set the mode of variable display depending on the effect mode and the game state.

Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed according to the variation time determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display is stopped as the variation time elapses. However, in the present embodiment, the variation display is stopped. It has a plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) as modes. Specifically, as the main stop mode, (1) the stop order (also referred to as "stop order") of each of the effects symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is "left symbol". → Stop mode (also referred to as “first stop mode”) in which “middle symbol → right symbol” and (2) Stop mode in which the stop order of each symbol is “left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol” (“1st stop mode”) (Also referred to as "second stop mode") and (3) a stop mode in which all the stop timings (stop timings) of each symbol are substantially the same (also referred to as "simultaneous stop") (also referred to as "third stop mode"). And (4) a stop mode (also referred to as a "fourth stop mode") in which the stop time of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same and the middle symbol is stopped after that. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and the variation effect pattern selected (set) in S4505 determines in which stop mode the variation display is stopped. It has become a thing. That is, in this embodiment, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern also serves as the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, it is also possible to separately process the selection / determination (setting) of the variable effect pattern and the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). The stop symbol having the first stop order is also referred to as "first stop symbol", the stop symbol having the second stop order is also referred to as "second stop symbol", and the stop symbol having the third stop order is referred to as "second stop symbol". This is also called a "third stop symbol" or a "final stop symbol".

Of the first to fourth stop modes, in the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is “small” mainly in the effect mode C (state C). It is a stop mode that can be executed when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the "hit".

In the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is “missing” or “big hit” mainly in (1) effect modes A and B (state A). When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the above, (2) the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is "missing" or "big hit" in the effect mode E (state B). When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as “reach variation”) or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as “normal variation”), and (3) effect mode C, In the case of D (state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by reach variation or normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "missing" or "big hit". This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display is stopped.

The third stop mode (simultaneous stop of all symbols) is mainly in the situation where (1) the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls of the special figure works in the production modes A and B (state A) (at the start of fluctuation). Special figure 1 When the number of reserved balls is "3" or "4"), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing", and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal fluctuation based on this. , (2) In the effect mode E (state B), the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol pass / fail determination being "missing" or "small hit". In the case of (3) in the effect modes C and D (state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "missing". And (4) in the effect mode D (state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "small hit", the variation display is performed. It is a stop mode that can be executed at the time of stop.

In the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit" mainly in the effect mode D (state C). Based on this, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach variation, it is a stop mode that can be executed when the variation display is stopped.

In this way, a plurality of stop modes for stopping the variation display of the effect symbol 8 are provided according to the effect mode (game state), the variation display mode based on the result of the special symbol hit / miss determination, and the result (stop display mode). Therefore, it is possible to make the stopping mode different according to the situation of the game and to make it various. Further, for the player, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped, it is possible to infer the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 to be displayed (derived display) thereafter. It becomes possible, and it is also possible to infer the types of special games that can be executed, the presence / absence of the execution, the possibility, and the like through the stop mode. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stop mode when the variable display is stopped, and to arouse the expectation for the subsequent special game.

In addition to the first to fourth stop modes, for example, the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 is "right symbol-> left symbol-> middle symbol" (fifth stop mode). ), And various stop modes such as a stop mode in which the left symbol and the middle symbol are stopped at substantially the same stop time and the right symbol is stopped after that (sixth stop mode), and each stop can be provided. The conditions under which the embodiment is executed are not limited to this embodiment, and can be variously defined.

Further, in this embodiment, the symbols "1" to "9" constituting the effect symbol 8 are colored so that they can be classified by color, and the type of symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. As shown in FIG. 53, this symbol type corresponds to the gaming state (effect mode). Specifically, in the state A (effect modes A and B), "7" among the odd-numbered symbols is a red symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as "red symbol"), and other odd-numbered symbols "1" and "3". , "5", "9" are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "green symbols"), and even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6", "8" are blue symbols (hereinafter "blue"). It is also called "design"). On the other hand, in the states B and C (effect modes C, D and E), among the odd-numbered symbols, "3", "5" and "7" are red symbols, and the other odd-numbered symbols are "1" and "9". Is a green symbol, and even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue symbols.

It should be noted that the correspondence between the design and the color according to the present embodiment shown in FIG. 53 is merely an example, and it is possible to adopt a correspondence relationship other than this, and the type of color is not limited to this embodiment. , Other colors can be used. Further, in this embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by the color, but it can also be determined by an element other than the color. For example, the type of character when a character is attached to the effect symbol, or the number symbol when having an effect symbol (character symbol) representing a predetermined character in addition to the effect symbol (number symbol) representing a number. The symbol type may be determined by the character symbol, and further, the symbol type may be determined simply by the odd symbol and the even symbol.

The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed, and the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derivated display) when the variable display is stopped according to the above-mentioned stop mode is used. The result of the fluctuation display is notified. In this embodiment, as a basic symbol combination (stop display mode), there are "completely disjointed eyes" ("124", etc.) in which all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are different symbols (numbers), and the effect symbols. 8L (left symbol) and production symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number), and the remaining production symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a different symbol (number). ) Is an out-of-order mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the execution of the winning game. On the other hand, "doublet" ("777", etc.) in which all three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same is used as a jackpot mode (specific mode) that triggers the execution of a jackpot game of 4R or higher (see FIG. 6). There are.

On the premise of such a basic combination of symbols, in this embodiment, the "reach barrage" among the barracudas is also used as the 2R jackpot mode that triggers the execution of the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). .. This is because the number of prize balls (number of prize balls won) that a player can acquire is smaller in the 2R jackpot game than in the 4R or higher jackpot game (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), and the state C (high). It is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state), which makes it more difficult to obtain a prize ball (increased ball holding) in a small hit game compared to (probability low base state), that is, for the player. This is because it is a special game with a relatively low degree of advantage (profit amount). Further, among the loose stitches, the "completely loose stitch" is also used as a small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). This is because, as described above, in the state B, the second starting port 21 is in the open state for most of the time, so that the small hit large winning opening (second) located on the downstream side of the second starting port 21. This is because it is difficult to enter the large winning opening 35), and it is extremely unlikely that a small hit will be profitable (nearly zero) (substantially equivalent to a loss). Further, the "specific variation", which will be described later, is defined as a small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (small hit of the second special symbol) in the state C (high accuracy and low base state). Here, the small hit mode (specific rounds) is also referred to as a "first display mode", and the large hit mode (doublet) is also referred to as a "second display mode", and the off mode (complete rounds, reach rounds). Of the doublets (eyes), the reach-blanket is also referred to as a "third display mode", and among the disengaged modes (completely doublet, reach-blanket), the complete doublet is also referred to as a "fourth display mode".

Since the state A (low probability low base state) is a game state in which a left-handed game is basically performed, the first special symbol hit / miss judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) is mainly performed. Since it is rare that the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (change display of the second special symbol) is performed during the change display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made under such a situation. When this is done, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but only the variation display (and stop display) by the effect display 102 is performed. There is. Similarly, since the state B (high base state) and the state C (high accuracy low base state) are game states in which the right-handed game is basically performed, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (second special) is mainly performed. (Variation display of the symbol) is performed, and it is rare that the first special symbol hit / miss judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed during the variation display of the second special symbol. When the first special symbol hit / fail determination is made below, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation display by the effect display 102 ( And stop display). However, when a special symbol hit / fail judgment contrary to the current gaming state (left-handed game, right-handed game) is performed and a judgment result of "big hit" is obtained (for example, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made in the state C). (When a big hit is made), one or more of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display an effect suggesting the occurrence of the big hit. conduct. As a result, while the effect display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to the current gaming state (variation display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, the effect display is performed in parallel with the variation display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of such a big hit, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player stops the game without noticing the occurrence of the big hit and misses the opportunity to earn a profit.

[Game production of state A]
Next, the game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state A (low accuracy low base state) will be described. The game effect performed in the state A is an effect symbol game effect (variable effect) mainly performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special symbol pass / fail determination. As described above, in the state A, "A" or "B" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the effect symbol game effect of the state A is performed under the condition that the background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this embodiment, the setting and transition of the effect mode in the state A are automatically performed according to the predetermined mode control conditions under the control of the sub control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). .. Therefore, the player cannot be involved in the setting of the effect mode in the state A.

Further, in the state A, as the effect symbol 8, the symbols "2", "4", "6", "8" consisting of blue symbols and the symbols "1", "3", "5" consisting of green symbols are used. The symbol "9" and the symbol "7" consisting of the red symbol are displayed (see FIG. 53). To display each of these symbols, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displays this on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Will be executed.

Under such an effect mode and symbol type, as shown in FIG. 54, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 54 (a)), the variation display is basically a second stop mode. It is stopped at (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (see Fig. 54 (b) → (c) → (d), (e) → (f)), and the shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 When the function is activated (see S1707 in FIGS. 9 and 24), it is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 54 (g)). Here, when the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) stop at the same symbol, reach is established (see FIG. 54 (f)), and then the middle symbol (effect symbol 8C) is displayed in a variable manner. Until it is stopped, the reach effect is executed on the image display device or the like. In the reach effect, an effect indicating whether or not the middle symbol (final stop symbol) stops at the same symbol as the previously stopped symbol (whether or not the jackpot mode is displayed) is developed. The same applies to states B and C regarding the establishment of reach and the effect of reach.

While the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in different stitches (completely loose stitches or reach loose stitches) as a result of the variable display, it is "off". On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the jackpot mode (doublet) as a result of the variable display, the jackpot game can be executed, and when the jackpot game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is started. However, it is switched to the big hit game production for the 4R big hit related to the first special symbol. When the big hit game is related to the "4R first big hit", the game state after the big hit game is completed is the state C (high accuracy and low base state), and the game is related to the "4R second big hit". In the case of, the game state after the end of the big hit game is the state B (low accuracy high base state) (see FIG. 6).

[Game production of state B]
Next, the game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state B (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) will be described. The high-accuracy high-base state is set after the end of the jackpot game based on the occurrence of the "2R 5th jackpot" or the "2R 6th jackpot" in the state C (high-accuracy low-base state).

The game effect performed in the state B is an effect symbol game effect (variable effect) mainly performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol pass / fail determination. As described above, in the state B, "E" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the effect symbol game effect in the state B is performed under the condition that the background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode E is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this embodiment, the effect mode E corresponding to the state B is automatically set according to the transition to the state B under the control of the sub control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91). Therefore, the player cannot be involved in the setting of the effect mode E.

Further, in the state B, as the effect symbols 8, the symbols "2", "4", "6", "8" consisting of blue symbols, the symbols "1", "9" consisting of green symbols, and red The symbols "3", "5", and "7" composed of the symbols are displayed (see FIG. 53). To display each of these symbols, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displays this on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Will be executed. In this embodiment, the mode (design) of the effect symbol 8 is different between the state A and the state B.

Under such an effect mode and symbol type, as shown in FIG. 55, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 55 (a)), the variation display is basically the third stop mode. It is stopped at (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 55 (b)). This is because in the state B, the second special symbol time saving function and the high base generation function are activated, so that the deviation variation without reach and the small hit variation can be digested in the shortest possible time so that the game can proceed smoothly. Because. When the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big hit game) immediately after the stop, so that the player's expectation is expected. Don't be afraid of people. On the other hand, when out-of-reach fluctuations or jackpot fluctuations with reach (that is, "reach fluctuations") are performed, or when pretending to be reach fluctuations, "reach-fluttering out-of-reach fluctuations" (a type of fluctuation mode without reach), which are actually normal fluctuations, occur. If so, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 55 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → ( f) See).

While the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in an out-of-order manner (separate stitch) as a result of the variable display, it is "off". On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the jackpot mode (doublet) as a result of the variable display, the jackpot game can be executed, and when the jackpot game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is cut into the jackpot game effect. Instead, round production is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. Since the jackpot game when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the doublet mode in the state B is related to "15R 3rd jackpot" or "4R 4th jackpot", the jackpot game effect is 15R. A big hit game effect for 3 big hits or a big hit game effect for 4R 4th big hit is performed. Then, the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed is the state C (high accuracy and low base state) (see FIG. 6).

Further, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the 2R jackpot mode (reach barrage) as a result of the variable display, the display content on the display screen 7a is cut to the jackpot game effect for the 2R jackpot with the start of the jackpot game. It will change. When the started big hit game is related to "2R 5th big hit" or "2R 6th big hit", the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a high accuracy high base state (state B). When the big hit game is related to "2R 7th big hit" or "2R 8th big hit", the game state after the big hit game is completed is the low accuracy high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

Further, in the state B, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 based on this is performed, the variation display is performed in the normal variation and stopped in the third stop mode. To. Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (off mode) (see FIG. 55 (b)). When a small hit occurs in the state B, the small hit game is executed, but even if the small hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a remains as the effect symbol game effect (here, the effect symbol). 8 is displayed in a completely different manner), and the effect during the small hit game (small hit game effect) is not particularly performed. This is because, as described above, the small hit in the state B is substantially equivalent to the deviation. Then, the gaming state after the end of the small hit game remains in the state B unless it overlaps with the transition timing of the gaming state based on the number of changes of the special symbol.

In addition, in the low accuracy high base state which is the state B, when the variation display of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this embodiment) without the occurrence of a big hit. , The game state shifts to the state A (low accuracy low base state) at the end (stop) of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays (disengagement fluctuations), and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "A" or "B". do. In addition, when the variation display of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this embodiment) without a big hit in the high accuracy and high base state which is the state B. At the end (stop) of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays (displacement fluctuations), the gaming state shifts to state C (high accuracy and low base state), and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "C" or "D". ..

[Game production of state C]
Next, the game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state C (high accuracy and low base state) will be described. The game effect performed in the state C is mainly the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol pass / fail determination, and the small hit occurrence. It is a production (small hit game production) that accompanies. The state C is an advantageous gaming state (specific gaming state) in which a large number of prize balls can be expected to be obtained by the small hits between the big hits by frequently causing the small hits until the next big hit occurs. For this reason, in the state C, it is decided to perform a special effect in which the effect symbol game effect and the small hit game effect are linked. Details on this point will be described later.

Further, as described above, in the state C, "C" or "D" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the game effect of the state C is performed under the condition that the background image or the like corresponding to the effect mode C or D is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The setting of the effect mode in the state C is performed under the control of the sub control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) as in the above-mentioned states A and B, but in this embodiment, during the mode selection period described later. It is possible for the player to operate the first effect button 63a to select the effect mode, and the effect mode C or D is set based on the selection result. Further, in the state C, as in the state B, as the effect symbol 8, the symbols "2", "4", "6", "8" consisting of blue symbols and the symbols "1", "9" consisting of green symbols are used. , And the symbols "3", "5", and "7" composed of the red symbol are displayed (see FIG. 53). In this embodiment, the mode (design) of the effect symbol 8 is the same in the state B and the state C.

Here, the content (effect specification) of the game effect developed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is significantly different between the "effect mode C" and the "effect mode D" in the state C. .. Therefore, in the following, the game effect in each effect mode will be described separately for "effect mode C" and "effect mode D".

[Direction mode C]
As shown in FIG. 56A, in the effect mode C, the effect symbol 8 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and behind the effect symbol 8, as a background image corresponding to the effect mode C. The given character is displayed. The characters displayed here include a friendly character (first character) and an enemy character (second character), and both characters are displayed facing each other. These characters are displayed even when the variable display of the symbol is not performed. There are multiple types of characters for each of the ally character and the enemy character, and one of the ally characters (also referred to as "ally character") and one enemy character (also referred to as "enemy character") are in the production mode C. Displayed during setting. As the effect by the character (character effect), for example, the effect display is performed in such a manner that the ally character attacks the enemy character or the ally character is attacked by the enemy character. When such an effect by a character (character effect) is performed as a variable effect based on a variable effect pattern (when it is performed along with a variable display of identification information), the result of the variable display becomes a small hit and a small hit game is performed. There are cases where it is performed as a small hit game effect when it is performed (when it is performed in association with a special game after the end of the variable display).

In addition, a right-handed instruction image M for instructing right-handedness is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, and the number of winning prize balls (earned profit amount) is displayed in the lower right part (first display part) of the display screen 7a. The prize ball count image C1 shown is displayed. The prize ball count image C1 of this embodiment is composed of an image (numerical image) capable of displaying a 5-digit number of "0000" to "99999" and a character image of "pt". This prize ball count image C1 mainly shows the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls won) acquired by the player in the big hit game, the small hit game, or the like, and the game state after the big hit game is the state B or the state. When it becomes C, the number of prize balls won during that period (so-called number of prize balls won during the consecutive villa period) is shown until the game state returns to state A (excluding during the big hit game). .. Further, since the state C (high accuracy and low base state) is an advantageous state in which small hits occur frequently (the execution frequency of the small hit game becomes high), the prize ball acquisition (increase in the number of balls held) in the small hit game is obtained. The prize ball count image C1 is displayed for directing. That is, as the small hit game effect, the effect display (ball entry effect) is performed by the prize ball count image C1. Details of the effects associated with the occurrence of small hits will be described later.

The basic flow of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode C of such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 57. In FIG. 57, for convenience of explanation, some display contents such as the effect hold (holding symbol), the right-handed instruction image M, and the background are omitted. As shown in FIG. 57, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 57 (a)), the variation display is basically stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (FIG. 57). 57 (b)). This is because in the state C, the second special symbol time saving function is activated, so that the deviation variation without reach can be digested in as short a time as possible so that the game can proceed smoothly. When the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big hit game, small hit game) immediately after the stop. .. Therefore, when the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode, the effect (fanning effect) for increasing the player's expectation is not performed. On the other hand, when the reach fluctuation (off or big hit) or the reach out-of-reach fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 57 (Fig. 57). c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Further, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "small hit", the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol →). It is stopped at (right symbol) (see FIG. 57 (g) → (h) → (i)).

While the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in an out-of-order manner (separate stitch) as a result of the variable display, it is "off". On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the jackpot mode (doublet) as a result of the variable display, the jackpot game can be executed, and when the jackpot game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is cut into the jackpot game effect. Instead, round production is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. Since the jackpot game when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the doublet mode in the state C is related to "15R 3rd jackpot" or "4R 4th jackpot", in this case, it is for 15R 3rd jackpot. The big hit game production or the big hit game production for the 4R 4th big hit is performed. Then, the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed is the state C (high accuracy and low base state) (see FIG. 6).

Further, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the 2R jackpot mode (reach barrage) as a result of the variable display, the display content on the display screen 7a is cut to the jackpot game effect for the 2R jackpot with the start of the jackpot game. It will change. As the big hit game effect in this case, the end of the state C, that is, the effect display of the content indicating the end of the advantageous state in which small hits frequently occur is performed from the start to the end of the 2R big hit game. When the started big hit game is related to "2R 5th big hit" or "2R 6th big hit", the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a high accuracy high base state (state B). When the big hit game is related to "2R 7th big hit" or "2R 8th big hit", the game state after the big hit game is completed is the low accuracy high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

Further, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit in the effect mode C (state C) and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on this, the variation display is performed with the normal variation and the first. It is stopped in the stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol). Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a specific random pattern (small hit mode) (see FIG. 57 (i)). Here, in this embodiment, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all red symbols, and of the three symbols, two adjacent symbols are the same, and the remaining one is a different symbol combination (“335”, “355””. , "557", etc.) is set as a specific variation (small hit mode). The symbol combination that constitutes a specific variation (small hit mode) does not establish reach, but it constitutes a combination in which two adjacent symbols are the same symbol (number), so such a symbol combination. Is also called "reach arrangement".

Of the symbols ("3", "5", "7") that constitute a specific pattern (first display mode), the symbols "3" and "5" constitute a specific pattern in the state A. It is a green symbol (first symbol type) that cannot be done, but in the state C, it is a red symbol (second symbol type) that can form a specific random pattern (see FIG. 53). That is, the symbols "3" and "5" are symbols whose symbol types change depending on the game state. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pattern type (color type in this example) of the effect pattern and to attract the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, a part of the effect symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “9”) which are green symbols in the state A is partially separated, and in the state C, a specific random pattern (first). The red symbol that can form the display mode) is used. For example, a part of the effect symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) that are blue symbols in the state A is used as a red symbol. Or, in state A, there are blue symbols ("2", "4", "6", "8") and green symbols ("1", "3", "5"). , "9"), respectively (for example, "4" and "5") can be made into a red pattern. Further, as the symbol type, a symbol type dedicated to the state C, which does not exist in the state A, may be provided, and a specific pattern (first display mode) may be configured by the symbols belonging to the dedicated symbol type. For example, a golden symbol (gold symbol) can be provided as a symbol type dedicated to the state C, and a part of the effect symbol which is a green symbol in the state A can be made a gold symbol in the state C. As a result, it becomes possible to make the symbol types that can form a specific random eye more conspicuous and to easily attract the attention of the player. Alternatively, in this embodiment, the symbols "3" and "5", which are the green symbols (first symbol type) in the state A, are the red symbols (second symbol type) in the state C, but in this case, , The symbol of "7", which was a red symbol (second symbol type) from the beginning in the state A, may be configured to be a gold symbol in the state C. In this case, the symbols "3" and "5", which are red symbols (second symbol type), are used as symbols that can form a specific doublet, and the symbols "7", which are gold symbols (third symbol type), are used. Can be a 15R jackpot mode (doublet of "7") corresponding to the 15R third jackpot among the jackpots. As a result, the symbol type (red symbol) that can form a specific doublet (small hit mode) and the symbol type (gold symbol) that constitutes a specific doublet (15R big hit mode) are clearly distinguished and hit. It is possible to show the correspondence between the type and the symbol type in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in this embodiment, in the derivation display (stop of the variable display) of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) in the effect mode C, the first stop mode (left symbol →) that cannot appear in other effect modes. The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the order of stop of the middle symbol → the right symbol). For this reason, the player is attracting attention not only to the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) but also to the stop mode of the variable display that triggers the display of the small hit mode. Further, in the effect mode C, when the small hit mode is derived and displayed (the variation display is stopped), the effect display that emphasizes the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) is performed. Specifically, one line image extending laterally (horizontally) along the stop order of the first stop mode through the center of each symbol (red symbol) constituting the small hit mode, and the periphery of each symbol. The effect image E (effect image), which is composed of the image (decorative image) that decorates the image, is displayed. This makes it possible to emphasize the display of the small hit mode (that the small hit game is executed) when the variable display according to the first stop mode is stopped, and when the variable display is stopped at the first stop mode. It is possible to enhance the effect of the production. The aspect of the effect image E is not limited to this embodiment, and various other aspects can be adopted.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in a small hit game executed with the display of the small hit mode as an opportunity, the winning prize ball shown by the prize ball count image C1 for each entry. The number (numerical image) is added and displayed (updated). In this embodiment, the prize balls based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each entry, and therefore, the winning prize shown by the prize ball count image C1. The number of balls is added in units of 10. Further, when the small hit game is executed triggered by the display of the small hit mode, the ally character (first character) and the enemy character (first character) displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a are accompanied by the execution of the small hit game. The effect display (character effect) is performed by the second character). Specifically, an effect display (also referred to as "first effect") in which one of the ally character and the enemy character (for example, the ally character) attacks or sets the other (for example, the enemy character) is performed. It is supposed to be. The character effect (also referred to as "character effect display") in this case does not include the battle effect described later, which depicts the confrontation scene of both characters. The execution period of the small hit game is determined according to the opening time of the large winning opening for small hits (second large winning opening 35), but the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game is the same. Because it is 8 seconds, it is difficult to secure the execution time of the battle effect in this time. By performing the character effect along with the small hit game with a short execution time in this way, it becomes easy to make the character effect and the character effect performed as the variable effect described later as a related effect, and from the variable display. Through the small hit game, it is possible to obtain a unified production (character production) by the ally character and the enemy character. Here, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 accompanying the small hit is subordinate to the second prize ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second prize opening sensor 35a. It is performed based on the reception by the control unit 90, and the character effect display accompanying the small hit is based on the reception of the small hit opening command (S2066) transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub control unit 90. Since it is performed, all of these effects correspond to small hit game effects (S4407, S4408). The effect of adding and displaying the number of acquired prize balls (acquired profit amount) indicated by the prize ball count image C1 is also referred to as "first profit effect".

In this way, in the effect mode C (state C), the stop in the first stop mode of the effect symbol 8 and the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbols) occur frequently, and the small hit game is accompanied by this. Since the addition display and character effect display of the prize ball count image C1 can be executed with high frequency, the player is strongly encouraged to generate small hits by coordinating such an effect symbol game effect (variable effect) and a small hit game effect. It is possible to make an impression. As a result, it is possible to raise expectations for winning a prize ball (increasing the number of balls held) due to frequent small hits, and to enhance the game interest of the production mode C (state C). It should be noted that the character effect display associated with the small hit is performed based on the reception of the second large winning opening ball entry command from the main control unit 80 by the sub control unit 90, as in the addition display of the prize ball count image C1. It may be configured as follows. In this case, since the character production is not performed unless the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game, the relevant entry when the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 is performed. It is possible to make a strong impression on the player, and it is easy to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game.

Next, the content (effect mode) of the effect display when the reach variation (off or big hit) or the reach fanning out variation is performed in the effect mode C will be described. As described above, in the effect mode C, the ally character (first character) and the enemy character (second character) are displayed as the background on the display screen 7a, and the effect symbol game effect (variable display of the effect symbol 8, etc.) is displayed. ) Is performed (see FIG. 56 (a)). Further, when the reach fluctuation (off or big hit) is performed and when the reach fanning deviation fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol). (See FIG. 57 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Under such circumstances, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started based on the variation effect pattern of the reach variation or the reach deviation variation, the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) is stopped first according to the second stop mode. However (see Fig. 57 (c)), when the left symbol (first stop symbol) stops, a production display depicting a scene in which either the ally character or the enemy character displayed in the background attacks the other party. (First production) is performed. In this case, the first effect is an effect (character effect) by a character (friend character, enemy character) performed before the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) stops. The first production can be roughly divided into a pattern in which a friendly character attacks an enemy character (also referred to as "first production pattern A") and a pattern in which an enemy character attacks an enemy character ("" There are two patterns (also referred to as "first effect pattern B"), and for each pattern, there are a plurality of patterns that define the content (type) of the attack to be launched and the success or failure of the attack. By providing these multiple types of patterns, the content of the effect when the first effect is performed suggests information about the current variation display (the variation) (big hit reliability, content of the effect that can be executed later, etc.). (Notice) shall be given. The first effect is an effect in which one of the ally character and the enemy character attacks the other and ends, and does not include the battle effect described later.

For example, when the pattern of the first effect (also referred to as "first effect pattern") is the first effect pattern A (a pattern in which a ally character launches an attack), at least the 2R jackpot mode is not displayed as a result of the variation display. That is, it is suggested that the big hit that triggers the end of the state C, which is an advantageous state in which small hits occur frequently, does not occur. In this case, in the fluctuation, after that, the right symbol (second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without the reach being established, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (out of place). Ruka (reach fanning deviation fluctuation), or whether the reach is established and the reach effect is developed, but finally the middle symbol stops at a symbol different from the left and right symbols and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (out of reach). (Variation out of reach) or, after the reach effect, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (big hit mode) (big hit variation). On the other hand, when the first effect pattern is the opposite first effect pattern B (a pattern in which an enemy character launches an attack), the 2R jackpot mode that triggers the end of the state C is displayed as a result of the variation display. Suggest that there is a possibility. In this case, in the fluctuation, after that, the right symbol (second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without the reach being established, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (out of place). Ruka (reach fanning deviation fluctuation), although the reach was established and developed into reach production, the middle symbol finally stopped at a symbol different from the left and right symbols, and the production symbol 8 was doublet (off mode or 2R jackpot mode). Whether it is displayed (variation out of reach or variation in 2R jackpot), or the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (big hit mode) after the reach effect (variation in jackpot). In this way, by the first effect performed by stopping the left symbol (first stop symbol), the subsequent development of the fluctuation (whether or not the reach is established, whether or not the development is advantageous to the player, etc.) is determined. It is possible to suggest. Then, it is suggested that the first effect pattern A is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the first effect pattern B. Such a first effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern, and the first effect is executed in any of a plurality of types of patterns according to the variable effect pattern set (selected) in the above-mentioned S4505. It is decided whether to do it.

In this way, after the left symbol (effect symbol 8L, first stop symbol) is stopped (after the execution of the first effect), the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) is stopped according to the second stop mode. If the right symbol that stops at the time becomes a symbol (number) different from the left symbol, the reach is not established, and then the middle symbol (effect symbol 8C, third stop symbol) stops and the variable display ends, and the effect symbol 8 changes. It is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (disengagement mode). In this case, the fluctuation is a fluctuation that is out of reach (see FIG. 57 (c) → (e) → (f)).

On the other hand, if the right symbol that stops following the left symbol has the same symbol (number) as the left symbol, the reach is established. At this point, the fluctuation is a reach fluctuation (see FIG. 57 (c) → (d)). When the reach is established, a predetermined reach effect (also referred to as "second effect") is performed on the display screen 7a. The second effect is an effect by a character (friend character, enemy character) that is performed after the reach is established (after the execution of the first effect) and the middle symbol (effect symbol 8C, third stop symbol) is still fluctuating. (Character production), and in this embodiment, it is performed as a battle production that depicts a confrontation scene between an ally character and an enemy character that had been displayed as a background until then. This second production (battle production) can be roughly divided into a pattern in which a ally character wins a confrontation (battle) (also called "second production pattern A") and a pattern in which a ally character loses a confrontation (battle). There are three patterns (also called "second production pattern B") and a pattern that ends the confrontation (battle) without deciding the victory or defeat (also called "second production pattern C"), and each pattern is an enemy. There are multiple patterns that determine the type of character, which of the ally character and the enemy character attacks first (the type of character that attacks first), the content of the attack, success or failure, and so on. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, the information (big hit reliability, etc.) regarding the current fluctuation display (the fluctuation) is suggested by the production content when the second production (battle production) is performed. There is.

For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), among the patterns of the second effect (also referred to as “second effect pattern”), the ally character makes a first strike on the second effect pattern A (ally victory pattern). There is a pattern in which the enemy character wins as it is, and a pattern in which the enemy character makes a first strike and the ally character finally wins. Further, in the second production pattern B (allied defeat pattern), there is a pattern in which the enemy character makes a first strike and the ally character is defeated. Furthermore, in the second production pattern C (win / loss undecided pattern), there is a pattern in which the ally character makes a first strike but the enemy character dodges the attack, and a pattern in which the enemy character makes the first strike and the ally character endures the attack. There is. The second production (battle production) based on these second production patterns starts with the first strike of the ally character or the enemy character, and the production content (confrontation) until the subsequent confrontation result (battle result) becomes clear. Scenes, etc.) are predetermined according to each pattern. Such a second effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern, and the second effect (battle) is any of a plurality of types of patterns depending on the variable effect pattern set (selected) in the above-mentioned S4505. It is decided whether to execute the production).

In this embodiment, the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a jackpot variation based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination being a jackpot (15R third jackpot or 4R fourth jackpot), that is, variation. When the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (big hit mode) as a result of the display, the second effect (battle) based on the second effect pattern A (ally victory pattern) is performed before the display of the jackpot mode (before the derivation display). (Direction) is performed. In this case, the 15R or 4R jackpot game is performed after the variation display is stopped (after the jackpot mode is displayed), and the gaming state becomes the state C (high accuracy low base state) again after the jackpot game. Therefore, the player can play the game in the advantageous state (state C) in which the small hits frequently occur again after the big hit game. In this way, since the game in the state C can be continued after the big hit game, the second production pattern A is a pattern in which the ally character wins.

Further, when the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as an out-of-reach variation (reach out-of-reach variation) based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination being out of order, that is, the effect symbol 8 is reach-breaked as a result of the variation display. When it is displayed by the eyes (out-of-order mode), the second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect pattern C (win / loss undecided pattern) is performed before the display of the out-of-order mode (before the derivation display). In this case, after the variation display is stopped (after the disengagement mode is displayed), the game in the state C is continued. Since the game in the state C continues in this way, the second production pattern C is a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) is completed without the victory or defeat being decided.

Further, when the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a 2R jackpot variation based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination being a 2R jackpot (any of the 2R 5th to 8th jackpots), that is, the variation. When the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the reach pattern (2R jackpot mode) as a result of the display, the second effect based on the second effect pattern B (ally defeat pattern) is performed before the display of the 2R jackpot mode (before the derivation display). (Battle production) is performed. In this case, the 2R jackpot game is performed after the variation display is stopped (after the 2R jackpot mode is displayed), and the gaming state becomes the state B (high base state) after the jackpot game. Therefore, for the player, the game in the advantageous state (state C) in which the small hits frequently occur is completed with the occurrence of the 2R big hit as an opportunity. In this way, since the game state shifts from the state C to the state B via the 2R jackpot, the second production pattern B is a pattern in which the ally character is defeated.

Here, among the second production patterns A to C, the patterns including the content that the ally character makes the first strike are the second production pattern A (friend victory pattern) and the second production pattern C (win / loss undecided pattern). Therefore (see FIG. 64 (a)), for the player, the battle production (second production) is started after the reach is established on the display screen 7a, and the confrontation (battle) in the battle production is the first for the ally character. If it starts from an attack, it can be inferred that at least there is no possibility of a 2R jackpot, that is, the end of state C. On the other hand, since all of the second production patterns A to C correspond to the pattern including the content that the enemy character makes the first strike (see FIG. 64 (a)), the player can reach on the display screen 7a. If the battle production (second production) is started after the establishment and the confrontation (battle) in that battle production starts from the first strike of the enemy character, there is a possibility of a 2R jackpot (state C can be ended) at that point. Gender) cannot be excluded. Then, after the first strike of the enemy character, if the ally character is defeated and the battle production ends, the pattern of the battle production (second production) is the second production pattern B, so the fluctuation is a 2R jackpot. As a result, the game in the state C ends. On the other hand, if the ally character finally wins and the battle effect ends after the enemy character's first strike, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern A. The fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation of 15R or 4R, and when the ally character dodges the first strike of the enemy character and the battle production is completed, the pattern of the battle production (second production) is the second production pattern C. Therefore, the fluctuation is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, and in any of these cases, the game in the state C can be continuously executed. In this way, in the reach fluctuation in the production mode C, by performing the second production (battle production) based on the second production patterns A to C, the advantageous state (state C) in which small hits occur frequently continues (victory, undecided). ) Or end (defeat), it is possible to obtain a directing effect that stirs up the expectations and anxieties of the player. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the variable production (character production) from the first production to the second production (battle production), and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment of the production mode C (state C). Will be.

[Direction mode D]
As shown in FIG. 56 (b), in the effect mode D, the effect symbol 8 is located in the upper right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a smaller size (reduced size) than other effect modes such as the effect mode C. It is displayed (also referred to as "reduced display"), and the main image X imitating a fighter is displayed in the substantially center of the display screen 7a. In the effect mode D that adopts such a screen configuration, the effect display that mainly shows how the fighter is flying is developed on the display screen 7a while displaying the variation of the effect symbol 8 at the upper right of the screen. It has become a thing. Then, when the reach is changed, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen as in the effect mode C described above, and after the reach is established, a predetermined reach effect (development effect, etc.) is displayed on the entire display screen. It is supposed to be feasible to use. In this embodiment, the main image X imitating a fighter is displayed as the main effect image in the effect mode D, but an image with a motif other than this may be displayed as the main effect image. It is possible. Further, also in the effect mode D, the right-handed instruction image M and the prize ball count image C1 are displayed as in the effect mode C.

The basic flow of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode D of such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 58. Also in FIG. 58, for convenience of explanation, some display contents such as effect hold (holding symbol) are omitted. First, in the effect mode D, a moving image depicting a scene in which the main image X flies is usually displayed. This moving image is displayed even when the variable display of the symbol is not performed. When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 58 (a)), the variation display is basically in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) in the case of normal variation (off or small hit). It is stopped (see FIG. 58 (b)). The reason for stopping in the third stop mode is the same as the above-mentioned effect mode C. In the effect mode D, the mode of the variation display when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed on the upper right of the display screen 7a is a switching display in which the symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. .. On the other hand, when the reach fluctuation (off or big hit) or the reach deviation fluctuation is performed, the main image X is hidden and the effect symbol 8 which has been displayed small (reduced display) is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. It is displayed large in the substantially center of the screen 7a, and its fluctuation display is performed by vertical scrolling (see FIG. 58 (c)). After that, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or the fourth stop mode (left / right symbol simultaneous stop → middle symbol) (FIG. 58 (c) → middle symbol). (D) → (e), (c) → (e), (d) → (f) → (g)). When the variable display is stopped in the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol), after the main image X is hidden, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a large size in the substantially center of the display screen 7a. At the same timing, the left symbol and the right symbol may be stopped at substantially the same time, and the middle symbol may be displayed in a variable manner (scroll display).

While the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in an out-of-order manner (separate stitch) as a result of the variable display, it is "off". On the other hand, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the jackpot mode (doublet) as a result of the variable display, the 4R or 15R jackpot game can be executed, and if it is displayed in the 2R jackpot mode (reach-barreled), the 2R jackpot game can be executed. It becomes. Since the effects during the big hit game and the game state after the big hit game are the same as in the case of the effect mode C, detailed description here will be omitted.

Further, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is a small hit in the effect mode D (state C) and the effect symbol 8 is variablely displayed (small hit variation) based on this, the variable display is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. It is performed in the normal fluctuation and is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 58 (b)). At this time, as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a specific random pattern (small hit mode) (see FIG. 58 (b)). Here, in the effect mode C, the variation display due to the small hit is stopped in the first stop mode that cannot appear in other effect modes, or the effect image E (effect image) is displayed at the time of the stop. , The display of the effect symbol 8 was mainly used to emphasize the occurrence of small hits. On the other hand, in the effect mode D, by displaying the effect symbol 8 in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a with a specific random pattern (small hit mode), the notification of the occurrence of the small hit by the stop display mode of the effect symbol 8 is not so much. Although it is supposed to be performed in an inconspicuous manner, at that time, it is possible to display an effect image different from the effect symbol 8, and the display of the effect image may suggest (notice) the occurrence of a small hit to the player. It is supposed to be.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), it is possible to display a plurality of target images Y in the substantially center of the display screen 7a with the start of the small hit fluctuation. The target image Y is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter the second large winning opening 35 in one small hit game, and in this embodiment, it is approximately 2 per one small hit game. Since the design is such that three or three game balls can enter the second large winning opening 35 (gauge configuration), three target images Y are displayed in response to this. The display of the target image Y is based on the variation effect pattern in the effect mode D (effect pattern game effect), and the variation effect pattern including the display of the target image Y in the above-mentioned S4505 (small for the effect mode D). When the hit variation effect pattern) is selected (set), the target image Y is displayed when the variation effect is executed. By displaying the target image Y in this way, the player can infer that the result of the variation display is a small hit. Therefore, the target image Y can be said to be a notice effect image that foretells the occurrence of a small hit. It is also possible to include the display of the target image Y in the advance notice effect pattern set in the above-mentioned S4506 without including it in the variation effect pattern.

Then, when the small hit variation (variation display of the effect symbol 8) is stopped and the small hit mode (“355” or the like) is displayed, the small hit game is started, and the second big prize is opened in the small hit game. When a game ball enters the mouth 35, an effect display (also referred to as “destruction effect”) showing how the target image Y is destroyed for each entry is performed (see FIG. 59 (b)). The destruction effect is performed based on the sub-control unit 90 receiving the second special winning opening ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second large winning opening sensor 35a. It corresponds to the small hit game production (S4407, S4408). In this embodiment, the destruction effect represents a state in which the target image Y is destroyed by a missile attack from a fighter aircraft (main image X). Further, similarly to the effect mode C, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 based on the ball entering the second large winning opening 35 is also performed.

The effect from the start of the small hit fluctuation to the small hit game is the basic effect associated with the occurrence of the small hit in the effect mode D. In addition to this, in the effect mode D, the effect related to the small hit is described above. The effect based on the effect hold information stored in S4402, that is, the so-called "hold look-ahead effect" is performed. The hold look-ahead effect (also referred to as “small hit look-ahead effect”) relating to this small hit is realized by the small hit look-ahead effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. That is, the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) performs the small hit look-ahead effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. 60 when the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 is started in the effect mode D. Specifically, when setting the variation effect pattern (S4505) in the above-mentioned variation effect start process (S4402), the small hit look-ahead effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. 60 is performed.

In the small hit look-ahead effect processing (S5000), first, it is determined whether or not the specific period flag is OFF (S5001). The details will be described later, but the specific period flag is a flag that can be set to ON in S5006 described later when a predetermined specific period start condition is satisfied during the game in the effect mode D (state C), and is specified. During the period, a special production will be performed regarding the small hit. When it is determined by S5001 that the specific period flag is ON (NO in S5001), this processing is completed without performing the processing after S5002. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific period flag is OFF (not in the specific period) (YES in S5001), the second special symbol is currently stored as a hold (second special symbol hold), and the second special symbol is correct or not. It is determined whether or not a hold (also referred to as "small hit hold") for which the judgment result is a small hit is stored (S5002). This determination is performed with reference to the effect hold information (preliminary determination result, etc.) stored in the above-mentioned S4402, that is, the stored contents of the effect hold information storage area (acquisition information storage means) of the sub-control board 90. , It is determined whether or not there is a small hit hold, including the second special figure hold corresponding to the change display (also referred to as "the change") of the effect symbol 8 to be started from now on (S5002). The small hit hold is also referred to as "specific acquisition information".

If it is determined that the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is not stored in S5002 (NO in S5002), this process is completed without performing the processing after S5003, and the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is stored. If it is determined to be (YES in S5002), it is determined whether or not small hits occur three or more times in a row as a result of the variation display including the variation (variation display to be started) (S5003). That is, it is determined whether or not three or more small hit holds are continuously stored, including the second special figure hold corresponding to the fluctuation (S5003). This determination can also be performed with reference to the effect hold information (stored content of the effect hold information storage area) stored in the above-mentioned S4402.

If it is determined by S5003 that three or more small hit holds are not stored consecutively (NO in S5003), this processing is completed without performing the processing after S5004. In this case, the small hit look-ahead effect (small hit continuous notice) based on the small hit look-ahead effect process (S5000) is not started. However, when the variation is a small hit variation corresponding to the small hit hold, as described above, the variation effect pattern including the display of the target image Y is set as the variation effect pattern related to the variation. With the variation (small hit variation), a variation effect accompanied by displaying a plurality of (three in this example) target images Y is performed (see FIG. 59 (a)). That is, three target images Y may be displayed as an effect (notice of the change) suggesting the occurrence of a small hit in the change.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hit holds are continuously stored (YES in S5003), it is determined whether or not to start a specific period (S5004). Here, the specific period refers to a period in which a special effect is performed as an effect related to a small hit. In this embodiment, it is determined that the small hit game is performed three or more times in succession, that is, the small hit is derived as a result of each of the three or more consecutive fluctuation displays. If it is (YES in S5003), it is possible to start a specific period (executable). The sub-control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) determines whether or not to start the specific period by performing a start lottery for the specific period (a kind of random number lottery for determining the effect), and the start lottery is performed. If you win (YES in S5004), S5005 to S5007 will be processed to start the specific period. Therefore, in this embodiment, when two conditions of (1) three or more small hit reservations are continuously stored and (2) winning the start lottery of the specific period are satisfied, the specific period is satisfied. Is started. That is, these two conditions (1) and (2) are the start conditions for the specific period.

When it is determined by S5004 to start a specific period (YES in S5004), the specific period counter is set (S5005), the specific period flag is turned ON (S5006), and the small hit look-ahead effect pattern A is set (S5007). .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B is set without setting the specific period counter or the like (S5008). Here, the specific period counter is a counter for determining the end of the specific period, and in S5005, a value corresponding to the number of small hit holdings determined in S5003 is set. In this embodiment, "3" or "4" is set (S5005). After setting the specific period counter in S5005, the value of the specific period counter is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display (small hit fluctuation) is stopped (finished). The specific period flag is a flag indicating that the specific period is in progress, and is mainly used at the start of the fluctuation effect (S4404, S5001, etc.) or the second special figure hold occurs (special figure 2 start entry command reception). ) Is a flag that is referred to when the production hold information is stored (S4402). The specific period flag is turned ON by S5006 and then turned OFF when the value of the specific period counter becomes zero.

In this embodiment, when three or more small hit reservations are continuously stored (YES in S5003) and the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B is set. However, it may be configured to determine whether or not to set the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B, and to set the effect pattern B in the case of an affirmative determination. By doing so, when three or more small hit reservations are continuously stored, it is possible to provide a case where the small hit look-ahead effect is executed and a case where the small hit look-ahead effect is not executed, so that the effect can be diversified. Become.

When a small hit look-ahead effect pattern (A or B) is set on the S5007 or S5008, a variable effect start command for starting the small hit look-ahead effect based on the set effect pattern together with the effect symbol game effect is issued to the image control board 100. It is transmitted, and as a result, the small hit look-ahead effect is started together with the effect symbol game effect on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, when the specific period is started and the effect based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern A is performed, as shown in FIG. 61, with the start of the variation display (first small hit variation) of the effect symbol 8. , The main image X (see FIG. 56 (b)) is hidden, and the characters "Continuous GET!" Are displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (a)).

After that, along with the display of the first small hit mode (“355” or the like) due to the stop of the fluctuation display, the specific period display area T (which displays the prize ball count image C2 showing the number of prize balls won during the specific period) ( The second display unit) appears on the left side of the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (b)). The prize ball count image C2 displayed in the specific period display area T is composed of an image (numerical image) capable of displaying a three-digit number of "000" to "999" and a character image of "pt". Then, every time one game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game executed with the display of the small hit mode, the number of prize balls paid out for that one entry ball. The prize ball number image S showing (10 in this embodiment) is displayed on the right side of the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61 (c)), and the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number image S is It is additionally displayed on the prize ball count image C2 (number of prize balls won) in the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61 (d)). In addition, during the specific period, when a game ball enters not only the second major winning opening 35 but also the third starting opening 26, the prize ball is paid out for each entry (every one entry). The prize ball number image S indicating the number (one in this embodiment) is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (c)), and the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number image S is the prize ball count image. It is additionally displayed in C2 (number of prize balls won) (see FIG. 61 (d)). As a result, the display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 are easily performed during the specific period, and it is possible to enhance the effect of these ball entry effects. The effect of adding and displaying the number of acquired prize balls (acquired profit amount) indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is also referred to as "second profit effect".

The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 are transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the third start opening sensor 26a and the second large winning opening sensor 35a. It is performed based on the reception of the ball command (special figure 2 start ball entry command, second prize opening ball entry command) by the sub-control unit 90 (S4407, S4408). Since the ball entering the third starting port 26 may occur other than during the small hit game, the display of the prize ball number image S and the addition of the prize ball count image C2 based on the ball entering the third starting port 26. The display may also be performed, for example, as an effect during the variable display between the previous small hit game and the subsequent small hit game. Further, during the specific period, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 displayed at the lower right of the screen (first display unit) is not performed. This shows the number of prize balls won during a specific period (during the small hit consecutive villa period) in which the small hit game is performed three or more times in a row, in distinction from the number of prize balls won by the small hit game when it is not in the specific period. Because.

The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 as described above are all of the small hit hold stored at the start of the specific period (in this embodiment, 3 or 4 small hit hold). ) Corresponds to the small hit variation and the small hit game is completed. Then, when the small hit variation and the small hit game corresponding to all the small hit hold are completed, the specific period ends, and based on the end, the specific period display area T displayed up to that point is erased from the screen. The prize ball count image C2 is enlarged and displayed on the screen (see FIG. 61 (e)), and the number of prize balls won by the prize ball count image C2 is displayed at the lower right of the screen (first display unit). The effect display is performed to be added (totaled) to the number of prize balls won indicated by the prize ball count image C1 displayed in (see FIGS. 61 (e) → (f)). According to the production based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern A, the display mode of the number of winning prize balls (earned profit amount) is changed to produce the profit production (first profit production, second profit production). It is possible to enhance the effect. The mode of the effect display based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern A displayed on the display screen 7a (display position, size, shape, etc. of the character image, the specific period display area T, the prize ball number image S, etc.) is shown in FIG. 61. The example is not limited to the example shown in the above, and for example, the specific period display area T is displayed horizontally on the display screen 7a near the upper left portion, and the prize ball number image S is displayed at the lower part of the specific period display area T. It is possible to take various display modes such as.

On the other hand, when the specific period is not started (NO in S5004) and the effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B is performed, the variation display (small hit variation) of the effect symbol 8 is started. A plurality of the above-mentioned target images Y (see FIG. 59A) are displayed on the display screen 7a. The target image Y displayed in this case is the second big winning opening in the number of small hit games corresponding to the number of small hit holdings (3 or 4) stored at the time when the fluctuation display is started. It is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter 35. As described above, in this embodiment, since three target images Y are displayed for each small hit game (see FIG. 59 (a)), an effect based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B (predetermined effect). Will display 9 or 12 target images Y. That is, the number of display of the target image Y (the mode of effect of the predetermined effect) differs depending on the number of stored small hits. By displaying the target symbol Y in this way, the result of the variation display performed consecutively multiple times (3 times or 4 times in this example) including the variation display becomes a small hit (specific display result) (small). (Continuous occurrence of hits) can be suggested to the player. After that, while the small hit game is performed for the number of times corresponding to the number of small hit holdings at the start of the effect based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B, each time the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35. , The destruction effect of the target image Y (see FIG. 59 (b)) is performed.

The effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B is not limited to the display of the target image Y and the destruction effect of the target image Y as in the present embodiment. For example, an image such as a number or a level meter that directly indicates the number of stored small hits is displayed on the display screen, and the display mode of the number or the level meter is used for entering the second large winning opening 35. A predetermined character image is displayed during the effect of updating based on the effect and the small hit fluctuation based on the small hit hold, and the display mode (character movement, etc.) of the character image is changed to the second large winning opening 35. It is possible to set various effects such as the effect that changes based on the entry of the ball into the predetermined effect. Further, it is also possible to provide a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect patterns of predetermined effects) corresponding to the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B, and to select and set any one of them. In this way, it is possible to diversify the small hit look-ahead effect.

In this way, in the effect mode D (state C), while the effect display by the main image X is mainly performed (see FIG. 56 (b)), small hits occur frequently, so that the ball enters the second large winning opening 35. Since the production based on the above (first profit production, second profit production) can be performed with high frequency, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the production related to the small hit and improve the game entertainment. In particular, when a specific period is started and the specific period display area T is displayed as a kind of small hit look-ahead effect in a situation where there are a plurality of small hit reservations (“3” or more in this embodiment), the specific period display area T is displayed. Since the prize ball number image S and the prize ball count image C2 are additionally displayed (second profit effect) until all the small hit reservations are exhausted and the specific period ends, the prize ball number image S is displayed and the prize ball count image S is displayed. It is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 and increase the certainty that the display is performed. After the end of the specific period, the number of prize balls won by the prize ball count image C2 (the number of prize balls won during the specific period) is originally displayed in the lower right corner of the screen (first display unit). It is added (totaled) to the number of prize balls won in the ball count image C1. Further, in a situation where there are a plurality of small hit hold (“3” or more in this embodiment), even if the specific period is not started, a plurality of target images Y are displayed on the display screen 7a as a kind of small hit look-ahead effect. (Small hit look-ahead effect pattern B, predetermined effect) is performed, and the effect mode (the number of display of the target image Y in this embodiment) differs depending on the number of stored small hits. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect (small hit look-ahead effect, first profit effect, second profit effect, etc.) executed along with the small hit, and to enhance the game entertainment of the effect mode D (state C). Become.

Next, the content (effect mode) of the effect display when the reach variation (off or big hit) or the reach fanning out variation is performed in the effect mode D will be described. As described above, in the effect mode D, the main image X is displayed in the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and the effect symbol 8 is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display screen 7a. (Variation display, etc.) is performed (see FIGS. 56 (b) and 58 (a)). In addition, when the reach fluctuation (off or big hit) is performed and when the reach fluctuation is performed, the main image X is hidden after the start of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8, and the main image X is hidden in the upper right corner of the screen until then. The displayed effect symbol 8 is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen and is displayed in a vertically scrolled manner, and then the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or the fourth. It stops in the stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol) (see FIG. 58 (c) and thereafter). At this time, if the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol (number) (see FIG. 58 (e)), the reach is established, and after that, a predetermined value is specified before the result of the variable display is displayed (derivative display). Reach production is performed. The reach effect is executed based on the variable effect pattern set in the above-mentioned S4505, and the content of the reach effect differs depending on the type of the variable effect pattern.

Here, the reach effect (also referred to as "third effect") executed in the effect mode D is the same as the second effect executed as the reach effect in the above-mentioned effect mode C, in which the ally character and the enemy character It is a battle production (confrontation production) that depicts a confrontation scene, and has a plurality of third production patterns with different contents of the battle production. That is, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the third effect (battle effect) in the effect mode D can be roughly divided into a pattern in which the ally character wins (also referred to as "third effect pattern A") and an ally. There are three patterns: a pattern in which the character is defeated (also referred to as "third production pattern B") and a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) is completed without a victory or defeat (also referred to as "third production pattern C"). Then, for each of these three patterns, there are a plurality of patterns that determine the type of the enemy character, the type of the character that makes the first strike, the success or failure of the attack, and the like. The third effect pattern A (victory pattern for allies) is also referred to as a "first variation effect pattern", and the third effect pattern B (defeat pattern for allies) is also referred to as a "second variation effect pattern". The production pattern C (win / loss undecided pattern) is also referred to as a "third variable production pattern". In addition, in the third production (battle production) pattern, the attack content of each of the ally character and the enemy character (for example, the type of weapon used at the time of attack, the type of technique, etc.) has a strong attack power pattern ("" A pattern with a weak attack power (also referred to as a "weak pattern") is provided. In this embodiment, among the patterns in which a ally character attacks an enemy character, a strong pattern (also referred to as a "strong ally pattern") can be won by a ally character compared to a weak pattern (also referred to as a "weak ally pattern"). It is supposed to show that it is highly sexual. Also, among the patterns in which the enemy character attacks the ally character, the strong pattern (also called "enemy strong pattern") is more likely to win the enemy character than the weak pattern (also called "enemy weak pattern"). It is supposed to show that. With these strong patterns and weak patterns, it is possible to suggest the development and results of the battle effect to the player.

In addition, when the reach fluctuation or the reach deviation fluctuation is performed in the effect mode D, an image (also referred to as a "preliminary image") that gives notice (suggestion) of the content of the subsequent game that may be executed through the reach effect in the change. Is configured to be displayable (see FIG. 65). The display of the preview image is a kind of advance notice effect (notice effect pattern) set in the above-mentioned S4506 according to the variable effect pattern in the effect mode D set in the above-mentioned S4505, and is a kind of advance notice provided in advance. When the advance notice effect (notice effect pattern for effect mode D) by displaying the advance notice image is selected (set) based on the effect determination table (not shown), it is predetermined to execute the variable display (variable effect). The preview image of is displayed. There are various timings for starting the display of the preview image, such as when the variable display is started, when the reach is established, and after the reach is established, and this timing is also set according to the mode of the advance notice effect (notice effect pattern). However, the display start timing of the notice image due to the out-of-reach fluctuation is determined from the start of the fluctuation display until it is confirmed that the reach is not established (reach is not established) (for example, until the second stop symbol is stopped). .. This is because the reach cannot be established by the fluctuation of the reach. In this embodiment, the display start timing of the preview image due to the fluctuation of the reach is set as the start time of the fluctuation display. By displaying the preview image, the player can infer the development of the game that can be executed after the change. It should be noted that the display of the preview image is not based on the preview effect pattern, but can be included in the variable effect pattern set in the above-mentioned S4505. Further, the preview image can be said to be "information about the game after the end of the variable display", and the effect of displaying the preview image is also referred to as "information display effect".

In this embodiment, when the preview image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the lower portion of the display screen 7a is set as the preview image display area U, and the preview image is displayed in the area. In FIG. 65 (a), the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) stopped due to the establishment of reach are displayed small on the left and right upper parts of the display screen 7a, respectively, and the reach effect is mainly performed in the center of the screen. It shows the state to be performed (reach state). As a preview image that can be displayed in the preview image display area U, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a first preview image that announces (suggests) the occurrence (execution) of a jackpot (15R third jackpot or 4R fourth jackpot). 501 (first information), second notice image 502 (second information) for notifying (suggesting) the continuation of the effect mode D (state C), and foretelling (suggesting) the transition to the effect mode E (state B). It has three types of preview images with the third preview image 503 (third information). Then, at the start of displaying the preview image (start of the information display effect), at least two types of the preview images can be displayed in the preview image display area U. By displaying such a preview image, the player can make an alternative guess regarding the later game development, so that it is possible to attract the player's interest to the content (type) of the displayed preview image. Become. Further, since the content suggested by the first to third preview images is based on the game in the effect mode D (state C), the display of the advance notice image causes the effect mode D (state C). ) Will be used as a reference for the development of the game afterwards, and it will be possible to enhance the game interest in the production mode D (state C). The mode (display position, size, shape, etc.) of the preview image display area U is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 65, and for example, the horizontally long preview image display area U shown in FIG. 65 is displayed on the display screen 7a. A vertically long notice image display area U is provided on the left or right side of the display screen 7a, and the first to third notice images are provided in the notice image display area U in the vertical direction (vertical direction). It is possible to take various modes such as making it possible to display them side by side.

The first preview image 501 is configured to include the characters "big hit", the second preview image 502 is configured to include the characters "continue", and the third preview image 503 is configured to include the characters "mode E". Will be done. In the present embodiment, when displaying the preview image, two types of preview images are displayed, and as the display pattern (combination of the preview images), that is, the preview effect pattern, the "first preview image 501" shown in FIG. 65 (c) is displayed. And a first display pattern for displaying the "second notice image 502" and a second display pattern for displaying the "second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503" shown in FIG. 65 (d). .. In addition to this, a display pattern for displaying "first notice image 501 and third notice image 503" may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that there are three types of preview images, but for example, when the 15R 3rd jackpot and the 4R 4th jackpot are separately (distinguished) and announced, or when there are more types of jackpots. More types of preview images may be provided, such as providing a preview image according to the type of the jackpot. Also in this case, at least two types of preview images may be configured to be displayed in the preview image display area U, and the display pattern of the preview image (preliminary effect pattern) can be arbitrarily determined.

Which of the first preview image 501, the second preview image 502, and the third preview image 503 is displayed is determined by the type of advance notice effect (preliminary effect pattern) set in the above-mentioned S4506. For example, when the reach out-of-reach fluctuation is performed (reach out-of-reach fluctuation effect pattern), the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502 (first display pattern) or the second notice image 502 and from the start of the change. The third preview image 503 (second display pattern) is displayed in the preview image display area U (upper part of the display screen 7a), and this display is displayed by stopping the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R). It will be held until the reach failure is confirmed. Then, after the display of the preview image is started (after the start of the information display effect), when the reach failure is confirmed, the previously displayed preview image is deleted from the screen. In this case, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 ends (stops) without the reach effect being performed thereafter.

Here, the display pattern determination (selection) when the preview image is displayed is determined by the display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66, which is referred to when setting the advance notice effect by displaying the preview image in S4506, and 0 to 0. It is supposed to be performed based on a random number for determining a display pattern that takes a value in the range of 99. The feasibility of each display pattern is determined according to the selectivity of each of the first display pattern and the second display pattern defined by the display pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 66, in the reach deviation fluctuation, both the display of the notice image by the first display pattern and the display of the notice image by the second display pattern can be executed. In this embodiment, the former can be executed. The latter is more feasible than the latter (selection rate of the first display pattern "30%", selection rate of the second display pattern "70%").

On the other hand, in the case where the reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), the variation is a jackpot variation based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination being a jackpot (15R third jackpot or 4R fourth jackpot). That is, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (big hit mode) as a result of the variation display (big hit variation effect pattern), before the display of the jackpot mode (before the derivation display), the third effect is performed. The third effect (variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern) based on the pattern A (friend victory pattern) is performed. After the variation display is stopped (after the jackpot mode is displayed), the jackpot game is performed, and then the game in the state C can be continued. Therefore, the third effect pattern A (first variation effect pattern) is It is a pattern in which ally characters win. Then, in the fluctuation (big hit fluctuation), a notice image is displayed (information display production) at a predetermined time during the fluctuation before the start of the third effect (battle effect), for example, at the start of the variation or when the reach is established. Is started. The display of the preview image in this case can be executed based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern. When the display of the first preview image 501 and the second preview image 502 is started based on the first display pattern (see FIG. 65 (c)), the player is at least as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). It can be inferred that there is no possibility that a 2R jackpot will occur, that is, there is a possibility that the game in the state C will end (the possibility that the later game development will be disadvantageous). On the other hand, when the display of the second preview image 502 and the third preview image 503 is started based on the second display pattern (see FIG. 65 (d)), the player receives a 2R jackpot at that time. The possibility (the possibility that the later game development will be disadvantageous) cannot be ruled out.

Here, in this embodiment, the display of the preview image when the third effect (battle effect that wins the ally) based on the third effect pattern A is executed due to the jackpot fluctuation is the first display than the second display pattern. The display pattern is more likely to be executed (see FIG. 66). Therefore, in the display of the preview image by the first display pattern, the expectation of the ally victory in the battle effect, that is, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the jackpot mode as compared with the display of the preview image by the second display pattern, and the jackpot is displayed. It can be said that the degree of expectation (big hit reliability) that the game (15R big hit game or 4R big hit game) is executed is high. In addition, when the battle effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on the "strong ally pattern" due to the jackpot fluctuation, the possibility of displaying the preview image by the first display pattern is higher. (See FIG. 66).

Further, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is the "strong ally pattern" and the display of the preview image is the first display pattern, a predetermined time after the start of displaying the preview image (for example, the ally character and the enemy). At the start of the character's confrontation, at a predetermined time before the end of the battle such as during the confrontation), the first preview image 501 (big hit) may be displayed enlarged in the preview image display area U compared to the beginning of the display. (See FIG. 65 (e)). This enlarged display of the preview image is based on the advance notice effect pattern set in the above-mentioned S4506, and when the advance notice effect pattern including the enlarged display of the advance notice image is selected (set), the enlarged display of the advance notice image is displayed. Will be done. Further, along with the enlarged display of the first preview image 501, the second preview image 502 (continuation) is displayed or erased smaller than the initial display start (erased in this embodiment). That is, the display mode of the preview image being displayed in the preview image display area U changes. As a result, there is a possibility that the third effect (battle effect) to be executed is due to a strong ally pattern, and that a big hit (15R 3rd big hit or 4R 4th big hit) occurs as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). It is possible to suggest to the player that the value is high and to increase the player's sense of expectation and security. When the first notice image 501 is enlarged and displayed and the second notice image 502 is erased, the display may be used to announce the confirmation of the big hit (big hit confirmation notification). Further, after the first notice image 501 is enlarged and the second notice image 502 is reduced and displayed, the first notice image 501 is further enlarged and the second notice image 502 is erased. The display mode of the preview image displayed on the U may be changed stepwise. Further, as a change in the display mode of the notice image, for example, the character of "big hit" in the first notice image 501 may be changed to "super big hit" suggesting a 15R big hit, or the character of "big hit" and its background color may be changed. The characters, colors, shapes, etc. that make up the preview image may be changed, such as by changing to the color of. Further, such a change in characters and the like and a change in the display size (enlarged display, reduced display, etc.) of the present embodiment may be combined and configured to be executable.

On the other hand, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on a pattern other than the "strong ally pattern", that is, a "weak ally pattern", a "strong enemy pattern", or a "weak enemy pattern". In any of these three patterns, the first preview image 501 is not enlarged and displayed, and the display mode of the preview image does not change. The display of the preview image in the preview image display area U is performed until the end of the third effect (battle effect) or the variable display. It is possible to enlarge the first preview image 501 even when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is other than the "strong ally pattern". In this case, the "strong ally pattern" is used. It is sufficient to reduce the feasibility of the enlarged display (change in display mode) as compared with the above. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand the relationship between the battle effect pattern (strong pattern, weak pattern) and the enlarged display (display mode change) of the preview image.

Further, in the case where the reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), the variation is performed as an out-of-reach variation (reach out-of-reach variation) based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination being out of alignment, that is. , When the effect symbol 8 is displayed as a result of the variation display (reach out-of-reach variation effect pattern) (reach out-of-reach variation effect pattern), before the display of the deviation mode (before the derivation display), the third effect pattern C (win / loss not yet achieved). The third effect (variable effect based on the third variable effect pattern) based on the settlement pattern) is performed. Since the game in the state C is continued after the variation display is stopped (after the disengagement mode is displayed), the third effect pattern C (third variation effect pattern) is a confrontation (battle) without a winning or losing decision. It is a pattern to finish. Then, in the fluctuation (out-of-reach fluctuation), for example, at the start of the fluctuation or when the reach is established, at a predetermined time during the fluctuation before the start of the third effect (battle effect), the first preview image 501 and the first notice image 501 and the first. 2 The display of the notice image 502 (first display pattern) or the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is started. At this time, when the preview image is displayed by the first display pattern, the player is unlikely to generate at least a 2R jackpot (possibility of ending state C) as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). Can be inferred. On the other hand, when the preview image is displayed by the second display pattern, the player may have at least a big hit (15R 3rd big hit or 4R 4th big hit) as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). It can be inferred that there is no such thing. In this embodiment, the display of the preview image when the third effect (battle effect of undecided victory or defeat) based on the third effect pattern C is executed due to the out-of-reach fluctuation is displayed as the first display pattern and the second display. The selectivity of each pattern is set to 50% so that the feasibility is the same for each pattern (see FIG. 66).

Here, since the display of the preview image (big hit or continuation) by the first display pattern is also a display suggesting that the game in the state C can be executed even after that, the game in the state C is completed. It does not give the player anxiety that it will end up. On the other hand, the display of the preview image by the second display pattern (continuation or effect mode E) cannot exclude the possibility that a 2R jackpot will occur, and it may not be possible to continue the game in the state C. Since it also includes sex, it gives the player such anxiety. The display of the preview image by the first display pattern or the second display pattern in such a reach deviation fluctuation is performed at a predetermined time after the start of the display (for example, during a confrontation between a ally character and an enemy character or at a predetermined time at the end of the confrontation). , Only the second notice image 502 (continuation) is displayed, and the other notice images (first notice image 501 or third notice image 503) are erased (change in display mode of the notice image). As a result, the player recognizes that as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect), the big hit (15R 3rd big hit or 4R 4th big hit) is not generated and the player is out of the game, and the game in the state C is continued. Can be done. In this way, the display of the preview image in which only the second preview image 502 (continuation) finally remains in the preview image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

In the case of out-of-reach fluctuation, the jackpot mode is not displayed as a result of the fluctuation display (big hit occurs), so that the first preview image as described above is displayed in the preview image by the first display pattern. The 501 will not be magnified. Further, in the reach out-of-reach variation, after starting the display of the preview image by the first display pattern or the second display pattern, the enlarged display of the second preview image 502 may be executably configured. The second notice image 502 is a notice image for notifying (suggesting) the continuation of the state C in which small hits occur frequently, and the enlarged display of the second notice image 502 does not give the player any benefit due to the occurrence of the big hit. Since it is foretold (suggested) that the continuation possibility of the state C is high, it is possible to alleviate the anxiety of the player such that the game in the state C ends.

Further, in the case where the reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), the variation is based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination being a 2R jackpot (any of the 2R fifth to eighth jackpots). When it is performed as a 2R jackpot variation, that is, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed as a reach variation (2R jackpot variation effect pattern) as a result of the variation display (2R jackpot variation effect pattern), before the display of the 2R jackpot mode (before the derivation display). ), The third effect (variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern) based on the third effect pattern B (allied defeat pattern) is performed. After the variation display is stopped (after the 2R jackpot mode is displayed), the 2R jackpot game is performed, the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes state B (high base state), and the game in state C is continued. Since it cannot be done, the third effect pattern B (second variable effect pattern) is a pattern in which the ally character is defeated. Then, in the fluctuation (2R jackpot fluctuation), the second preview image 502 and the second preview image 502 and the second at a predetermined time during the fluctuation before the start of the third production (battle production), for example, at the start of the fluctuation or when the reach is established. 3 The display of the preview image 503 (second display pattern) is started. From the display of the second preview image 502 and the third preview image 503, the player presumes that there is a possibility of a 2R jackpot occurring (possibility of ending state C) as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). be able to. In this embodiment, the display of the preview image when the third effect (battle effect of defeat of allies) based on the third effect pattern B is executed due to the 2R jackpot fluctuation is not executed in the first display pattern. It is supposed to be executed only by the second display pattern (see FIG. 66). This is because the game in the state C ends due to the occurrence of the 2R jackpot, even though the notice image is displayed by the first display pattern (a notice effect suggesting a relatively advantageous game development) (relative). This is because it is terrible for the player. By doing so, when displaying the preview image and performing the third effect (battle effect), displaying the advance image (information display effect), and executing the third effect (battle effect), the player feels uncomfortable or distrustful. It is possible not to give a feeling.

After that, the notice image by the second display pattern in the fluctuation (2R jackpot fluctuation) is displayed at a predetermined time after the display starts (for example, during a confrontation between a ally character and an enemy character or at a predetermined time at the end of the confrontation). Only the third notice image 503 (effect mode E) is displayed, and the second notice image 502 (continuation) is erased (change in display mode of the notice image). As a result, the player can recognize that two big hits (any of the 2R 5th to 8th big hits) have occurred as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect), and the game in the state C has come to an end. can. As described above, the display of the preview image in which only the third preview image 503 (effect mode E) finally remains in the preview image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

As described above, in the effect mode D, when the reach variation or the reach deviation variation is performed, the content (game development) of the game that can be executed after the variation is announced (suggested) based on the variation effect pattern related to the variation. The preview image to be displayed is displayed on the display screen 7a (preliminary image display area U). In this preview image, the first preview image 501 (first information) that announces (suggests) the occurrence of a jackpot (15R third jackpot or 4R fourth jackpot) that triggers the setting of state C (high accuracy and low base state). And the second preview image 502 (second information) that announces (suggests) the continuation of the state C, and the announcement (suggestion) that the gaming state shifts to the state B (end of the game in the state C) triggered by the 2R jackpot. ) Third notice image 503 (third information), and the display patterns of these notice images include a first display pattern composed of a combination of the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502, and a second notice image. There is a second display pattern composed of a combination of the 502 and the third preview image 503. The display of the preview image based on such a first display pattern or the second display pattern is performed from the start of the change to the time when the reach failure is confirmed, and in the case of the reach change, from the start of the change to the third effect. By starting at a predetermined time before the result of (battle effect) becomes clear (before the battle effect or the end of the change), state C (advantageous state where small hits occur frequently) continues (wins) triggered by the change. , Undecided) or finished (defeated), it is possible to obtain a directing effect that stirs up the expectations and anxieties of the player. In addition, when the reach fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation, depending on the mode of the third effect (battle effect) in the change (strong ally pattern, weak ally pattern, etc.), the third effect is executed after the display of the preview image is started. The display mode of the preview image displayed at that time can be changed at a predetermined time during the middle (during the battle production). Such a change in the display mode attracts the player's interest to the preview image being displayed, and suggests that the later game development is likely to be advantageous to the player at an early stage before the end of the change. It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation and security.

[Mode selection period]
Next, the mode selection period for selecting the effect mode of the state C will be described. As described above, when the gaming state is controlled to the state C (high accuracy and low base state), either the effect mode C or D is set, and the effect mode to be set is selected. Is configured to be performed based on the operation of the first effect button 63a by the player. This effect mode selection can be executed at a predetermined time when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high accuracy and low base state) occurs. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, "4R 1st jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot" and "4R 4th jackpot" are jackpots that trigger the setting of state C (high accuracy and low base state) (see FIG. 6). ), It is possible to select the effect modes C and D at a predetermined time when these big hits occur.

In this embodiment, at a predetermined time after the start of the big hit game, a mode selection period is generated in which the effect mode after the end of the big hit game can be selected from the two effect modes C and D. The occurrence time (occurrence timing) of this mode selection period is different between "4R 1st jackpot" and "4R 4th jackpot" and "15R 3rd jackpot". The control process related to the effect mode selection, such as the generation of the mode selection period and the selection of the effect mode based on the operation of the first effect button 63a during the mode selection period, is performed by the sub control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91). It is executed under the control, and specifically, it is executed by the hit game effect processing (S4408) of the receiving command analysis processing (S4302).

First, when the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in the state A (left-handed game) and "4R first big hit" occurs, that is, when "4R first big hit" occurs as the first hit, and the state. Mode selection when a big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in B or C (right-handed game) and "4R 4th big hit" occurs, that is, when "4R 4th big hit" occurs as a consecutive villa hit The period occurs in the ending period after all rounds of the 4R jackpot game are completed. Here, as described above, when the final round of the jackpot game is completed (when the value of the round counter becomes "0"), the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets the jackpot ending command and sets the jackpot ending command. (S2116), the ending period of the jackpot starts (S2117). When the sub control unit 90 receives the ending command, the sub control unit side can recognize the start of the ending period. The ending command is, for example, "4R ending command" for "4R 1st jackpot" and "4R 4th jackpot", and "15R ending command" for "15R 3rd jackpot". It is provided according to the type of jackpot. The ending period is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses. In this embodiment, the ending time related to the 4R jackpot game is set to "15 seconds", and the ending time related to the 15R jackpot game is set to "5". Seconds ". The ending time shown in this embodiment is an example, and can be arbitrarily determined in consideration of the specifications of the gaming machine, the playability, and the like.

When the sub control unit 90 receives the ending command, the sub control unit 90 transmits an ending effect command corresponding to the received ending command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response to this, the ending effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When this ending effect is triggered by the 4R ending command, as shown in FIG. 62, the mode selection screen 700 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a as the ending effect. The mode selection screen mainly consists of an image 701 indicating "effect mode C" (hereinafter also referred to as "mode C selection image") and an image 702 indicating "effect mode D" (hereinafter also referred to as "mode D selection image"). And are arranged side by side, and an image 703 (hereinafter, also referred to as “button image”) imitating the first effect button 63a is arranged between the left and right sides. By displaying the mode selection screen 700 in this way, the player is notified that the mode selection period is in progress.

When the player operates the first effect button 63a while the mode selection screen 700 is displayed, the image 701 (mode C selection image) and the image 702 (mode D selection image) to be selected alternate with each operation. It is highlighted and the highlighted image (that is, the effect mode) is represented as being selected (see FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b)). In this embodiment, the selected mode selection image (effect mode) is displayed (highlighted) as a mode surrounded by a thick frame, and the unselected mode selection image (effect mode) is displayed darkly (dark display). There is. Therefore, the player selects the effect mode of the subsequent state C (high accuracy and low base state) by operating the first effect button 63a so that the mode selection image corresponding to the desired effect mode is highlighted. can do.

Further, in this embodiment, the mode selection period after the end of 4R is set to 10 seconds from the start of the ending period. Then, at the timing when 12 seconds have elapsed from the start of the mode selection period (start of the ending period), a countdown display indicating the remaining period until the end of the mode selection period is started on the upper side of the button image (FIG. 62 (c)). reference). The countdown display is performed in a mode in which the numerical image 704 is displayed by subtracting 1 from "3" → "2" → "1". By this countdown display, the player is notified that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before the end of the selection period). When the number image 704 becomes "1" in the countdown display, the countdown display ends shortly thereafter, and the mode selection period ends. At this time, the highlighted mode selection image (enclosed in a thick frame) is displayed as the selected effect mode (selection result). After that, until the ending period ends, an effect display (not shown) indicating the transition to the state C is executed on the display screen 7a. The effect mode (C or D) selected in this way is set as the effect mode of the state C to be executed (started) thereafter, and thereafter, in the state C, the set (selected) effect mode (C or D) is set. The production pattern game production is executed.

On the other hand, when the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in the state B or C (right-handed game) and "15R 3rd big hit" occurs, that is, "15R 3rd big hit" occurs as a consecutive villa hit. If so, the mode selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the 15R jackpot game. Specifically, in this embodiment, of 1R to 15R, the mode selection period is from the start of 14R to the middle of 15R. Here, as described above, with the start of the round game, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets the round start command (S2106), and the sub control unit 90 receives the round start. , It becomes possible for the sub-control unit side to recognize the start of the round game. The round start command is provided according to the number of rounds to be started (executed), for example, "1R start command", "2R start command" ... "15R start command".

When the sub-control unit 90 receives the start of the round game immediately before 14R (predetermined round game), which is the start round of the mode selection period, that is, the "13R start command" for designating the start of 13R, the sub-control unit 90 responds to this. The round effect command to be performed is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response to this, the round effect of 13R is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the round effect of 13R, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the round effect screen 800 of 13R is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (upper left side of the screen in this embodiment). A notification screen 810 indicating that the mode can be selected from the next round (14R) is displayed. By displaying the notification screen 810, the player is notified that the mode selection period will start from the next round (14R in this embodiment) (notification before the start of the selection period, first notification means). In this way, after notifying in advance that the effect mode can be selected (the mode selection period starts), the effect mode can be set in a new mode such that the effect mode selection period occurs (starts). You can choose. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the production mode selection.

A predetermined round effect image (not shown), an image showing the current number of rounds, a prize ball count image C1 and the like are also displayed on the round effect screen 800. The prize ball count image C1 displayed here is additionally displayed for each winning ball based on the entry into the first big winning opening 30 during the big hit game (reception of the first big winning opening entry command). It is displayed continuously even in the state C after the big hit game is completed, and the ball is entered into the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game after that, and the first big in the big hit game. It is also displayed in addition by entering the winning opening 30. Therefore, the prize ball count image C1 displays the total number of prize balls won during the period from the first hit to the consecutive villa period.

Next, when the sub control unit 90 receives the "14R start command" that specifies the start of 14R, which is the start round of the mode selection period, the sub control unit 90 transmits a round effect command corresponding to this to the image control board 100 (image control unit). do. In response to this, the round effect of 14R is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the 14R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the 14R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (upper left side of the screen in this embodiment). The mode selection screen 900 is displayed in. This mode selection screen 900 has the same screen configuration as the mode selection screen 700 (see FIG. 62) in the mode selection period that occurs during the ending period of the 4R jackpot game described above, and is assumed to be a reduced version of the mode selection screen 700. There is. By displaying the mode selection screen 900, the player is notified that the mode selection period is in progress (notification during the selection period, second notification means). The effect mode selection (up and down swapping of the mode selection images) on the mode selection screen 900 is the same procedure as the effect mode selection on the mode selection screen 700 described above based on FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b). Therefore, a detailed description of the effect mode selection in 14R will be omitted. The screen configuration (display content) of the mode selection screen 900 may be different from a part or all of the mode selection screen 700 displayed in the mode selection period during the ending period, and the mode may be applied to the entire display screen 7a. The selection screen 900 may be displayed.

Next, when the sub control unit 90 receives the "15R start command" that specifies the start of the 15R following the start round (14R) of the mode selection period, the sub control unit 90 issues a round effect command corresponding to the "15R start command" to the image control board 100 (image control unit). ). In response to this, the round effect of 15R is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the 15R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the 15R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (upper left side of the screen in this embodiment). The mode selection screen 900 is displayed in. At this time, on the mode selection screen 900, the countdown display is started at the start of 15R. This countdown display is the same as the countdown display (see FIG. 62 (c)) on the mode selection screen 700 during the ending period described above, and the numerical image changes from "3" to "2" as the 15R progresses. It decreases to "1" (see FIG. 63 (d)). By this countdown display, the player is notified that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before the end of the selection period, third notification means). Then, the countdown display ends in the middle of 15R (when about 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of 15R), and the mode selection period ends.

After that, until the end of 15R, the mode selection screen 900 is displayed together with the round effect screen 800 on the display screen 7a, and the selected effect mode (selection result) is displayed on the mode selection screen 900. This selected effect mode (C or D) is set as the effect mode of the state C to be executed (started) thereafter, and thereafter, in the state C, the set (selected) effect mode (C or D) is set. The production pattern game production is executed.

In this way, when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high accuracy and low base state) occurs, the effect mode of the state C is set to "effect mode C" at a predetermined time after the big hit game related to the big hit is started. "Or" effect mode D ", a mode selection period occurs. Regarding the occurrence time (start time) of this mode selection period, the case where the 4R first big hit occurred in the state A (left-handed game) and the 15R third big hit occurred in the state B or C (right-handed game). The time of occurrence differs depending on the case. That is, the time when the mode selection period occurs differs depending on whether the first hit is in the state A in which the left-handed game is performed and the case in which the consecutive villa is hit in the state B or C in which the right-handed game is performed. It has become a thing. Another way of thinking is that the type of jackpot game to be executed (type of jackpot), that is, the 4R jackpot game (4R 1st jackpot, 4R 4th jackpot) or the 15R jackpot game (15R 3rd jackpot). The time when the mode selection period occurs differs depending on whether or not the mode is selected. For this reason, depending on the game state when a big hit occurs (whether it is the first hit or the consecutive villa hit) and the type of the big hit game to be executed, the time when the effect mode can be selected may be different, or the effect mode may be selected. It is possible to change the mode.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the 4R jackpot game is executed, the mode selection period occurs during the ending period after all the round games are completed, and the mode selection screen 700 is displayed (see FIG. 62). On the other hand, when the 15R jackpot game is executed, the mode selection period occurs (starts) from 14R to the middle of 15R (final R) during the jackpot game, but in 13R before the mode selection period occurs (before the start). , The notification screen 810 notifying that the mode selection period is started from the next round is displayed (notification before the start of the selection period, see FIG. 63 (a)), and in 14R, the mode selection period occurs and the mode selection screen 900 is displayed. It is displayed (notification during the selection period, see FIG. 63 (b)), and a countdown display is executed in 15R (notification before the end of the selection period, see FIGS. 63 (c), (d)). In this way, in the 4R jackpot game, the player is given an opportunity to select the production mode after all the round games are completed, and in the 15R jackpot game, the player has the opportunity to select the production mode by the time all the round games are completed. Given to. This makes it possible to prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to give a different impression to the player regarding the effect mode selection.

Further, the ending period of the 4R jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds is made longer than the ending period of the 15R jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds, and in the 4R jackpot, the mode selection period is generated by using the ending period. ing. For this reason, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the negative image for the player, such as the number of rounds (the number of winning prize balls) being small and the execution period of the big hit game being short compared to the 15R big hit, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest. Become.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the 15R jackpot game is executed, the player is urged to select the effect mode after the jackpot game over a plurality of round games (13R to 15R in this embodiment). There is. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the production mode selection. Further, the mode selection period is from the start of 14R (predetermined round game) to the middle of 15R (next round game), and from before the start to the end of the mode selection period, notification (selection period) related to the effect mode selection is made. Notification before the start, notification during the selection period, notification before the end of the selection period) is performed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to select the effect mode without noticing the occurrence of the mode selection period.

[Production in low accuracy and low base state]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70, the main effects performed in the low accuracy and low base state will be described. Here, FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the effect performed in the low accuracy and low base state. FIG. 68 is a screen view (No. 1) showing a specific example of the effect performed in the low accuracy and low base state. FIG. 69 is a screen view (No. 2) showing a specific example of the effect performed in the low accuracy and low base state. FIG. 70 is a screen view (No. 3) showing a specific example of the effect performed in the low accuracy and low base state.

As shown in FIG. 1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the vertical widths of the display screens 71a and 72a are (No. 1). (1) An image display device (of the image display device 7) that is sufficiently narrower than the vertical width of the first display screen 7a is provided. On the premise of this configuration, when the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a are shown together, the images displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a become smaller, and the visual recognition thereof becomes smaller. There is concern that it will be difficult. Therefore, in the screen views after FIG. 68, for convenience of explanation, the vertical width of the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a is made substantially the same as the vertical width of the first display screen 7a, and these are used as necessary. The image displayed on the display screen of is illustrated.

Further, in the following description based on FIGS. 67 to 84, for convenience of explanation, the first effect hold 9a indicating that the first special symbol winning / failing determination is held is simply referred to as a “hold icon”, and the hold icon is used as the hold icon. The displayed display area shall be referred to as a hold icon display area 9c (instead of the first effect hold display area 9c). Further, the "icon" as a variation suggestion image suggesting that the first special symbol and the first effect symbol 8 are being variablely displayed is displayed in the icon display area 9e (see, for example, FIG. 68 (A)). I will explain it as a thing.
Further, each effect described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 84 includes a variation effect in the variation effect pattern set by the variation effect pattern setting process in step S4505 of FIG. 52 and a notice effect setting process in step S4506 of FIG. It is realized by transmitting a variable effect start command instructing execution with the advance notice effect set by the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, and the image control board 100 performs processing based on this variable effect start command. To.

In FIG. 68 (A), in order to notify that the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is “missing”, the “526” stitches are shown. The state in which the first effect image 8 shown is stopped and displayed is exemplified. On the other hand, when the first special symbol hit / fail determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c (the hold icon indicated by the black circle in FIG. 68 (A)) is executed, the first 1 On the special symbol display 41a, the first special symbol is variablely displayed, and the first special symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, on the first display screen 7a, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the variable display of the first special symbol is started. At the same time as the shift process is performed, the variable display of the three symbol rows in the effect symbol display area 7b is started (see FIGS. 67 (A) and 68 (B)). Specifically, in the effect symbol display area 7b, a part of the pattern rows of the effect symbols in which the numbers "1" to "9" are continuously written in the vertical direction from the bottom to the top is three rows in the horizontal direction. It is displayed, and as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the scroll display of the three symbol rows is started so that these symbol rows scroll from top to bottom.

Here, if the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination performed at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is "missing" and it is determined not to execute the reach effect, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. At the end of the game, the three effect symbols showing the random eyes (for example, "458") are pseudo-stopped, and the loss notification effect is stopped as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. (See FIG. 67 (B)) is performed.

Here, "pseudo-stop" means to swing the effect symbol on the spot without moving it, and "main stop" means to make the effect symbol completely stationary.

On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "big hit" or when it is decided to perform the reach effect of the "missing", for example, during the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect is produced. A predetermined left symbol (for example, 4 symbols) is pseudo-stopped in the left column of the symbol display area 7b, and then a right symbol (for example, 4 symbols) showing the same effect symbol as the left symbol is placed in the right column of the effect symbol display area 7b. A pre-reach effect to make a pseudo stop is performed. Then, as a result of such a pre-reach effect, when the same left symbol and right symbol are pseudo-stopped, reach is established (see FIG. 67 (C)).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a so-called pseudo-continuous effect may be performed as such a pre-reach effect before the reach is established. This pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the effect symbol is variablely displayed a plurality of times in the effect symbol display area 7b during one special symbol variation display. If this pseudo-continuous effect is executed before the reach is established, the following effect display is performed.

That is, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, for example, the left symbol (for example, 4 symbols) is pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 68 (C)), and then the right symbol and the like. A different right symbol (for example, 1 symbol) is pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 68 (D)), and then 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped as a middle symbol for notifying the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 68 (E)). ..

In this embodiment, a case where the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is notified by pseudo-stopping the seven symbols in the middle row will be described, but in another embodiment, the player performs a pseudo-continuous effect such as "NEXT". By pseudo-stopping a recognizable special symbol in the middle row, the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect may be notified.

As described above, when 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row after the effect symbols different from each other as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-second variation effect following the pseudo-first variation effect is started. To. Specifically, after the character "x2" suggesting the start of the pseudo-second variation effect is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the character "x2" is displayed in the first display. It is displayed small in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and the scroll display of the three symbol rows is resumed accordingly (see FIG. 68 (F)).

Then, when the variation effect pattern that establishes the reach is set during the variation effect of the pseudo second station at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol this time, it is predetermined after the variation effect of the pseudo second station is started. When time elapses, the left symbol (for example, 2 symbols) first pseudo-stops in the left column (see FIG. 68 (G)), and then the same right symbol (for example, 2 symbols) as the left symbol stops pseudo-stops to reach. It holds (see FIG. 68 (H)).

Up to this point, the case where "pseudo-reach before reach" is performed by pseudo-stopping 7 symbols in the middle row and executing the pseudo-ream effect before the reach is established has been described as an example, but the left symbol and the right symbol are the same. In some cases, a "pseudo-reach after reach" is performed in which the 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row after the effect symbols are pseudo-stopped to execute the pseudo-ream effect.

As described above, when the same effect symbols as the left and right symbols are pseudo-stopped and reach is established, the player is expected that the same effect symbols as these effect symbols (reach symbols) will stop in the middle row. A predetermined reach effect is performed. In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 67, normal short reach, normal long reach, first SP reach, and first reach are produced as a reach effect that can be performed with the variable display of the first special symbol in the low probability and low base state. Five types of reach effects, 2SP reach and SPSP reach, are available.

The normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)) is a reach effect having the lowest jackpot reliability among the above five types of reach effects (for example, jackpot reliability: about 2%). This normal short reach is a reach effect in which the effect execution time is shorter than that of the normal long reach described later, and when the reach is established, the normal short reach is first performed (see FIGS. 67 (C) and 67 (F)). When this normal short reach is performed, when the reach is established, the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row gradually decreases, and the same middle symbol or reach symbol as the reach symbol is between the left and right symbols forming the reach. The scroll display of the middle symbol string that pseudo-stops the middle symbol different from that is performed (see FIG. 68 (I)). In FIG. 68 (I), one symbol "1" less than the reach symbol passes on the effective line between the left symbol and the right symbol, and the same middle symbol as the reach symbol (here, two symbols) is the effective line. The appearance of approaching to is illustrated.

Here, when the variation effect pattern for notifying the winning is set in the normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)), the winning notification effect (see FIG. 67 (G)) is performed in the normal short reach. Specifically, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment this time is "big hit", doublet (for example, "222") is obtained by pseudo-stopping the same medium symbol as the reach symbol on the effective line. After the effect symbols are pseudo-stopped, a hit notification effect is performed in which these effect symbols are stopped as they are. On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment this time is "missing", the effect symbol of the reach losing eye (for example, "232") is produced by pseudo-stopping the middle symbol different from the reach symbol on the effective line. After the pseudo-stop, a loss notification effect is performed in which these effect symbols are stopped as they are.

On the other hand, when a variable effect pattern that develops from a normal short reach to another reach effect is set, the following effect is performed. For example, when the normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)) is evolved into the normal long reach (see FIG. 67 (H)) and a variable effect pattern for notifying the winner is set in the normal long reach, the normal short is set. At the end of the reach, a long development suggestion effect (see Fig. 69 (A)) that suggests the development to a normal long reach is performed, and high-speed scrolling of the middle row of symbols is resumed, and the normal long reach (Fig. 67 (H)). )) The reach production develops. In this normal long reach, as illustrated in FIG. 69 (B), an effect display is performed in which a predetermined character expects a pattern alignment in the central region of the first display screen 7a.

The normal long reach is the reach effect with the lowest jackpot reliability next to the normal short reach among the above five types of reach effects (for example, the jackpot reliability: about 2%), and in most cases, the normal long reach. The loss notification effect (see Fig. 67 (G)) is performed in the normal long reach without developing into other reach effects, but if the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment this time is a big hit, it will be the normal long reach. In some cases, a hit notification effect (see FIG. 67 (G)) is performed. Further, when a variable effect pattern that develops from the normal long reach to another reach effect is set, the first SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)) or the SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (N)) from the normal long reach. ) Will develop reach production.

Here, the 1st SP reach is a reach production with the lowest jackpot reliability next to the normal long reach (for example, the jackpot reliability: about 11%), and when developing from the normal long reach to the 1st SP reach, it is as follows. The production display is performed. That is, after the same middle symbol as the reach symbol has passed on the effective line, the high-speed scrolling of the middle row symbol row is restarted, and the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol) that is pseudo-stopped in the effect symbol display area 7b is It moves to the upper left area and the upper right area of the first display screen 7a while being reduced while maintaining the reach state. Then, in the central region of the first display screen 7a, a predetermined effect display for expecting a big hit is performed.

In this way, when the game develops into the 1st SP reach, the winning notification effect (see FIG. 67 (K)) for notifying the winning is performed in the 1st SP reach, and the predetermined development gimmick effect from the 1st SP reach (Fig.). It may develop into SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (N)) via 67 (L)).

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is a case where the normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)) develops into the above-mentioned first SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)) without going through the normal long reach. , The normal short reach may develop directly to the second SP reach (see FIG. 67 (J)).

Here, the 2nd SP reach is a reach effect with a slightly higher jackpot reliability than the 1st SP reach (for example, the jackpot reliability: about 12%), and when developing from the normal short reach to the 2nd SP reach, it is as follows. The production display is performed. That is, after the same middle symbol as the reach symbol has passed on the effective line, the high-speed scrolling of the middle row symbol row is restarted, and the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol) that is pseudo-stopped in the effect symbol display area 7b is It moves to the upper left area and the upper right area of the first display screen 7a while being reduced while maintaining the reach state. Then, in the central region of the first display screen 7a, a predetermined effect display for expecting a big hit is performed.

As described above, the first SP reach and the second SP reach are displayed with the same screen configuration to expect a big hit, but the contents of these reach effects are different from each other. Specifically, in the 1st SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)), if the own character cannot prevent the enemy character's attack, it becomes a big hit, and conversely, if the own character cannot prevent the enemy character's attack, it becomes a loss. The production display is performed. On the other hand, the second SP reach (see FIG. 67 (J)) is configured as a mission production, and if the own character succeeds in the mission, it becomes a big hit, and conversely, if the own character fails in the mission, a production display that becomes a loss is performed. ..

When it develops into the 1st SP reach and the 2nd SP reach, since the jackpot reliability of these reach effects is relatively low, the loss notification effect is the hit notification effect in the hit notification effect (see FIG. 67 (K)). Easier to execute than. Therefore, when the player develops into the 1st SP reach or the 2nd SP reach, the player can reach the SPSP via the development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) as in the case of developing into the normal long reach. 67 (N)) is expected to develop.

Here, the SPSP reach is the reach production with the highest jackpot reliability among the above five types of reach production. In this embodiment, this SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (N)) always develops via a development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) suggesting the development to the SPSP reach, and is used as the effect pattern. As illustrated in FIG. 67, a production pattern in which a development gimmick effect occurs immediately after the reach is established and develops into an SPSP reach, and a production pattern in which a development gimmick effect occurs during a normal long reach and develops into an SPSP reach. There is a production pattern in which a development gimmick effect is generated during the first SP reach and develops into the SPSP reach, and a production pattern in which a development gimmick effect is generated during the second SP reach and develops into the SPSP reach.

Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the development gimmick effect is performed at some timing during the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is high at the timing before the reach is established or immediately after the reach is established during the variation display of the first special symbol, during the normal long reach, during the first SP reach, during the second SP reach, and the like. The first big chance notice (see FIG. 67 (E)), which suggests that it is relatively high, is a notice effect with a relatively high jackpot reliability (big hit reliability: about 33% (see FIG. 75 (B))). When this first big chance notice occurs, it is easy to develop into a highly reliable reach effect (SPSP reach in this embodiment).

For this reason, the player first receives the first big chance notice (see FIG. 67 (E)) during the variable display of the first special symbol, and then the development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) occurs. You can enjoy the game while expecting to do it. The rank-up effect that can suggest the occurrence of the first big chance notice and the first big chance notice will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75.

Further, as is clear from the notation of FIG. 67, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is a case where the development gimmick production directly develops into SPSP reach, and a second big chance notice from the development gimmick production (FIG. 67 (M)). It may develop into SPSP reach via (see). Since this second big chance notice is a notice effect suggesting that the jackpot reliability is extremely high (the possibility that the hit notification effect is relatively high) is high (big hit reliability: about 58%: Figure). 75 (B)), the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the second big chance notice will be subsequently generated when the development gimmick effect occurs.

Next, a specific example of the production performed when the development gimmick production occurs at the end of the normal long reach and develops into the SPSP reach via the second big chance notice will be described. When directly developing from the normal long reach to the SPSP reach without going through the first SP reach, for example, at the end of the normal long reach (see FIG. 69 (B)), the effect symbol showing the reach loss eye is pseudo-stopped and lost. A pseudo-missing effect (see FIG. 69 (C)) that pretends to be performed is performed. After that, the character "roulette chance" suggesting that the development destination selection effect for selecting the type of SPSP reach to be the development destination is performed is displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 80 (H)), and the development destination is displayed. A selection effect (see FIG. 69 (D)) is performed.

When the development destination selection effect is developed, as illustrated in FIG. 69 (D), panels corresponding to each of the four types of SPSP reach having different jackpot reliability are displayed. Specifically, a panel corresponding to the A battle in which the own character battles with the enemy character A, a panel corresponding to the B battle in which the own character battles with the enemy character B, and a C battle in which the own character battles with the enemy character C. The panel corresponding to the above and the panel corresponding to the X battle in which the own character battles with the enemy character X are displayed on the first display screen 7a. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 69 (D), the number of stars suggests the degree of expectation that the victory effect will be performed when all four panels develop into the corresponding SPSP reach. It is suggested that the expectations for winning the game and becoming a big hit game are different from each other.

Further, when the development destination selection effect is developed, in addition to the above four panels, the first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a and the remaining time of the valid period in which the operation of the first effect button 63a is effective are shown. The validity period gauge is displayed. When the development destination selection effect is developed, the roulette effect that highlights the above four panels in order is started prior to the start of the valid period. Note that FIG. 69 (D) illustrates a state in which the panel corresponding to the A battle is highlighted. In this way, the valid period starts with the roulette effect being performed, and when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the valid period, the roulette effect ends and one of the panels is highlighted. It will be in the state of being done. Then, for example, when the panel corresponding to the A battle is highlighted, the development destination suggestion effect (FIG. 69) in which the panel corresponding to the A battle is enlarged and displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a. (See)) is performed.

In the development destination selection effect, the SPSP reach highlighted at the timing when the player operates the first effect button 63a is not necessarily selected, and the effect pattern set at the start of the symbol change this time is used. Based on, one of the panels is selected.

When the development destination suggestion effect suggesting that the SPSP reach is developed is performed in this way, the development gimmick effect (see FIGS. 67 (L) and 69 (F)) is always performed. This development gimmick production is a production that suggests the development to SPSP by using the movable decorative member 14 as a production accessory. In the development gimmick effect, although not shown in FIG. 69 (F), the movable decorative member 14 moves so as to fall from the initial position to the effect position covering the central region of the first display screen 7a, and the first display. A predetermined development gimmick effect image is displayed in the peripheral area not covered by the movable decorative member 14 on the screen 7a, and the development gimmick effect sound corresponding to these effects is output from the speaker 67.

Next, in the case of developing from the development gimmick effect to the second big chance notice, when the movable decorative member 14 returns to the initial position and a predetermined time elapses, the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display A predetermined second big chance notice image including the characters "Gimmick" is displayed on the screen 72a, and a second big chance notice sound is output from the speaker 67. It should be noted that this second big chance notice may be any kind of production as long as the player can recognize that the jackpot reliability is extremely high, and is accompanied by, for example, the operation of the movable decorative member 14. There may be. Further, in another embodiment, it may be accompanied by the operation of the effecting object provided on the front frame 51 or the outer frame 53.

In this way, when the second big chance notice is given following the development gimmick production, SPSP reach is started. In this SPSP reach, first, a title display for notifying the type of SPSP reach is performed (see FIG. 69 (H)). In the example shown in FIG. 69, the panel corresponding to the A battle is selected by the development destination selection effect that can be performed prior to the development gimmick effect. Therefore, in FIG. 69 (H), the own character is the enemy character A. It is illustrated that the title display suggesting that it develops into SPSP reach (A battle) that battles with.

In the title display performed at the start of SPSP reach, the characters constituting the title display may be displayed in white, red, or rainbow colors.

On the other hand, from the time when the title is displayed until the end of the SPSP reach, the effect display showing how the own character and the enemy character (here, the enemy character A) repeats offense and defense is performed. Then, at the end of the SPSP reach, the first effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 69 (I)) that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a is performed. Specifically, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a and an validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the valid period in which the operation of the first effect button 63a is effective are displayed.

In this first effect button operation promotion effect, the first effect period is when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the valid period, or when the valid period ends without operating the first effect button 63a. An effect called cut-in is performed in which a predetermined cut-in image is superimposed and displayed on the effect images displayed on the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. This cut-in is a preview effect suggesting how reliable the jackpot is, and in the present embodiment, a green cut-in (see FIG. 70 (A)) for superimposing and displaying a green cut-in image is performed. When the red cut-in image is superimposed and displayed (see FIG. 70 (B)), and when the red cut-in image is superimposed and displayed (see FIG. 70 (C)). May be done.

When the cut-in occurs in this way and the end of the SPSP reach is reached, the second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIGS. 70 (D) to (F)) for urging the player to operate the second effect button 63b is performed. .. During the valid period of this second effect button operation promotion effect, a second effect button image imitating the second effect button 63b, a character indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b "press!", And an effective period. A valid period gauge indicating the remaining time of is displayed. In the present embodiment, when the second effect button image showing the small second effect button 63b is displayed as the second effect button image (see FIG. 70 (D)), the second effect button image of medium size is displayed. When the second effect button image showing the effect button 63b is displayed (see FIG. 70 (E)) and when the second effect button image showing the large second effect button 63b is displayed (see FIG. 70 (F)). ).

When the player operates the second effect button 63b during the valid period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, the winning notification effect (see FIG. 67 (O)) is provided as an operation corresponding effect according to the operation. Will be done. That is, if the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment this time is a big hit, a victory effect showing how the own character wins the enemy character and a hit in which the doublet effect symbol is pseudo-stopped and then stopped. Notification production is performed. On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment this time is a loss, a defeat effect showing how the own character is defeated by the enemy character and a loss effect in which the effect pattern of the reach loss eye is pseudo-stopped and then stopped. Notification production is performed.

The size of the second effect button 63b shown by the second effect button image displayed during the valid period of the second effect button operation promotion effect corresponds to the jackpot reliability, and the second effect button has a medium size. When the second effect button image showing the effect button 63b is displayed (see FIG. 70 (E)), the second effect button image showing the smaller second effect button 63b is displayed (FIG. 70 (D). ), It is characterized in that the hit notification effect (see FIG. 70 (G)) is more easily executed as the operation corresponding effect. Further, when the second effect button image showing the small second effect button 63b is displayed (see FIG. 70 (D)), the second effect button image showing the second effect button 63b having a medium size is displayed. Is displayed (see FIG. 70 (E)), and there is a feature that the loss notification effect (see FIG. 70 (H)) is more easily executed as the operation corresponding effect.

Further, the second effect button image showing the large second effect button 63b can be displayed when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination this time is a hit, but is not displayed when the result is a loss. There is. Therefore, it can be said that the second effect button operation promotion effect that displays the second effect button image showing the large second effect button 63b is a notice effect with a jackpot reliability of 100%.

[About increasing chances during SPSP reach]
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the chance increase during SPSP reach will be described. Here, FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the chance increase during the SPSP reach.

As illustrated in FIG. 71, the title display performed at the beginning of the SPSP reach (see FIG. 69 (H)) has a jackpot reliability of about 15% when the color of the characters constituting the title display is white. When the character color is red, the jackpot reliability is about 37%, and when the character color is rainbow, the jackpot reliability is 100%.

In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot reliability when the characters constituting the title display are displayed in white or red is fixed regardless of the type of SPSP reach will be described, but in other embodiments, the title will be described. The jackpot reliability when the characters constituting the display are displayed in white or red may be different depending on the type of SPSP reach.

Further, although not shown in the figure, in the middle of the SPSP reach, when the effect display showing how the own character and the enemy character repeat the offense and defense is performed, the frame lamp 66 is made to emit light with a predetermined emission color. , An effect called a frame flash that outputs a predetermined sound effect from the speaker 67 may be performed, and the jackpot reliability of the frame flash that causes the frame lamp 66 to emit red light is about 53%, and the frame lamp 66 is rainbow-colored. The jackpot reliability of the frame flash that emits light is 100%.

Further, although not shown in the figure, a predetermined music corresponding to the SPSP reach is output from the speaker 67 during the SPSP reach. On the other hand, during SPSP reach, there may be a chance-up effect called a song change that changes this predetermined song to another special song, and this song change has a jackpot reliability of about 70%. It is a chance-up production of.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 71, a green cut-in is provided for the operation of the first effect button 63a during the valid period of the first effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 69 (I)) during the SPSP reach. The jackpot reliability when it occurs is about 7%, the jackpot reliability when a red cut-in occurs is about 56%, and the jackpot reliability when a gold cut-in occurs is about 71%.

In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot reliability of the blue cut-in, the red cut-in, and the gold cut-in is fixed regardless of the type of SPSP reach will be described, but in other embodiments, the above three types are described. The jackpot reliability of the cut-in may be different depending on the type of SPSP reach.

On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 71, regarding the second effect button operation promotion effect at the end of the SPSP reach, an effect of displaying a second effect button image showing a small second effect button 63b (see FIG. 70 (D)). The jackpot reliability of is about 16%, and the jackpot reliability of the effect of displaying the second effect button image showing the medium second effect button 63b (see FIG. 70 (E)) is about 55%, which is large. The jackpot reliability of the effect (see FIG. 70 (F)) for displaying the second effect button image showing the second effect button 63b is 100%. Although not shown in the figure, a vibration motor for vibrating these effect buttons is provided at a position close to the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b, and the second effect button at the end of SPSP reach is provided. In the operation promotion effect, the effect of increasing the chance that the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b vibrate may be performed even before the valid period starts. The effect of increasing the chance using this vibration motor can be executed when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, but it is not executed when the result is a loss. The effect of the big hit reliability is 100%. It has become.

[About rank-up production]
Next, the rank-up effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. Here, FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the rank-up effect. FIG. 73 is a screen view (No. 1) showing a specific example of the rank-up effect. FIG. 74 is a screen view (No. 2) showing a specific example of the rank-up effect.

The rank-up effect is a notice effect performed during the variable display of the first special symbol, and is configured as a step effect that gradually changes the display mode of the character image (see, for example, FIG. 73 (D)). In the present embodiment, this rank-up effect can be changed stepwise from the fifth stage to any of the five stages or less. That is, in the present embodiment, the rank-up effect started in the first stage ends in the first stage, and the rank-up effect started in the first stage finally develops to the second stage and ends. The case where the rank-up effect started in the first stage finally develops to the third stage and ends, and the case where the rank-up effect started in the first stage finally develops to the fourth stage. There are cases where the rank-up effect started in the first stage finally develops to the fifth stage and ends.

Hereinafter, a specific example of the rank-up effect will be described by taking as an example the case where the rank-up effect started in the first stage finally develops to the fifth stage and ends.

In FIG. 73 (A), in order to notify that the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is “missing”, the “445” stitches are shown. An example is a state in which the effect symbol shown is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the first special symbol hit / fail determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c (the hold icon indicated by the black circle in FIG. 73 (A)) is executed, the first 1 On the special symbol display 41a, the first special symbol is variablely displayed, and the first special symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, on the first display screen 7a, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the variable display of the first special symbol is started. At the same time as the shift process is performed, the variable display of the three symbol strings in the effect symbol display area 7b is started (see FIG. 73 (B)). In the screen views after FIG. 73 (C), the notation of the effect symbol displayed on the first display screen 7a is omitted for convenience of explanation.

Here, when it is set to execute the rank-up effect during the variation display of the first special symbol this time, when the variation display of the three symbol columns is started and a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses, A white character image used for the rank-up effect is displayed in the central region of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 73 (C)). When the white character image used for the rank-up effect is displayed in this way, the character movement effect of moving the white character image from the first display screen 7a to the second display screen 71a (see FIG. 72 (A)). ) Is performed. Specifically, the white character image displayed in the central region of the first display screen 7a is moved to the left (direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 73C), and the left end of the first display screen 7a is moved. At the same time as erasing the white character image moved to the first display screen 7a, the white character image is displayed on the second display screen 71a (see FIGS. 73 (C) and 73 (D)).

By performing such a character movement effect, it is possible to make it appear that the white character image displayed on the first display screen 7a has moved to the second display screen 71a. When the rank-up effect is executed, a character image larger than the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a after the character movement effect is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a to rank up. The production starts.

Therefore, the player can easily notice that the character image is displayed and rank up as compared with the case where the character image is displayed on the second display screen 71a and the rank-up effect is started without performing the character movement effect. It is possible to effectively notify that the production has started.

Immediately after the character movement effect is performed, the rank-up effect is in the first stage, and the white character image corresponding to the first stage is displayed on the second display screen 71a (see FIG. 73 (D)). ). On the other hand, when the rank-up effect is changed stepwise from the second stage onward, a predetermined charge effect (see FIG. 72 (B)) is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 73 (E), another character image having the same white color as the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a (hereinafter referred to as “snowball image”) is the first. It is displayed on the display screen 7a, and in order to inject energy into the character image of the second display screen 71a, an effect display showing how the snowball image throws a white star-shaped item at the character image is performed. Then, when developing the rank-up effect to the second stage, the character color change success effect (FIG. 72 (C), FIG. 73 (FIG. 72 (C)), in which the portion of the character image below the knee is changed to blue corresponding to the second stage. F)) is performed.

On the other hand, when the rank-up effect is not developed to the second stage, the character color change failure effect (see FIG. 72 (D)) in which the display color of the character image does not change from white even if the charge effect is performed is performed.

When the rank-up effect is developed from the second stage to the third stage, the second charge effect (see FIG. 72 (B)) is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 73 (G), the same blue snowman image as the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and is further added to the character image. In order to inject energy, a production display is performed showing how the snowman image throws a blue star-shaped item at the character image. Then, when developing the rank-up effect to the third stage, the character color change is changed from the character image in which the knees of both feet are blue below to the character image in which both feet are green (corresponding to the third stage). Successful production (see FIGS. 72 (C) and 73 (H)) is performed.

On the other hand, when the rank-up effect is not developed to the third stage, the character color change failure effect (see FIG. 72 (D)) in which the display color of the character image does not change from blue even if the charge effect is performed is performed.

When the rank-up effect is developed from the third stage to the fourth stage, the third charge effect (see FIG. 72 (B)) is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 73 (I), the same green snowman image as the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and is further added to the character image. In order to inject energy, a production display is performed showing how the snowman image throws a green star-shaped item at the character image. Then, when the rank-up effect is developed to the 4th stage, the character image in which both feet are green is changed to the character image in which the characters other than both hands are red (corresponding to the 4th stage). (See FIGS. 72 (C) and 74 (A)).

On the other hand, when the rank-up effect is not developed to the fourth stage, the character color change failure effect (see FIG. 72 (D)) in which the display color of the character image does not change from green even if the charge effect is performed is performed.

When the rank-up effect is developed from the fourth stage to the fifth stage of the upper limit, the fourth charge effect (see FIG. 72 (B)) is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 74 (B), the same red snowman image as the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and is further added to the character image. In order to inject energy, a production display is performed showing how the snowman image throws a red star-shaped item at the character image. Then, when developing the rank-up effect to the fifth stage, the character image that was red except for both hands is changed to a golden character image (corresponding to the fifth stage). (See FIGS. 72 (C) and 74 (C)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the rank-up effect is executed, the character image is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a to start the rank-up effect, and after the start of the rank-up effect, the character A configuration is adopted in which an image is displayed on the second display screen 71a to change the character image. In this way, since the character image is displayed on the first display screen 7a prior to the character image being displayed on the second display screen 71a, it is possible to inform the start of the rank-up effect in an easy-to-understand manner. .. Further, since the movement effect is performed to make the character image move from the first display screen 7a to the second display screen 71a, the line of sight of the player who is gazing at the first display screen 7a is viewed on the second display screen 71a. It is possible to induce to.

Up to this point, the case where the rank-up effect develops to the fifth stage of the upper limit has been described, but in the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the jackpot game is executed according to the development of the rank-up effect to the fifth stage. A configuration is adopted in which the first big chance notice that suggests that there is is executed. Specifically, when the rank-up effect finally develops to the stage of the fourth stage or lower and ends, that is, the display color of the character image finally changes to the color of red or less and the rank-up effect ends. In this case, after the rank-up effect is completed, the first big chance notice may be executed (see FIG. 72 (G)), or the first big chance notice may not be executed.

On the other hand, when the rank-up effect finally develops to the fifth stage and ends, that is, when the display color of the character image finally changes to gold and the rank-up effect ends, the rank-up effect ends. The first big chance notice is always executed after the end of (see FIGS. 72 (C) and 72 (F)). For this reason, when the rank-up effect is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol in which the first big chance notice is not executed, the rank-up effect that finally develops to the fifth stage is not executed. Finally, a rank-up effect that develops only to the 4th stage or lower will be executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the rank-up effect that finally develops to the fifth stage of the upper limit and ends is executed, the first big chance notice is always executed after that. Therefore, when the display color of the character image changes to gold, a countdown effect (see FIG. 72 (E)) that counts down the remaining time until immediately before the start of the first big chance notice is executed. Has been adopted.

Therefore, when the character color change success effect (see FIG. 74 (C)) for changing the display color of the character image to gold is performed, the phrase "until the big chance notice" is displayed from the first display screen 7a to the second display screen. A movement display is performed to make it appear as if it is moving to 71a (see FIGS. 74 (D) to (G)). Then, directly above the icon display area 9e, a white number "4" indicating that the remaining time until the timing immediately before the first big chance notice (see FIG. 74 (I)) is executed is 4 seconds. (See FIG. 74 (D)), and every second after the countdown effect image is displayed, the numbers indicated by the countdown effect image are set to "4", "3", and "2". , "1", and "0" are counted down in this order (see FIGS. 74 (D) to (G)).

In addition, in FIG. 74, since the remaining time from the change of the display color of the character image to gold to the timing immediately before the execution of the first big chance notice is 4 seconds, the numerical value shown by the countdown effect image is shown. An example is the case where the initial value is "4", but since the remaining time from the display color of the character image changing to gold to the timing immediately before the first big chance notice is executed is variable, The initial value of the number shown in the countdown effect image is also variable. That is, for example, the countdown effect may be performed from "5" or the countdown effect may be performed from "3".

In this way, when the countdown effect related to the rank-up effect is performed and the number indicated by the countdown effect image becomes "0", the character image changed to gold moves from the second display screen 71a to the first display screen 7a. A character movement effect (see FIG. 74 (H)) that pretends to be performed is performed. Then, when the golden character image is moved to the central region of the first display screen 7a by this character movement effect, an effect image showing that the character image is full of power is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and at the same time, " The characters "Great Chance" are displayed on the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a (see FIG. 74 (I)), and a predetermined sound effect corresponding to the first great chance notice is output from the speaker 67. ..

This first big chance notice may be executed even if the rank-up effect is not performed, but the countdown effect image related to the rank-up effect is displayed directly above the icon display area 9e on the first display screen 7a. When the countdown effect for counting down the numbers shown in the countdown effect image is executed, the first big chance notice is executed according to the end of the countdown effect.

Even when the display color of the character image finally changes only to red or less, the first big chance notice may be executed, but the first big chance notice may not be executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display color of the character image finally changes only to red or less, even if the first big chance notice is executed, immediately before the first big chance notice is executed. It is decided not to execute the above-mentioned countdown effect based on the timing of.

In this way, if the first big chance notice occurs during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the second big chance notice (see FIG. 67 (M)) will occur after that, or gold will be generated at the end of SPSP reach. Cut-in (see FIG. 70 (C)) may occur. Therefore, when the first big chance notice occurs, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the second big chance notice and the gold cut-in are combined.

Here, referring to FIGS. 73 to 74, the case where the rank-up effect develops step by step has been described as an example, but the rank-up effect can be achieved by one charge effect and the character color change effect. It may develop in multiple stages. For example, when a charge effect (see FIG. 73 (G)) showing a snowball image throwing a blue star-shaped item at the blue character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is performed, both hands are excluded. A character color change success effect (see FIG. 74 (A)) in which a part of the character image changes to red may be performed. Further, for example, when a charge effect (see FIG. 73 (G)) showing a snowball image throwing a blue star-shaped item at the blue character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is performed, the character is displayed. A character color change success effect (see FIG. 74 (C)) in which the entire image changes to gold may be performed.

(Effect of rank-up effect)
According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the character image is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a when the rank-up effect is started, so that the player watching the first display screen 7a It is possible to effectively suppress the problem of not noticing the start of the rank-up effect. Further, since the character image is displayed on the second display screen 71a (instead of the central area of the first display screen 7a) after the start of the rank-up effect, the display area in which the character image is displayed is fixed. It is possible to perform a rank-up production that is rich in variety and highly interesting compared to the case where there is. Further, since the character image is displayed on the second display screen 71a instead of the central area of the first display screen 7a after the start of the rank-up effect, for example, the central area of the first display screen 7a may be used. It is possible to execute the effect of the above, and it is possible to obtain a high effect by the synergistic effect of the rank-up effect and other effects.

Further, in the present embodiment, the character image displayed in the central region of the first display screen 7a is larger than the character image displayed in the second display screen 71a. Therefore, when the sizes of these effect images are the same, or when the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is larger than the character image displayed in the central region of the first display screen 7a. In comparison, it is easier for the player to recognize that the rank-up effect has started, and the player does not notice that the rank-up effect has started, so the original effect of the rank-up effect cannot be obtained. It is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of problems.

In addition, since the first big chance notice is executed when the rank-up effect develops to the fifth stage, it is possible to expect the player to develop the rank-up effect to the upper limit of the fifth stage, and the rank-up effect can be expected. It is possible to obtain a high production effect by the synergistic effect of and the first big chance notice.

(Characteristics of rank-up production)
FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability of various advance notice effects such as the rank-up effect, and FIG. 75 (A) illustrates the features of the rank-up effect. As illustrated in FIG. 75 (A), when a rank-up effect is performed in which the display color of the character image is finally white, the jackpot reliability is about 1%, and the display color of the character image is When the rank-up effect that finally turns blue is performed, the jackpot reliability is about 2%. In addition, when the rank-up effect that the display color of the character image finally turns green is performed, the jackpot reliability is about 4%, and the rank-up effect that the display color of the character image finally turns red is performed. If this is done, the jackpot reliability is about 23%, and if a rank-up effect is performed in which the display color of the character image is finally golden, the jackpot reliability is about 45%.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 75 (A), when a rank-up effect is performed in which the display color of the character image is finally golden, until the timing immediately before the first big chance notice is executed. A countdown effect that counts down the remaining time is performed, while a rank-up effect that the display color of the character image finally becomes red or less is performed, even if the first big chance notice is performed after that. , The above-mentioned countdown effect is not performed.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 75 (A), when a rank-up effect is performed in which the display color of the character image finally becomes red, or a rank-up in which the display color of the character image finally becomes gold. When a production is performed, it has the characteristic that it will surely develop into SPSP reach after that. In other words, only when a variable effect pattern that eventually develops into SPSP reach is set, there is a feature that a rank-up effect is performed in which the display color of the character image is finally red or gold.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 75 (A), when a rank-up effect is performed in which the display color of the character image finally becomes gold, there is a 100% probability that the first big chance notice will be given thereafter. It will occur. This is as described above. On the other hand, if the display color of the character image is finally left white, the probability that the first big chance notice will occur after that is extremely low, and the rank-up effect that the display color of the character image will be finally blue is produced. When performed, the rank-up effect that the display color of the character image finally turns green is performed, and the rank-up effect that the display color of the character image finally turns red is performed. The probability that the first big chance notice will occur later will increase.

That is, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute the first big chance notice (see FIG. 74 (I)), which suggests that the big hit game is relatively likely to be executed. Then, in the rank-up effect, as a character image suggesting that a jackpot game may be executed, a white character image, a blue character image, and a green character image are displayed. There are times when displaying, when displaying a red character image, and when displaying a golden character image, and when the golden character image is displayed, the first big chance notice is most likely to be executed. There is.

(Transformation example related to rank-up production)
The following configuration may be adopted for the rank-up effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, a case where a charge effect for changing the display color of the character image is performed using a snowball image different from the character image has been described as an example, but in another embodiment, for example, the second display screen 71a has been described. A character image (common character image) common to the character image displayed in is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and a charge showing how the common character image moves toward the character image and is integrated with the character image. The display color of the character image may be changed by performing an effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the display color of the character image is changed stepwise has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, the size of the character image is changed stepwise or the shape of the character image is changed. It may be changed step by step. Further, in another embodiment, any two of the display color, size, and shape of the character image may be changed stepwise, or the display color, size, and shape of the character image may be changed. May be changed step by step.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the display color of a part of the character image is changed stepwise has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, the display color of the entire character image is changed stepwise. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the character image is changed stepwise as the stepwise effect image has been described as an example, but the stepwise effect image is not limited to the character image, and for example, a predetermined item is stepwise. You may change it.

(Big hit reliability of each production pattern)
FIG. 75B exemplifies the jackpot reliability when each notice effect is performed independently and the jackpot reliability when each notice effect is combined. As illustrated in FIG. 75 (B), when the first big chance notice is executed alone, the jackpot reliability is about 33%. On the other hand, as also illustrated in FIG. 75 (B), when the first big chance notice is performed after the rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image is finally golden is performed. The jackpot reliability of these two types of notice effects is about 49%, which is higher than the case where the first big chance notice is executed alone.

Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to combine the rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image is finally golden and the first big chance notice, and the synergistic effect of these notice effects is high. It is possible to obtain a directing effect.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a first big chance notice as illustrated in FIG. 75 (B) as a notice effect suggesting that the big hit game is relatively likely to be executed. In addition, there are cases where a second big chance notice is given or a gold cut-in is made, and if the second big chance notice is executed alone, the jackpot reliability is about 58%, and the gold cut-in. When executed alone, its jackpot reliability is about 58%.

On the other hand, when the first big chance notice (see FIG. 67 (E)) and the second big chance notice (see FIG. 67 (M)) are combined within the same fluctuation, the big hit reliability by these two types of notice effects The degree is about 66%, and when the first big chance notice is executed independently (big hit reliability: about 33%) or when the second big chance notice is executed alone (big hit reliability: about 58%). ), The jackpot reliability is higher. Therefore, one of the first big chance notice and the second big chance notice is not executed, but the player can expect that these notice effects are combined, and the first big chance notice and the second big chance notice and It is possible to obtain a high production effect by the synergistic effect of the second big chance notice.

If the result of the first special symbol winning / failing judgment is a big hit, there are three types of notices: the first big chance notice, the second big chance notice, and the gold cut-in during the variable display of the symbol corresponding to this hit / miss judgment. It is possible to combine the notice effects of. On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is a loss, the advance notice effect pattern that combines the above three types of advance notice effects is not set during the variable display of the symbol corresponding to this hit / fail determination. .. That is, when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is a loss, the selection of the advance notice effect pattern in which the above three types of advance notice effects are combined is restricted. Therefore, when the 1st big chance notice and the 2nd big chance notice are combined within the same fluctuation, the jackpot reliability is about 66%, while the 1st big chance notice, the 2nd big chance notice, And when the gold cut-in is compounded within the same fluctuation, the jackpot reliability by these advance notice effects is 100%.

Therefore, when the first big chance notice occurs, it is expected that the second big chance notice will occur, and when these big chance notices occur, it is expected that the gold cut-in will occur. As described above, it is possible to expect the player to combine these three types of advance notice effects, and it is possible to obtain an extremely high effect due to the synergistic effect of these three types of advance notice effects.

[Specific example of the first countdown production]
Next, a specific example of the first countdown effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 77. Here, FIGS. 76 and 77 are screen views showing a specific example of the first countdown effect.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a first countdown effect image showing a predetermined number is displayed on the first display screen 7a during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accuracy and low base state, and the first countdown is displayed. The first countdown effect that counts down the numbers shown in the effect image may be executed. When this first countdown effect is executed, a predetermined first suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot game may be executed is executed according to the end of the first countdown effect.

Hereinafter, a specific example of the first countdown effect will be described by taking as an example the case where the first countdown effect is executed three times during the one-time variation display of the first special symbol in the low accuracy and low base state.

FIG. 76A exemplifies a state in which the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon, and the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the icon is started. Has been done. When a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, the first countdown used for the first countdown effect is displayed in the display area directly above the hold icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a. The effect image is displayed (see FIG. 76 (B)). Since the first countdown effect has not been started, in FIG. 76B, the first countdown effect image showing the characters "waiting" is displayed in the area directly above the hold icon display area 9c. The state displayed in is illustrated.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first countdown effect is executed a plurality of times during the variation display of the first special symbol once, the first countdown effect is to be suggested. A configuration is adopted in which a suggestion image suggesting that the execution of the first countdown is suspended can be displayed on the second display screen 71a, and in FIG. 76B, the execution of the first countdown effect three times is suspended. An example shows a state in which three suggestion images including the characters "waiting" are displayed on the second display screen 71a in order to suggest that the image is waiting.

After the first countdown effect image related to the first first countdown effect is displayed, when the start timing of this first first countdown effect comes, the first countdown effect image showing the characters "waiting" is displayed. , The image changes to the first countdown effect image showing the remaining time until the timing immediately before the first suggestion effect is executed according to the end of the first countdown effect (see FIGS. 76B and 76). Here, since the first first countdown effect has been started, it was displayed on the second display screen 71a in FIGS. 76 (B) and 76 (C) (the first first countdown effect). The state in which the suggestion image (corresponding to) is erased from the second display screen 71a is exemplified.

FIG. 76C exemplifies a state immediately after the suggestion image corresponding to the first countdown effect is erased, but two suggestion images are displayed on the second display screen 71a. Since the state remains as it is, the player can easily recognize that the first countdown effect is performed twice after the first countdown effect is completed.

In addition, in FIG. 76C, the first countdown effect showing the number of “8:51” is shown in order to show that the remaining time until the timing immediately before the first suggestion effect is executed is 8.51 seconds. The state in which the image is displayed is illustrated, but in the present embodiment, this number may be displayed in white or red, and the latter has a higher hit reliability than the former. Has the characteristic of being high.

When the first countdown effect of the first time is started in this way, the number shown by the first countdown effect image decreases with the passage of time, and finally the number of "0:00" is displayed. The state shown is shown (see FIG. 76 (D)). Here, since the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous effect is executed immediately after the first countdown effect is completed (as the first suggestion effect), the number "0:00" shown in the first countdown effect image is displayed. Is switched to the character "NEXT" (see FIGS. 76 (D) and (E)), and when the character "NEXT" is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the pseudo-continuous effect is executed prior to the execution. , The first countdown effect image is erased from the first display screen 7a (see FIGS. 76 (E) and 76 (F)).

Next, when the first countdown effect image is deleted from the first display screen 7a, the left 6 symbols, the right 2 symbols, and the middle 7 symbols are simultaneously pseudo-stopped as illustrated in FIG. 76 (F). A pseudo-continuous production is performed. Then, in order to start the pseudo-second variation effect following the pseudo-first variation effect, the character "x2" suggesting the start of the pseudo-second variation effect is the central region of the first display screen 7a. After being displayed large in, the character "x2" is displayed small in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the scroll display of the three symbol columns is resumed accordingly (FIG. 76 (F). ) And (G)).

When the pseudo-second variable effect is started, the reserved second first countdown effect is immediately started. Therefore, as illustrated in FIGS. 76 (F) and 76 (G), the first countdown effect image showing the number “8:51” is newly added to the area directly above the hold icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a. The suggestion image corresponding to the second first countdown effect displayed on the second display screen 71a is deleted.

In this way, when the second first countdown effect is started with the start of the pseudo second continuous variable effect, the numbers indicated by the first countdown effect image are counted down. Then, for example, at the timing immediately after the reach is established with one symbol, the number indicated by the first countdown effect image becomes "0:00" (see FIG. 76 (H)), and immediately after that, the first countdown effect image is displayed. When the indicated "0:00" number is switched to the "NEXT" character (see FIGS. 76 (H) and (I)) and the "NEXT" character is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the pseudo-ream Prior to the effect being performed, the first countdown effect image is erased from the first display screen 7a (see FIGS. 76 (I) and 77 (A)).

Next, when the first countdown effect image is erased from the first display screen 7a, as illustrated in FIG. 77 (A), the middle between the left 1 symbol and the right 1 symbol that had been pseudo-stopped earlier. 7 A second pseudo-continuous effect is performed in which the symbol is pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 77 (A)). Then, in order to start the pseudo-third variation effect following the pseudo-second variation effect, the character "x3" suggesting the start of the pseudo third station variation effect is the central region of the first display screen 7a. After being displayed large in, the character "x3" is displayed small in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the scroll display of the three symbol columns is resumed accordingly (FIG. 77 (A). ) And (B)).

When the pseudo-third consecutive variable effect is started, the reserved third first countdown effect is immediately started. Therefore, as illustrated in FIGS. 77 (A) and 77 (B), the first countdown effect image showing the number “29:71” is newly displayed in the area directly above the hold icon display area 9c, and is also displayed. The suggestion image corresponding to the third first countdown effect displayed on the second display screen 71a is deleted.

When the third first countdown effect is started with the start of the pseudo-third variable effect in this way, the numbers shown in the first countdown effect image are counted down (see FIG. 77 (C)). .. FIG. 77 (C) exemplifies a state in which a reach is established with three symbols after the pseudo-third consecutive variation effect is started, and the third first countdown effect is executed during the normal short reach. Has been done.

Here, when a variable effect pattern that develops from the normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)) to the first SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)) is set, the first countdown effect image is displayed during the first SP reach. The indicated number reaches "0:00" (see FIG. 77 (D)), and immediately after that, the number "0:00" indicated by the first countdown effect image is switched to the character "SPSP" (FIG. 77 (FIG. 77). D) and (E)). Then, when the characters "SPSP" are displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the first countdown effect image is first displayed before the development gimmick effect for notifying the development to SPSP reach is executed. It is erased from the screen 7a (see FIGS. 77 (E) and 77 (F)). Then, the development gimmick effect described above is executed based on FIGS. 67 (L) and 69 (F) (see FIG. 77 (F)), and when the SPSP reach is developed, the title is displayed at the early stage (FIG. 77). See (G)). FIG. 77 (G) illustrates how the title display suggesting that the character develops into an SPSP reach (X battle) in which the character X battles with the enemy character X. When the SPSP reach is developed in this way, a first effect button operation promotion effect for generating a cut-in (see FIG. 77 (I)) is performed toward the final stage (see FIG. 77 (H)). The first effect button operation promotion effect and cut-in are as described above based on FIGS. 69 (I) and 70 (A) to (C).

(Characteristics of the first countdown production)
FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the characteristics of the first countdown effect. As illustrated in FIG. 78 (A), when the number indicated by the first countdown effect image reaches "0:00", immediately after that, the number "0:00" suggests the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. When switching to the letters "NEXT", when the number "0:00" switches to the letters "SPSP" which suggests the development to SPSP reach, and when the number "0:00" goes to the X battle of SPSP reach. It may switch to the word "final battle" that suggests the development of.

As illustrated in FIG. 78 (A), when the first countdown effect in which the number "0:00" is switched to the character "NEXT" is executed, the jackpot reliability is about 6%. Further, when the first countdown effect in which the number "0:00" is switched to the character "SPSP" is executed, the jackpot reliability is about 30%. Further, when the first countdown effect in which the number "0:00" is switched to the character "final battle" is executed, the jackpot reliability is about 55%.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the case where the first countdown effect suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is executed and the case where the first countdown effect suggesting the development to the SPSP reach is executed. And, there are cases where the first countdown effect that suggests the development of SPSP reach to X battle is executed, and the case where the third first countdown effect is executed has the highest jackpot reliability and the second. When the first countdown effect of is executed, the jackpot reliability is the next highest. Therefore, the player enjoys the game while expecting that the characters "final battle" and "SPSP" are displayed immediately after the number shown in the first countdown effect image reaches "0:00". be able to.

The timing at which these "NEXT" characters, "SPSP" characters, and "final battle" characters are displayed is not particularly limited, but the "NEXT" characters are executed by, for example, the pre-reach pseudo-ren. It is displayed at the timing immediately before it is executed or at the timing immediately before the pseudo-ream is executed after reach. Further, the character "SPSP" may be displayed at various timings such as the timing immediately before the development gimmick effect is executed, the final stage of the normal long reach, the final stage of the first SP reach, and the final stage of the second SP reach. In addition, the characters "final battle" may be displayed, for example, between the time when the development gimmick effect is performed and the time when the SPSP reach is developed.

Up to this point, the first countdown effect that suggests the execution of other notice effects has been explained, but the number "0:00" shown in the first countdown effect image is a big hit such as "opportunity" or "super hot". There is a possibility that the game will be executed, and a first countdown effect that changes to a character indicating the degree of the possibility may be performed. The jackpot reliability of the first countdown effect that finally displays the characters "opportunity" is about 8%, and the jackpot reliability of the first countdown effect that finally displays the characters "super hot" is about 71%. Is. Then, these characters are displayed, for example, at the timing immediately before the development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) is executed, or at a predetermined timing during SPSP reach. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the characters "super hot" are displayed instead of "opportunity" at these timings.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 78 (B), in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first countdown effect is executed once during one variation display of the first special symbol in the low accuracy low base state. There are cases where the first countdown effect is executed twice, and cases where the first countdown effect is executed three times as described above based on FIGS. 76 to 77. The jackpot reliability when the first countdown effect is executed once within the same fluctuation is about 7%, and the jackpot reliability when the first countdown effect is executed twice within the same fluctuation is about 14. %, And the jackpot reliability when the first countdown effect is executed three times within the same fluctuation is about 65%. In addition, when the first countdown effect is executed three times within the same fluctuation, there is a feature that the development to the X battle with the highest jackpot reliability among the four types of SPSP reach becomes rich.

Therefore, when the first countdown effect occurs, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the first countdown effect is generated twice more within the same fluctuation.

Further, as described above based on FIG. 76, by displaying the suggestion image suggesting that the execution of the first countdown effect is suspended on the second display screen 71a, the first countdown effect is not immediately executed. The jackpot reliability is about 20% when two first countdown effects are stocked at the same time, and when three first countdown effects are stocked at the same time (Fig. 76 (B). )) The jackpot reliability is about 69%. And, if three first countdown effects are stocked at the same time, the first countdown effects will be executed three times within the same fluctuation, so even in this case, the development to X battle is rich. become.

(Modification example related to the first countdown effect)
The following configuration may be adopted for the first countdown effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the first countdown effect is suspended, the case where the suggestion image suggesting to that effect is displayed on the second display screen 71a has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, it has been described. , This suggestion image may be displayed on the first display screen 7a. In this case, for example, it is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which a suggestion image is displayed in the area above the icon display area 9e on the first display screen 7a.

Further, in FIGS. 76B and 76C, regarding the first countdown effect of the first time, the first countdown effect image showing the character of "waiting" is displayed, and then the character of "waiting" is changed to "8". The case where the first countdown effect is started after switching to the number of ": 51" was explained as an example, but when the character "waiting" is not displayed and the first countdown effect image is displayed, the first countdown effect is performed. You may want to start immediately.

Further, in FIGS. 76 and 77, the case where the execution of the first countdown effect after the second time is not suspended (the character "waiting" is not displayed) has been described as an example, but the first countdown after the second time has been described. As for the effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the execution of the first countdown effect can be suspended, as in the case of the first countdown effect.

[First specific example of the second countdown effect]
Next, a first specific example of the second countdown effect will be described with reference to FIG. 79. Here, FIG. 79 is a screen view showing a first specific example of the second countdown effect.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a second countdown effect image (see FIG. 79 (B)) showing a predetermined number on the first display screen 7a is displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accuracy and low base state. A second countdown effect that is displayed and counts down the number indicated by the second countdown effect image may be executed. When this second countdown effect is executed, a predetermined second suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot game may be executed is executed according to the end of the second countdown effect.

FIG. 79A exemplifies a state in which the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon, and the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the icon is started. Has been done. When a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, the second countdown effect image used for the second countdown effect is displayed in the central region of the first display screen 7a (FIG. 79). (B)). FIG. 79B exemplifies a state in which a large red “5” number is displayed as an initial value of the number indicated by the second countdown effect.

When the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect is displayed in this way, the numbers indicated by the second countdown effect image decrease by "1" in the order of 4 → 3 → 2 → 1, and finally. Is in a state showing the number "1" (see FIG. 79 (C)). Then, about 1 second after the second countdown effect image showing the number "1" is displayed, the first effect button operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the first effect button 63a is performed (). See FIG. 79 (D)). When the valid period of the first effect button operation promotion effect starts, as illustrated in FIG. 79 (D), the first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a and the remaining time of the effective period are shown. The validity period gauge is displayed.

On the other hand, when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the valid period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, the pseudo second consecutive variable effect is started as the operation corresponding effect corresponding to this button operation. The character "x2" suggesting that is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a, and the character "storm mode" suggesting that the production mode has shifted to the storm mode described later is the first. 3 Displayed on the display screen 72a (see FIG. 79 (E)). Then, as illustrated in FIG. 79 (F), the character "x2" is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the scroll display of the three symbol columns is resumed accordingly. Then, the pseudo-second variation effect is started.

If the first effect button 63a is not operated during the valid period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, the first effect button 63a is operated during the valid period at the timing when the valid period ends. The same effect as in the case of the above (operation corresponding effect exemplified in FIG. 79 (E)) is performed.

[Second specific example of the second countdown effect]
Next, a second specific example of the second countdown effect will be described with reference to FIG. 80. Here, FIG. 80 is a screen view showing a second specific example of the second countdown effect. FIG. 80A exemplifies a state in which the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon, and the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the icon is started. Has been done. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, the second countdown effect image used for the second countdown effect is displayed in the central region of the first display screen 7a (FIG. 80). (B)). The initial value of the number shown in the second countdown effect image is fixed to "5", and FIG. 80 (B) shows a large red number "5" as in FIG. 79 (B). The state in which the second countdown effect image is displayed is exemplified.

When the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect is displayed in this way, the number indicated by the second countdown effect image is "1" as in the first specific example described above based on FIG. 79. It gradually decreases and finally becomes a state showing the number "1" (see FIG. 80 (C)). Then, about 1 second after the second countdown effect image showing the number "1" is displayed, the same first effect button operation promotion effect as in FIG. 79 (D) is performed (FIG. 80 (D). )reference).

On the other hand, when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the valid period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, the second countdown effect is executed again as the operation corresponding effect corresponding to this button operation. The second countdown effect image showing the red number “5” suggesting is displayed in a large size in the central region of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 80 (E)). In this way, when the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect is displayed, the second second countdown effect is performed (see FIGS. 80 (E) to 80 (F)).

After that, the second second countdown effect progresses, and when the number indicated by the second countdown effect image becomes "1", immediately after that, the player is urged to operate the first effect button 63a. The effect button operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 80 (G)).

On the other hand, if the player operates the first effect button 63a during the valid period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, it is suggested that the development destination selection effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect. The characters "roulette chance" are displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 80 (H)), and the same development destination selection effect as described above is performed based on FIG. 69 (D) (FIG. 80). See (I)).

If the first effect button 63a is not operated during the valid period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, the first effect button 63a is operated during the valid period at the timing when the valid period ends. The same effect as in the case of the above (operation corresponding effect exemplified in FIG. 80 (H)) is performed.

[Comparison of countdown effects]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a countdown effect of the rank-up effect (see FIGS. 74 (D) to (G)), a first countdown effect (see FIGS. 76 and 77), and a second countdown effect (FIG. 79, 80) The coincidences and differences will be described. Here, FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the features of various countdown effects.

When comparing the countdown effect of the rank-up effect, the first countdown effect, and the second countdown effect, the following can be said. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, in the countdown effect of the rank-up effect, a number (countdown effect image) indicating the remaining time until the timing immediately before the first big chance notice is executed is the icon display area 9e. It is displayed in the area directly above (see FIG. 74 (D)). On the other hand, in the first countdown effect, a number (first countdown effect image) indicating the remaining time until the timing immediately before the first suggestion effect is executed is displayed in the area directly above the hold icon display area 9c (1st countdown effect image). See FIG. 76 (C)). On the other hand, in the second countdown effect, a number (second countdown effect image) indicating the remaining time until the timing immediately before the second suggestion effect is executed is displayed in the central region of the first display screen 7a (FIG. 79 (FIG. 79). B) See). As described above, when the countdown effect of the rank-up effect, the first countdown effect, and the second countdown effect are compared, there is a feature that the display areas in which the respective countdown effect images are displayed are different from each other.

Further, the following can be said about the number of digits of the numbers shown in the countdown effect images related to each countdown effect. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the number shown in the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect is a one-digit number (see FIGS. 74 (D) to (G)). On the other hand, the number shown by the first countdown effect image related to the first countdown effect is a three-digit or four-digit number (see FIGS. 76 (C) and 77 (B)). On the other hand, the number shown by the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect is a one-digit number like the number shown by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect (see FIG. 79 (B)). .. In this way, when comparing the numbers shown by the countdown effect images related to each countdown effect, the numbers shown by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect and the numbers shown by the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect. Is a one-digit number, whereas only the number shown in the first countdown effect image related to the first countdown effect is different in the number of digits.

In addition, the following can be said about the numerical colors of the numbers shown in the countdown effect images related to each countdown effect. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the numerical color of the numbers shown in the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect is white (see FIG. 74 (D)). On the other hand, the numerical color of the numbers shown in the first countdown effect image related to the first countdown effect is yellow or red (see FIG. 76 (C)). On the other hand, the numerical color of the numbers shown in the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect is the same red as one of the numerical colors shown in the first countdown effect image (see FIG. 79 (B)).

Further, the following can be said about the size of the numbers shown by the countdown effect images related to each countdown effect. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the number shown by the first countdown effect image (see FIG. 76 (B)) is the smallest, and the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect (FIG. 74 (D). ) Is medium in size, and the number shown in the second countdown effect image (see FIG. 79 (B)) is the largest.

Further, the following can be said about the initial values of the numbers shown by the countdown effect images related to each countdown effect. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the initial value of the number shown by the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect is fixed to "5" (FIGS. 79 (B) and 80 (B). ), FIG. 80 (E)). On the other hand, the initial values of the numbers shown by the first countdown effect image related to the first countdown effect are variable (see FIGS. 76 (C) and 77 (B)). Further, the initial value of the number shown by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect is also variable.

Further, the following can be said about the countdown speed of the numbers shown in the countdown effect images related to each countdown effect. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the number shown by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect decreases by "1" per second, and the countdown speed does not change. Further, the number shown by the first countdown effect image related to the first countdown effect also decreases by "1" per second, and the countdown speed does not change. On the other hand, the number shown by the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect may decrease by "1" over 1.3 seconds or decrease by "1" over 0.7 seconds, for example. Its countdown speed is variable.

In addition, the following can be said about the stock function that stocks the countdown effect of each countdown effect. That is, the first countdown effect may be executed twice within the same fluctuation or three times within the same fluctuation, and the first countdown effect suspends the execution of the first countdown effect. There is a function to stock one countdown effect (see FIG. 76 (C)). On the other hand, the countdown effect of the rank-up effect and the second countdown effect do not have the function of suspending the execution of the countdown effect and stocking the countdown effect.

(Effects of each countdown effect)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the above three types of countdown effects are compared, the respective countdown effect images are displayed in different display areas, and when the countdown effects are completed, the suggestions are different from each other. The production can be performed. For this reason, compared to the case where the display area of the countdown effect image is one, or the case where the effect executed according to the end of the countdown effect is one type, the variation of the effect is abundant, and as a result, the interest is enjoyed. It is possible to carry out highly-characteristic production.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the display modes (for example, display position, number of digits, number color, size of numbers) of the countdown effect images related to each countdown effect are different from each other. Therefore, for example, the above three types of countdown effects Even when any two of the countdown effects are executed at the same time, the player can clearly identify these countdown effects. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the problem that the original effect cannot be obtained due to the player not being able to recognize that the two types of countdown effects are being executed at the same time. ..

Further, according to the present embodiment, the speed at which the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect (or the first countdown effect image related to the first countdown effect) is counted down, and the second countdown effect. 2 Countdown effect The speed at which the numbers shown in the image are counted down is different from each other. For this reason, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the production becomes monotonous due to the countdown production being performed many times, and as a result, the interest of the production is lowered.

[About the production mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the effect mode during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accuracy and low base state will be described. Here, FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect mode in the low accuracy and low base state.

As illustrated in FIG. 82, as the effect mode during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accuracy and low base state, a plurality of effect modes including a normal mode, a storm mode, a large storm mode, a rescue zone, and a large chance effect generation zone are included. A production mode is available. In these effect modes, for example, the background image displayed on the first display screen 7a, the type of character displayed on the first display screen 7a, the variable effect sound output from the speaker 67, and the like are different from each other.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect is usually executed in the normal mode during the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol in the low accuracy and low base state. When the first special symbol hit / miss determination is performed, as described above, the process of step S4505 of FIG. 52 for setting the variable effect pattern and the process of step S4506 of FIG. 52 for setting the advance notice effect pattern are performed. Then, based on the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination this time and the result of these processes, whether or not to perform a mode transition effect of shifting the effect mode from the normal mode to another effect mode during the variable display of the effect symbol. In addition, when performing a mode transition effect, it is also determined to which effect mode the effect mode is to be transferred to. Then, based on the determination result related to these effect modes, the effect mode during the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol is controlled.

The normal mode, the storm mode, the large storm mode, the rescue zone, and the large chance production generation zone have the following features. That is, the normal mode is a basic effect mode and is a normal effect mode that does not suggest that there is a possibility of a big hit. On the other hand, the storm mode is an effect mode that suggests that the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed than the normal mode by making the effect mode different from the normal mode, and its jackpot reliability. Is set to about 15%. As illustrated in FIG. 79 (E), this storm mode is an effect mode that shifts with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect.

Note that FIG. 79 (E) illustrates how the effect mode shifts from the normal mode to the storm mode with the execution of the pseudo-ream effect performed at the end of the pseudo-sequential effect. When the normal mode effect is executed until the end of the second variable effect, and the effect mode shifts from the normal mode to the storm mode with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect performed at the end of the pseudo second variable effect. There is also.

In addition, there is a feature that the storm mode may shift to the large storm mode, which is a higher mode (of the storm mode) with higher jackpot reliability than the storm mode. Specifically, for example, as the first pseudo-continuous effect (suggesting the development to the pseudo-second station) is executed at the end of the pseudo-first variable effect, the effect mode is changed from the normal mode. The production mode changes from storm mode to large storm as the second pseudo-continuous production is executed (suggesting the development to the pseudo-third series) at the end of the pseudo-second variable production after shifting to the storm mode. An example is a transition pattern for transitioning to a mode.

This large storm mode is an effect mode that suggests that the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed than the normal mode, and the jackpot reliability is set to about 50%. Similar to the storm mode, this large storm mode is an effect mode in which the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect triggers the transition. There is also a transition pattern that directly shifts to the heavy storm mode without. Specifically, as the first pseudo-continuous production (suggesting the development to the pseudo-second series) is executed at the end of the pseudo-first variable production, the production mode changes from the normal mode to the large storm mode. As the transition pattern shifts to, and the second pseudo-continuous production (suggesting the development to the pseudo-third series) is executed at the end of the pseudo-second pseudo-continuous production, the production mode changes from the normal mode. There is a transition pattern to shift to the great storm mode.

The rescue zone is an effect mode that suggests that the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed than the normal mode, and the jackpot reliability is set to about 25%. In this rescue zone, a transition pattern that shifts from the normal mode as the first pseudo-continuous effect (suggesting the development to the pseudo-second station) is executed at the end of the pseudo-first variable effect, A transition pattern that shifts from the normal mode as the second pseudo-continuous effect (suggesting the development to the pseudo-third station) is executed at the end of the pseudo-second variable effect, during the first SP reach (or A transition pattern or the like for shifting from the normal mode is prepared when a special symbol corresponding to the rescue zone is displayed on the first display screen 7a (during the second SP reach).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a transition pattern is also prepared in which the above special symbol is displayed on the first display screen 7a during the large storm mode, and the transition to the rescue zone is triggered by the display of this special symbol. There is. It should be noted that this rescue zone does not have an effect mode that is a higher mode of the rescue zone like the large storm mode for the storm mode, and is a big hit depending on the display mode of the effect image displayed on the third display screen 72a. It has the characteristic that the reliability changes. Specifically, when the rescue mode is entered, the ally character who supports the own character who battles with the enemy character is displayed on the third display screen 72a, but if the background image of this ally character is red, the jackpot reliability Is about 23%, and when the background image of the ally character is gold, the jackpot reliability is about 50%.

Therefore, the player can enjoy the rescue mode effect while paying attention to the background image of the ally character displayed on the third display screen 72a in addition to the rescue zone effect performed on the first display screen 7a. Is possible.

The big chance effect generation zone is an effect mode that suggests that the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed than the normal mode, and the jackpot reliability is set to about 48%. When entering this big chance production generation zone, there is a feature that it always develops into SPSP reach after that. In other words, there is a feature that the effect mode can shift to the big chance effect generation zone only when a variable effect pattern that develops from another reach effect with relatively low jackpot reliability to SPSP reach is set.

Further, the large chance effect generation zone is an effect mode in which a dedicated stage effect is executed in the large chance effect generation zone that can suggest that the above-mentioned second large chance notice (see FIG. 67 (M)) is executed. There is a feature that when the stage of stage production reaches the upper limit level MAX, the second big chance notice is (always) executed after that. Therefore, when the effect mode shifts to the large chance generation zone, the player can enjoy the stage effect while expecting that the stage of the stage effect reaches the level MAX. A specific example of this staged effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84.

Further, in the large chance effect generation zone, the stage effect is completed even when the frame lamp 66 emits gold light in the middle of the stage effect and the frame flash that outputs a predetermined sound effect from the speaker 67 is generated. There is a feature that the second big chance notice will occur later (always).
That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player shifts to the large chance effect generation zone and the second large chance effect is executed later, the stage effect or the stage effect finally reaches the level MAX. One of the effects in which the frame flash <gold> is generated is executed on the way.

In addition, when the staged production of the large chance effect generation zone is being performed, a 5-digit number indicating the accumulation of points is displayed, and the 5th and 4th digits of this number finally indicate the same number. If it becomes, there is a feature that the hit notification effect is (always) executed after that.

[Specific example of the production of the large chance production generation zone]
Subsequently, a specific example of the production of the large chance production generation zone will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. Here, FIGS. 83 and 84 are screen views showing a specific example of the effect related to the large chance effect generation zone.

FIG. 83A exemplifies a state in which the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon, and the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the icon is started. Has been done. When a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, the same effect symbol is pseudo-stopped in the left column and the right column, and reach is established (see FIG. 83 (B)). .. After that, the first effect button operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the first effect button 63a is performed (see FIG. 83 (C)). During the valid period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, as illustrated in FIG. 83 (C), the first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a and the effective period indicating the remaining time of the valid period are shown. A period gauge and a character "press!" Showing the content of the operation performed by the player on the first effect button 63a are displayed.

On the other hand, when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the valid period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, it is notified that the player enters the large chance effect generation zone as an operation corresponding effect according to the operation. The characters "Great chance effect generation zone" are displayed in large size in the central area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 83 (D)). In addition, when entering the large chance effect generation zone, as described above based on FIG. 82, the effect image constituting the hold icon and the hold icon display area 9c is the first because it always develops into SPSP reach thereafter. 1 It is erased from the display screen 7a (see FIGS. 83 (C) and 83 (D)).

Next, an explanatory effect is performed in which the explanation "Aim for level MAX by pressing and holding the button!" Is displayed on the first display screen 7a, which indicates the content of the mission that the player should perform during the large chance effect generation zone (Fig.). 83 (E)). Then, the first long press effect is performed in the large chance effect generation zone (see FIG. 83 (F)). When the valid period of this first long press effect starts, the third display screen 72a shows a level 1 image indicating that the level of the own character is level 1 and a level 2 of the own character. A level 2 image showing, a level 3 image showing that the level of the own character is level 3, and a level MAX image showing that the level of the own character is level MAX are displayed, and the first long press effect is performed. At the start, since the level of the own character is the initial value level 1, the level 1 image is highlighted as illustrated in FIG. 83 (F).

Further, during the valid period of the first long-pressed effect, as illustrated in FIG. 83 (F), the first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a and the effective period indicating the remaining time of the valid period are shown. From the period gauge, the character "long press!" That indicates the content of the operation that the player should perform on the first effect button 63a, and the five-digit number that increases according to the operation of the first effect button 63a. The configured point image is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 83 (F), the player presses and holds the first effect button 63a during the valid period of the first long press effect, and points are given according to the number of enemy aircraft destroyed by this long press. The state in which 138 points are accumulated is illustrated. Further, in order to suggest that the zone has shifted to the large chance production occurrence zone, the characters "large chance production occurrence zone" are displayed small in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 83 (F)). ).

It should be noted that the numerical value indicated by the point image that increases as the player presses and holds the first effect button 63a and the level 1 image to the level MAX image have the following relationship. That is, when the number indicated by the point image is between "0" and "25000", the level 1 image is highlighted, and when the number indicated by the point image is between "25001" and "50000", the level 2 image is displayed. Is highlighted and the number indicated by the point image is between "50001" and "75000", the level 3 image is highlighted and the number indicated by the point image is between "7501" and "99999". Sometimes there is a relationship that the level MAX image is highlighted.

Next, when the valid period of the first long press effect ends, a result effect for notifying the result of the player's long press operation during this valid period is performed (see FIG. 83 (G)). Specifically, as a result of the player pressing and holding the first effect button 63a during the valid period of the first long press effect, the number indicated by the point image has reached "38000", and this number is level 2. Since the value is between "25001" and "50000" corresponding to, the characters "Level 2 reached!" Are displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a in order to notify that level 2 has been reached. It is displayed in a large size (see FIG. 83 (G)).

In this way, when the result effect for the first long press effect is performed, the second long press effect is performed (see FIG. 83 (H)). During the valid period of this second long-pressed effect, the same effect display as during the valid period of the first long-pressed effect is performed, but here, the first during the valid period of the second long-pressed effect. The point that the number shown in the point image reaches "39138" by further pressing and holding the effect button 63a, and the level of the own character is level 2 according to the long press of the first effect button 63a for the first long press effect. Since the image has reached, the level 2 image is highlighted instead of the level 1 image, and the effect display is different from that during the valid period of the first long press effect (FIG. 83 (Fig. 83). F) and (H)).

Next, when the valid period of the second long press effect ends, a result effect for notifying the result of the player's long press operation during this valid period is performed (see FIG. 83 (I)). Specifically, as a result of the player pressing and holding the first effect button 63a during the valid period of the second long press effect, the number indicated by the point image has reached "64000", and this number is level 3. Since the value is between "50001" and "75000" corresponding to, the characters "Level 3 reached!" Are displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a in order to notify that level 3 has been reached. It is displayed in a large size (see FIG. 83 (I)).

In this way, when the result effect for the second long press effect is performed, the third long press effect is performed (see FIG. 84 (A)). During the valid period of the third long-pressed effect, the same effect display as during the valid period of the second long-pressed effect is performed, but here, the first effect during the valid period of the third long-pressed effect is performed. The point that the number shown in the point image reaches "76328" by further pressing and holding the effect button 63a, and the level of the own character becomes level 3 according to the long press of the first effect button 63a for the second long press effect. Since the level 3 image is highlighted instead of the level 2 image, the effect display is different from that during the valid period of the second long press effect (FIG. 83 (Fig. 83). H) and FIG. 84 (A)).

Next, when the valid period of the third long press effect ends, a result effect for notifying the result of the player's long press operation during this valid period is performed (see FIG. 84 (B)). Specifically, as a result of the player pressing and holding the first effect button 63a during the valid period of the third long press effect, the number indicated by the point image reaches "76328", and this number reaches the level MAX. Since the value is between "7501" and "99999" corresponding to, the characters "Level MAX reached!" Are displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a in order to notify that the level MAX has been reached. It is displayed in a large size (see FIG. 84 (B)).

In this way, when the result effect for the third long press effect is performed, the fourth long press effect is performed (see FIG. 84 (C)). During the valid period of the 4th long press effect, the effect display common to that during the valid period of the 3rd long press effect is performed, but here, the first effect during the valid period of the 4th long press effect is performed. The point that the number shown in the point image reaches "99641" by further pressing and holding the effect button 63a, and the level of the own character is level MAX according to the long press of the first effect button 63a for the third long press effect. Since the level 3 image has been reached, the level MAX image is highlighted instead of the level 3 image, and the effect display is different from that during the valid period of the third long press effect (FIG. 84 (FIG. 84). See A) and (C).

Next, when the valid period of the fourth long-press effect ends, the fifth and fourth digits of the numbers shown in the point image show the same values at this point (see FIG. 84 (C)). At that point, the jackpot is rich.

In addition, it is suggested that the level of the own character has reached the level MAX during the valid period of the 4th long press effect, and the level MAX image is highlighted, so that the second big chance notice will occur. Therefore, the above-mentioned development gimmick effect is performed based on FIG. 69 (F) at the timing when the valid period of the fourth long press effect ends (see FIG. 84 (D)). Then, since the level of the own character has reached the level MAX, the above-mentioned second big chance notice is executed based on FIG. 69 (G) following the development gimmick production (see FIG. 84 (E)). ..

After that, in the early stage of SPSP reach, a title is displayed to inform that the SPSP reach has developed (see FIG. 84 (F)), and when the end of SPSP reach is approached, the cut-in of FIG. 84 (H) occurs. The first effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 84 (G)) for causing the effect is performed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the production of the large chance production generation zone, a stage production that can be gradually developed from 4 stages to any of 4 stages or less is executed, and the upper limit is executed. It is possible to foretell that the second big chance notice will be executed after that by executing the stage effect that develops to the four stages of (the level of the own character reaches the level MAX). If the second big chance notice is executed later, the stage effect that develops to the upper limit of four stages and ends is executed, while if the second big chance notice is not executed later, the four stages are executed. The stage production that develops to less than the stage and ends will be executed.

In addition, since this big chance production generation zone is a production mode with extremely high jackpot reliability of about 48%, it is assumed that the player has finally performed a stage production that develops to less than 4 stages. However, it is possible to enjoy the game without lowering the expectation that the hit notification effect will be executed.

(Effects of the production of the large chance production zone)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the large chance effect generation zone is an effect mode suggesting that the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed than the normal mode, and the large chance effect generation zone. Depending on the stage production performed in, it may be announced that the second big chance notice will be executed. For this reason, it is possible not only to raise the player's expectation for the big hit but also to raise the expectation that the second big chance notice will occur by executing the production in the big chance production generation zone. As a result, it is possible to obtain a high effect.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the stage effect that develops to the fourth stage and ends in the large chance effect generation zone is executed, the second big chance effect notice is (always) executed. Therefore, the player who expects the second big chance notice to be executed can be expected to develop the stage production to the fourth stage, and the synergistic effect of the stage production and the second big chance notice can be made. It is possible to obtain a high production effect.

[About group notice]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a "group notice" as a possibility suggestion effect that a jackpot game may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state. A notice effect called may be executed. This group notice is a movement effect in which a plurality of characters move in a predetermined direction on the first display screen 7a, and along with this movement effect, a predetermined effect sound for producing the movement of the plurality of characters is output from the speaker 67. Will be done.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the above group notice, a large number of first group notices (see FIG. 85) in which a large number of first characters move to the left on the first display screen 7a and a large number of first characters are used. It is possible to execute the second group notice (see FIG. 87) in which the two characters move to the right on the first display screen 7a.

<Specific example of Group 1 notice>
Hereinafter, a specific example of the first group notice will be described with reference to FIG. 85. Here, FIG. 85 is a screen view showing a specific example of the first group notice. In FIG. 85A, the variation of the first special symbol corresponding to the green icon is displayed in the state where the icon (green icon) whose display color is green is displayed in the icon display area 9e on the first display screen 7a. The state immediately after the second pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-reach before reach) is executed during the display and the pseudo-third-series variable effect is started is illustrated. In this way, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the pseudo-third consecutive variation effect, the left symbol (for example, three symbols) first pseudo-stops in the left column (see FIG. 85 (B)), and then the left. The same right symbol as the symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is pseudo-stopped and reach is established (see FIG. 85 (C)).

Immediately after the reach is established in this way, the first group notice is given (see FIGS. 85 (D) to (F) and FIGS. 85 (G) to (I)). Specifically, an effect display showing how a large number of first characters appear from the right end of the first display screen 7a and run away to the left end is performed, and a first group notice that directs the movement of a plurality of first characters is performed. Sound is output from the speaker 67.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 85 (D) to (F), the icon for the icon is targeted between the start and the end of the first group notice. When the change effect is not performed, and as illustrated in FIGS. 85 (G) to (I), the icon change effect targeting the icon is performed between the start and the end of the first group notice. It may be done. In other words, the display mode of the icon may or may not change during the first group notice.

<About icon change production>
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a game ball at the first starting port 20 in a situation where it is not possible to immediately start the special symbol hit / miss determination and the special symbol variation display such as during the special symbol variation display or the big hit game. If a prize is won, the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is correct is reserved up to a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment). Then, when the right of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is reserved in this way, the same number of holding icons as the number of holdings of the first special symbol winning / failing determination are displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. In each screen view of FIG. 85, a state in which one hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is exemplified in order to suggest that the number of holds for the first special symbol winning / failing determination is “1”. There is.

By the way, the hold icon is usually displayed as a white and circular hold icon (see, for example, FIG. 85 (A)). On the other hand, when the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, the icon change effect in which the display mode of the hold icon (for example, the color and / or shape of the hold icon) changes. May be done.

FIG. 86 exemplifies the type of the hold icon and the icon that can be the icon, the display mode of the icon, and the jackpot reliability of each icon. When the icon change effect for the hold icon is performed, for example, the white hold icon (white icon) is the blue hold icon (blue icon), the green hold icon (green icon), and the red hold icon (red hold icon). It changes to a hold icon with a display color that suggests jackpot reliability, such as a red hold icon (red icon), a golden hold icon (gold icon), and a rainbow-colored hold icon (rainbow icon). In this embodiment, the white icon does not indicate the jackpot reliability, the jackpot reliability of the blue icon is set to about 1%, the jackpot reliability of the green icon is set to about 5%, and the jackpot reliability of the red icon is set. The reliability is set to about 30%, the jackpot reliability of the gold icon is set to about 75%, and the jackpot reliability of the rainbow icon is set to 100%.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the icon change effect for changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed only once for the hold icon 1 determined to execute the icon change effect. In addition, the icon change effect that changes the display mode of the hold icon may be performed a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, when the hold icon 1 which is the target of the icon change effect is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, the icon change effect in which the hold icon changes from the white icon to the blue icon is performed. After that, the hold icon may change from a blue icon to a red icon, and the icon change effect may be performed a plurality of times for one hold icon. In addition, when the hold icon starts to be displayed as an icon other than the white icon (for example, a blue icon) from the beginning, or the hold icon that starts to be displayed as an icon other than the white icon is targeted, the icon change effect is performed once or multiple times. It may be said.

Further, when the hold icon shifted from the hold icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e is displayed as the icon in the icon display area 9e, the icon change effect in which the display mode of the icon changes is 1 or It may be done multiple times. Here, when the hold icon and the icon are compared with respect to the icon change effect, the two have the following matching points / differences. That is, there is a coincidence that the hold icon and the icon can all be changed to the blue icon, the green icon, the red icon, the gold icon, and the rainbow icon exemplified in FIG. 86. On the other hand, the icon can change to the green flight icon, the red flight icon, the gold flight icon, and the rainbow flight icon exemplified in FIG. 86, while the hold icon changes to these flight icons. There is a difference between the two in that they do not get.

Here, the flight icon is an icon that imitates a vehicle that can fly, the green flight icon is a green icon that imitates a helicopter, the red flight icon is a red icon that imitates a propeller plane, and the gold flight icon is large. The golden icon that imitates a passenger plane and the rainbow flight icon are rainbow-colored icons that imitate a spaceship. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the green flight icon is set to about 25%, the jackpot reliability of the red flight icon is set to about 55%, and the jackpot reliability of the gold flight icon is set to about 78%. The jackpot reliability of the rainbow flight icon is set to 100%.

As is clear from the explanation so far, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the icon change effect for the icon, for example, the icon change effect in which the icon changes from the white icon to the green icon, the icon. May be performed with an icon change effect in which the blue icon changes to a green icon, an icon change effect in which the icon changes from a green icon to a rainbow icon, and an icon change effect in which the icon changes from a blue icon to a gold icon. Further, the icon is initially displayed as an icon that is not a flying icon when it begins to be displayed in the icon display area 9e, and as an icon change effect targeting the icon, for example, the icon is changed from a green icon. An icon change effect that changes to a green flight icon, an icon change effect that changes the icon from a red icon to a red flight icon, and an icon change effect that changes the icon from a red flight icon to a gold flight icon are performed.

When the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, the hold icon is targeted and the icon change effect is performed one or more times, and the hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 9e and used as the icon. An icon change effect is performed in both the hold icon display area 9c and the icon display area 9e for one icon, such that the icon change effect is performed once or multiple times for the icon when it is displayed. May be done.

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (N)), which is a highly reliable reach effect, is used to notify the winner, the second effect button operation promotion effect is produced at the end of the SPSP reach. (See FIG. 70). The normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)), the normal long reach (see FIG. 67 (H)), and the first SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)), which are less reliable reach effects than the SPSP reach. , When notifying a hit by any of the second SP reach (see FIG. 67 (J)), a configuration is also adopted in which a hit notification effect is executed regardless of the operation of the second effect button 63b by the player. ing.

Then, as a result of performing the icon change effect targeting the icon on the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the icon is any of a green flight icon, a red flight icon, a gold flight icon, and a rainbow flight icon. Further configuration that when the flight icon changes to the flight icon, the button image change effect (see FIGS. 89 and 90) in which the flight icon changes to the second effect button image used for the second effect button operation promotion effect is performed. Has been adopted.

Therefore, by changing the icon to one of the four types of flight icons exemplified in FIG. 86 during the variable display of the first special symbol, it finally develops into SPSP reach and the winner is notified. It is possible for the player to recognize that the game is to be played, and it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the jackpot.

On the other hand, if the icon change effect of changing the hold icon to one of the above four types of flight icons is performed, the reach effect finally becomes SPSP reach during the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon. Since the player can recognize the flow of reach production such as development from a fairly early stage, there is a possibility that the interest of reach production will be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to avoid such a problem, a configuration is adopted in which the icon can be changed to a flying icon, while the hold icon cannot be changed to a flying icon. ing.

(About pre-judgment processing)
Next, the pre-determination process for realizing the icon change effect for the icon (hold icon or the icon) will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first special symbol winning / failing determination is suspended, it is determined in advance whether or not to execute the jackpot game prior to the first special symbol winning / failing determination. Judgment processing may be performed. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct according to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 20, and the first random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is used. Whether the same hit / fail judgment process is performed prior to the first special symbol hit / fail judgment process performed at the start of the change of the special symbol, and if the first special symbol hit / fail judgment process is executed, it is judged as a "big hit". Determine in advance whether or not. Further, based on the variation pattern random number acquired together with the random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, it is determined in advance which variation pattern will be selected when the first special symbol accuracy determination is executed.

In this way, when the game control microcomputer 81 performs the pre-judgment process in response to the reservation of the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is correct, the special figure 1 start-in ball command including the pre-judgment result is subordinated. It is transmitted to the control board 90. On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not to execute the above-mentioned icon change effect based on the preliminary determination result and the like included in the special figure 1 start entry command. do. Then, when it is decided to execute the icon change effect, it is determined in what change pattern the display mode of the icon (holding icon or the icon) is changed, and the icon change effect based on the decision result is performed on the image control board 100. To execute.

(About the icon change production accompanying the first group notice)
When it is decided to execute the icon change effect for the icon, a change pattern for changing the display mode of the icon may be determined immediately after the reach is established. Specifically, for example, a change pattern for changing the green icon displayed as the icon in the icon display area 9e to a gold icon immediately after the reach is established may be determined. On the other hand, when the notice effect pattern for giving the first group notice is set by the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 52) of step S4506 performed at the start of the change of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon. There is.

In this way, the execution of the icon change effect of the change pattern that changes the icon from the green icon to the gold icon immediately after the reach is established is instructed, and the advance notice in the advance notice effect pattern that executes the first group notice immediately after the reach is established. When the variable effect start command instructing the execution of the effect is transmitted to the image control board 100, the icon changes from the green icon to the gold icon during the period from the start to the end of the first group notice immediately after the reach is established. (See FIGS. 85 (G) to (I)).

On the other hand, immediately after the reach is established, the execution of the icon change effect that changes the icon from the green icon to another icon is not instructed, and the first group notice is executed immediately after the reach is established. When the variable effect start command instructing is transmitted to the image control board 100, the first group notice is performed immediately after the reach is established, without the icon change effect of the icon (FIG. 85 (D)). ~ (F)).

Up to this point, the case where the first group notice is given immediately after the reach is established has been described as an example, but the second group notice may be given immediately after the reach is established.

<Specific example of the second group notice>
Hereinafter, a specific example of the second group notice will be described with reference to FIG. 87. Here, FIG. 87 is a screen view showing a specific example of the second group notice. In FIG. 87 (A), the above-mentioned development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) is performed with the red icon displayed as the icon in the icon display area 9e on the first display screen 7a. The situation is illustrated. When this development gimmick production is performed, the player is expected to generate the above-mentioned second big chance notice (see FIGS. 67 (M) and 69 (G)), so that the background image in black is reached. A blackout effect is performed in which only the symbols (for example, 5 symbols on the left and 5 symbols on the right) and the icon concerned are displayed and other effect images are hidden (see FIG. 87 (B)).

When this blackout effect is performed, the second big chance notice may be given subsequently, but if the second big chance notice is not made, following the blackout effect, a battle with the enemy character in SPSP reach is performed. An effect display showing the appearance of the own character is performed (see FIG. 87 (C)).

Immediately after the production of the appearance of the own character is performed, the second group notice is performed (see FIGS. 87 (D) to (F) and FIGS. 87 (G) to (I)). Specifically, an effect display showing how a large number of second characters appear from the left end of the first display screen 7a and run away to the right end is performed, and a second group notice that directs the movement of a plurality of second characters is performed. Sound is output from the speaker 67.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 87 (D) to 87 (F), the icon for the icon is targeted between the start and the end of the second group notice. When the change effect is not performed, and as illustrated in FIGS. 87 (G) to (I), the icon change effect targeting the icon is performed between the start and the end of the second group notice. It may be done. In other words, the display mode of the icon may or may not change during the second group notice. It should be noted that FIGS. 87 (G) to 87 (I) illustrate how the icon changes from the red icon to the gold flight icon during the second group notice.

In this way, the group notice may be given not only immediately after the reach is established but also immediately before the SPSP reach is started. Further, based on FIG. 87, the case where the second group notice is given immediately before the start of SPSP reach has been described as an example, but the first group notice may be given immediately before the start of SPSP reach. Further, the group notice can be executed not only after the reach is established or immediately before the SPSP reach is started, but also immediately before the first SP reach is started or immediately before the second SP reach is started, for example. However, multiple group notices will not be given within the same fluctuation.

(Characteristics regarding group notice)
As is clear from the above description based on FIGS. 85 to 87, the effect control microcomputer 91 changes the display mode of the icon to the first display mode as the group notice is executed during the display of the icon. It is possible to change from the second display mode (suggesting that the possibility that the jackpot game is executed is higher than that of the first display mode).

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 85 (D) to (F), the display mode of the icon does not change during the first group notice, whereas in the examples shown in FIGS. 85 (G) to (I), the display mode does not change. , The icon has changed from a green icon (big hit reliability: about 5%) to a gold icon (big hit reliability: about 75%) during the first group notice. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 87 (D) to (F), the display mode of the icon does not change during the second group notice, whereas in the examples shown in FIGS. 87 (G) to (I), the display mode does not change. , The icon has changed from the red icon (big hit reliability: about 30%) to the gold flight icon (big hit reliability: about 78%) during the second group notice.

As is clear from these facts, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the icon changes from the first display mode to the second display mode in accordance with the first group notice (or the second group notice). The first case (see FIGS. 85 (G) to (I) and 87 (G) to (I)) and the second case (FIG. 85 (D) to (F), FIG. 87 (D)) do not change. ~ (F)), and the first case has a higher probability that the jackpot game will be executed than the second case.

(Big hit reliability of group notice)
Next, the jackpot reliability of the group notice will be described with reference to FIG. 88. Here, FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot reliability of each group notice. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of executing four types of group notices exemplified in FIG. 88. Here, the first group notice is the first group notice (see FIG. 85) in which a large number of first characters appear, and the jackpot reliability is set to about 45%. The second group notice is the second group notice (see FIG. 87) in which a large number of second characters (different from the first character) appear, and in the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is the first group notice. It is set to about 45%, which is the same as.

In the third group notice (third group notice), immediately after a large number of first characters move to the left, a special character (for example, own character) moves in the same direction so as to follow these first characters. It is a group notice that a moving effect display is performed. That is, the first group notice is a group notice of an effect pattern in which the first character is included in the plurality of characters but the own character is not included, whereas the third group notice is the first in the plurality of characters. The two differ in that they are a group notice of a production pattern that includes both the character and the own character. The jackpot reliability of the third group notice is set to 100% in this embodiment.

In the fourth group notice (fourth group notice), immediately after a large number of second characters move to the right, a special character (for example, their own character) moves in the same direction so as to follow these second characters. It is a group notice that a moving effect display is performed. That is, the second group notice is a group notice of the effect pattern in which the second character is included in the plurality of characters but the own character is not included, whereas the fourth group notice is the second group notice in the plurality of characters. The two differ in that they are a group notice of a production pattern that includes both the character and the own character. The jackpot reliability of the 4th group notice is set to 100% in this embodiment.

As described above, it is clear from the fact that the jackpot reliability of the first group notice and the second group notice is set to about 45%, and the jackpot reliability of the third group notice and the fourth group notice is set to 100%. As described above, when it is determined by the game control microcomputer 81 that the jackpot game is to be executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 can execute four types of group notices, that is, the first group notice to the fourth group notice. On the other hand, when it is determined by the game control microcomputer 81 that the jackpot game is not executed by the effect control microcomputer 91, the first group notice and the second group notice can be executed, but the third group notice is possible. It is not possible to execute the group notice and the group 4 notice.

Such group notice execution control can be realized by, for example, the following configuration. The ROM constituting the effect control microcomputer 91 stores a group notice execution decision table for deciding whether or not to execute the group notice. In this group advance notice execution determination table, random numbers are associated with each of the jackpot and the loss, and more random values are associated with the jackpot than with the loss. Further, the ROM constituting the effect control microcomputer 91 stores a hit group notice selection table and a loss group notice selection table for selecting the type when it is determined to execute the group notice. In the winning group notice selection table, a random number value is associated with each of the four types of group notices of the first group notice to the fourth group notice. On the other hand, in the group notice selection table for loss, random values are not associated with the 3rd group notice and the 4th group notice among the 1st group notice to the 4th group notice, and the 1st group notice and the 2nd group notice are not associated with each other. A random value is associated with the group notice.

The effect control microcomputer 91 uses a group notice execution decision random number for determining whether or not to execute the group notice while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is running, and a group notice selection for selecting the type of the group notice. Random number update processing for updating various effect random numbers for determining an effect pattern such as a random number is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle. When the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the fluctuation start command related to the first special symbol hit / miss determination, the fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 80 with respect to the group advance notice execution determination random number that is appropriately updated by the random number update process. The count value of is acquired as a group advance notice execution decision random number. Similarly, with respect to the group advance notice selection random number that is appropriately updated by the random number update process, the count value at the time when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 80 is acquired as the group advance notice selection random number.

Next, when the received fluctuation start command includes information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination is "big hit", the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the group advance notice execution acquired. It is determined whether or not to execute the group notice based on whether or not the random number matches any of the random number values associated with the jackpot in the group notice execution decision table. On the other hand, when the received fluctuation start command contains information indicating that the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment is "missing", the acquired group notice execution decision random number is the group notice execution decision table. In, it is determined whether or not to execute the group notice based on whether or not it matches any of the random number values associated with the loss.

When the effect control microcomputer 91 includes information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination is "big hit" in the received fluctuation start command, and determines that the group notice is executed. , The group notice selection random number acquired when the fluctuation start command is received is the random number value associated with which group notice of the 1st group notice to the 4th group notice specified in the winning group notice selection table. One of the group notices of the first group notice and the fourth group notice is selected based on whether they match. On the other hand, if the received fluctuation start command contains information indicating that the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" and it is decided to execute the group notice, the fluctuation start command is received. Based on which group notice of the first group notice to the second group notice specified in the group notice selection table for loss matches the random number value associated with the group notice selection random number acquired at the time. Select Group 1 Notice or Group 2 Notice.

As is clear from the explanation so far, in the hit group notice selection table referred to when the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "big hit", the first group notice to the fourth group notice Since a random number value is associated with each, it is possible to execute any group notice of the first group notice to the fourth group notice. On the other hand, in the group notice selection table for loss referred to when the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "miss", the random value is associated with the first group notice and the second group notice. However, the random value is not associated with the 3rd group notice and the 4th group notice. Therefore, when the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment this time is "missing", the first group notice or the second group notice can be executed, while the third group notice and the fourth group notice can be executed. Execution of notice is restricted.

In this way, the 3rd group notice and the 4th group notice can be selected when the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment this time is "big hit", while it is selected when it is "missing". Therefore, when the 3rd group notice or the 4th group notice appears, the jackpot becomes rich.

(Effect of action by group notice)
According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the group notice is executed, an icon change effect that changes the display mode of the icon from the first display mode to the second display mode may be executed. .. Therefore, the synergistic effect of the group notice and the icon change effect targeting the icon can effectively improve the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and as a result, it is possible to effectively improve the expectation of the player. A high production effect can be obtained.

When the first group notice is executed (for example, see FIG. 85), the icon changes from a green icon (big hit reliability: about 5%) to a gold icon (big hit reliability: about 75%) during the first group notice. When the icon changes to, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed than when the icon does not change from the green icon during the first group notice. In addition, when the second group notice is executed (for example, see FIG. 87), the icon changes from the red icon (big hit reliability: about 30%) to the gold flight icon (big hit reliability: about 78%) during the second group notice. ) Is easier to execute the jackpot game than the case where the icon does not change from the red icon during the second group notice. In this way, when the display mode of the icon changes with the group notice, it is easier to execute the jackpot game than when it does not change, and by executing the group notice, the player pays attention to the icon. Since it is possible to make the icon change, it is possible to obtain a higher effect than when the icon change effect targeting the icon is executed regardless of the group notice.

Further, while the 1st group notice and the 2nd group notice can be executed regardless of the judgment result of the 1st special symbol hit / miss judgment, the 3rd group notice and the 4th group notice are the 1st special symbol hit / miss. It can be executed only when the judgment result of the judgment is a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to execute the 3rd group notice and the 4th group notice rather than the 1st group notice and the 2nd group notice, and the 1st group notice and the 2nd group notice can be expected as the group notice. Compared to the case where only the group notice is prepared, it is possible to execute the group notice with abundant variations of the production and more interesting.

(Modified example of group notice)
The following configuration may be adopted for the group notice.
That is, in the present embodiment, the case where the group notice can be executed at various timings after the reach is established during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low probability and low base state has been described, but in other embodiments, the group notice can be executed. A configuration may be adopted in which a group notice can be executed before the reach is established during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the display mode of the icon is changed between the start and the end of the group notice has been described. For example, the display mode of the icon is changed immediately before the start of the group notice. Change, change the display mode of the icon at the same time as the start of the group notice, change the display mode of the icon at the same time as the end of the group notice, or change the display mode of the icon immediately after the end of the group notice. You may let it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the icon can be changed to a flight icon while the hold icon cannot be changed to a flight icon has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, the hold icon is changed to a flight icon. A configuration may be adopted in which the icon change effect to be changed can be executed.

Further, here, the case where the possibility suggestion effect is a group notice has been described as an example, but the possibility suggestion effect is other than the group notice if it is an effect suggesting that the jackpot game may be executed. It may be a production of. That is, the possibility suggestion effect may be, for example, a first big chance notice (see FIG. 74 (I)) or a second big chance notice (see FIG. 69 (G)). In this case, it is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the display mode of the icon is changed during the first big chance notice, or the display mode of the icon is changed during the second big chance notice. .. Further, the possibility suggestion effect may be SPSP reach, which is a reach effect with high reliability. In this case, it is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the display mode of the icon is changed during SPSP reach. Further, the possibility suggestion effect may be a pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 79 (E)) suggesting a transition to the storm mode, or the display mode of the icon may be changed according to this pseudo-continuous effect. good. Further, the possibility suggestion effect may be a notification effect (see FIG. 83 (D)) for notifying the entry into the large chance effect generation zone, or the display mode of the icon may be changed during this notification effect. good.

[About button image change effect]
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment develops into SPSP reach, which is a highly reliable reach effect, and when the final stage of SPSP reach is approached, the first effect button operation promotion effect (FIG. 69 (I). ) Is performed, and when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the valid period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, a cut-in (see FIGS. 70 (A) to 70 (C)) occurs. After that, the second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIGS. 70 (D) to (F)) is performed, and the player presses the second effect button 63b during the valid period of the second effect button operation promotion effect. When operated, a hit notification effect or a loss notification effect is performed.

As is clear from the notation of FIGS. 69 (H) to 69 (I) and the notation of FIG. 70, when the start timing of the second effect button operation promotion effect is reached while the icon that is not the flight icon is displayed. With the icon displayed, the operation promotion image related to the second effect button operation promotion effect is displayed on the first display screen 7a regardless of the icon. Specifically, the operation promotion image here is a second effect button image imitating the second effect button 63b, a character indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b "press!", And the remaining time of the valid period. It is a validity period gauge indicating.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the icon has changed to a flying icon by the time the second effect button operation promotion effect at the end of the SPSP reach is started, the icon is displayed. There is a feature that a button image change effect is performed in which the icon display area 9e is moved to change the operation of the second effect button 63b into an operation promotion image that prompts the player (see FIGS. 89 and 90).

<First specific example of button image change effect>
FIG. 89 is a screen view showing a first specific example of the button image change effect. In FIG. 89 (A), a title display suggesting that the own character develops into an SPSP reach (C battle) in which the own character battles with the enemy character C while the gold flight icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e is displayed. The state of being broken is illustrated. When the end of the SPSP reach is approached after the SPSP reach is started in this way, the above-mentioned first effect button operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 89 (B)). Specifically, with the gold flight icon displayed in the icon display area 9e, the first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a and the rest of the valid period in which the operation of the first effect button 63a is valid. A validity period gauge indicating the time is displayed.

When this first effect button operation promotion effect is performed, at the timing when the first effect button 63a is operated during the valid period, or at the timing when the valid period ends without operating the first effect button 63a. A cut-in occurs (see FIG. 89 (C)). FIG. 89 (C) illustrates a state in which gold cut-in is performed using the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a, and the icon display area 9e is illustrated. The icon displayed in the above and the cut-in generated in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a with respect to the effect of promoting the operation of the first effect button have the following relationship.

That is, if the icon has changed to a red flight icon or a gold flight icon before developing into SPSP reach, the red cut-in is performed in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first effect button operation promotion effect. Or there is a relationship that a gold cut-in occurs and a green cut-in does not occur. As described above based on FIG. 86, in the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the red flight icon is set to about 55%, and the jackpot reliability of the gold flight icon is set to about 78%. On the other hand, the jackpot reliability of the green cut-in is set to about 7% (see Fig. 71), and if the green cut-in is generated while the red flight icon or the gold flight icon is displayed, Not only does it significantly reduce the player's expectation of a big hit, but it may also significantly reduce the effect of displaying a red flight icon or a gold flight icon as the icon. Further, these may lead to a decrease in the motivation of the player who operates the second effect button 63b for the second effect button operation promotion effect performed after the cut-in. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the icon is changed to the red flight icon or the gold flight icon before the development of SPSP reach, the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first effect button operation promotion effect is performed. , The above configuration of generating a cut-in of red or more (not generating a green cut-in) is adopted.

On the other hand, if the icon has changed to a rainbow flight icon (with a jackpot reliability of 100%) before the development of SPSP reach, the jackpot will be rich when the rainbow flight icon is displayed. A green cut-in, a red cut-in, or a gold cut-in is generated according to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the button operation promotion effect.

In addition, when the SPSP reach is developed with the icon different from the flight icon displayed, a red cut-in or a gold cut-in is made according to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first effect button operation promotion effect. If it occurs, there is a relationship that the icon changes to a flight icon higher than the red flight icon after that. That is, for example, a red cut-in (big hit reliability: about 56%) with a green icon (big hit reliability: about 5%) and a red icon (big hit reliability: about 30%) displayed as the icon. When a gold cut-in (big hit reliability: about 81%) occurs, an icon change effect is performed in which the icon changes to a flight icon other than the green flight icon after the cut-in occurs. This will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 90.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 89, when a gold cut-in (or a red cut-in) occurs with the gold flight icon displayed as the icon, prior to the second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 89 (H)). , Button image change effect is performed (see FIGS. 89 (D) to (H)). Specifically, the effect showing that the gold flight icon moves to the right from the icon display area 9e and then turns in the sky, and the gold flight icon moves to the center of the first display screen 7a. The display is performed (see FIGS. 89 (D) to (F)). Then, when the gold flight icon moves to the center of the screen of the first display screen 7a, an effect display (transformation action) showing how the gold flight icon is split into two and transformed into a second effect button image is performed. Here, the button image change effect in which the gold flight icon changes to the second effect button image has been described as an example, but when the green flight icon, the red flight icon, or the rainbow flight icon is displayed as the icon. Also, the same button image change effect is performed.

By the way, when the button image change effect of moving the flight icon from the icon display area 9e is performed, the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is hidden, and as a result, the button image change effect is performed. After that, there may be a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the display color of the icon. Therefore, in this embodiment, the following configuration is adopted in order to prevent this problem from occurring.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the flight icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e prior to the second effect button operation promotion effect, the operation promotion image related to the second effect button operation promotion effect. The second effect button image constituting the above and the character indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b, "press!", Are displayed in the same color as the flight icon. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 89, when the gold flight icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e prior to the second effect button operation promotion effect, when the transformation action of the gold flight icon is completed, the gold color is obtained. The second effect button image of No. 1 and the golden character "Press!" Are displayed (see FIG. 89 (H)).

If the color of the validity period gauge related to the second effect button operation promotion effect is changed according to the color of the flight icon, the visibility of the validity period gauge deteriorates in relation to the display color of the background image. As a result, the player may not be able to accurately grasp the remaining time of the valid period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the second effect button image and the characters indicating the operation contents are displayed in the same color as the flight icon, while the validity period gauge has a predetermined color (for example, white) regardless of the display color of the flight icon. It is supposed to be displayed using.

In this way, the operation promotion image related to the second effect button operation promotion effect is displayed (see FIG. 89 (H)), and when the second effect button 63b is operated within the valid period, the winning notification effect is performed. (See FIG. 89 (see FIG. 89 (I)). Specifically, a hit notification effect in which three effect symbols forming doublets are pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped, or three effect symbols forming reach lost eyes. A loss notification effect is performed to make a pseudo stop and then make a final stop.

<Second specific example of button image change effect>
FIG. 90 is a screen view showing a second specific example of the button image change effect. In FIG. 89, the case where the flight icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e before the development of SPSP reach has been described as an example, but here, the state in which the icon (for example, a red icon) different from the flight icon is displayed is displayed. The button image change effect performed when the SPSP reach is developed will be described.

In FIG. 90 (A), a title is displayed suggesting that the character develops into an SPSP reach (B battle) in which the own character battles with the enemy character B while the red icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e. The situation is illustrated. When the end of the SPSP reach is approached after the start of the SPSP reach in this way, the first effect button operation promotion effect is performed in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 89 (B) (see FIG. 90 (B)). ).

When this first effect button operation promotion effect is performed, at the timing when the first effect button 63a is operated during the valid period, or at the timing when the valid period ends without operating the first effect button 63a. A cut-in occurs (see FIG. 90 (C)). FIG. 90C illustrates a state in which a red cut-in is performed using the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a.

By the way, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment develops into SPSP reach in a state where the icon different from the flight icon is displayed, and the first effect button 63a for the first effect button operation promotion effect. When a red cut-in or a gold cut-in occurs according to the operation of, the icon is changed to a flight icon higher than the red flight icon after that. Therefore, when a red cut-in (or gold cut-in) occurs in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a, immediately after that, an icon change effect of changing the icon from an icon other than the flight icon to a flight icon is performed. .. Specifically, for example, as illustrated in FIGS. 90 (D) to 90 (E), a lightning strike directly hits the red icon as the icon, and the energy causes the icon to change from the red icon to the red flight icon. An icon change effect that shows how it changes is performed.

It should be noted that FIGS. 90 (D) to 90 (E) illustrate how the icon changes from a red icon to a (higher jackpot reliability) red flight icon, but the icon changes from a red icon to gold flight. It may change to an icon, or the icon may change from a red icon to a rainbow flight icon. When the green icon is displayed as the icon, the icon changes to a green flight icon, a red flight icon, a gold flight icon, or a rainbow flight icon, which is a flight icon with higher jackpot reliability than the green icon. When the gold icon is displayed as the icon, the icon changes to a gold flight icon or a rainbow flight icon, which is a flight icon with higher jackpot reliability than the gold icon.

In this way, the icon that is not a flight icon changes to one of a plurality of flight icons having a higher jackpot reliability than the icon.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 90, when the icon changes from the red icon to the red flight icon, the button image change effect is performed using the red flight icon (see FIGS. 90 (F) to 90 (I)). This button image change effect is the same effect as the button image change effect described above based on FIGS. 89 (D) to (H), but specifically, the red flight icon is directed to the right from the icon display area 9e. After moving to, the red flight icon turns in the sky, and an effect display showing how the red flight icon moves to the center of the screen of the first display screen 7a is performed (see FIGS. 90 (F) to (H)). Although not shown in FIG. 90, when the red flight icon moves to the center of the screen of the first display screen 7a, the red flight icon is split into two and transformed into a second effect button image. (Transformation action) is performed.

In this way, when the button image change effect that changes the red flight icon to the operation promotion image related to the second effect button operation promotion effect is performed, the red second effect button image and "press! Is displayed (see FIG. 90 (I)). Then, when the second effect button 63b is operated within the valid period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, the three effect symbols forming doublets are pseudo-stopped and then the main stop is performed, or the reach loss. A loss notification effect is performed in which the three effect symbols forming the eyes are pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped.

(Effect of button image change effect)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a button image change effect in which the icon changes to an operation promotion image may be executed. For this reason, the icon has both a function of suggesting that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and a function of changing to an operation promotion image, effectively enhancing the interest of the production using the icon. It is possible to improve.

Further, in the present embodiment, while it is possible to execute the button image change effect during the SPSP reach, the low such as the normal short reach, the normal long reach, the first SP reach, and the second SP reach performed before the SPSP reach develops. There is a feature that the button image change effect is not executed during the reach effect of reliability. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for developing the SPSP reach as compared with the case where the button image change effect is not executed during the SPSP reach.

Further, before developing into SPSP reach, both the icon and the hold icon are displayed on the first display screen 7a, as illustrated in FIG. 68, for example. On the other hand, during SPSP reach, the icon is displayed as the operation promotion image without displaying the hold icon on the first display screen 7a (see, for example, FIGS. 89 and 90). Changing button image change effect is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the icon as compared with the case where the hold icon is displayed during SPSP reach. For example, the button is caused by the player paying attention to the hold icon. It is possible to easily suppress the problem of overlooking the image change effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second effect button operation promotion effect is performed after the button image change effect is performed, the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e before the button image change effect is performed. The second effect button image of the same color as the above is displayed on the first display screen 7a in a size suggesting the jackpot reliability (see FIGS. 71, 89 (H), and 90 (I)). Therefore, the player can grasp the degree of jackpot reliability based on the size of the second effect button image, and the button image change effect is based on the display color of the second effect button image. It is possible to grasp the display color of the icon (flying icon) before the operation is performed.

(Modification example related to button image change effect)
The following configuration may be adopted for the button image change effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, the winning notification effect is performed as the operation corresponding effect in response to the operation of the second effect button 63b while the operation promotion image (second effect button image) in which the icon is changed is displayed. Although the case has been described, in another embodiment, for example, a cut-in may be performed as an effect corresponding to this operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the icon is changed to the second effect button image as the operation promotion image has been described, but in other embodiments, the icon is changed to the first effect button image, and the first effect button image is changed. The operation corresponding effect may be performed according to the operation of the first effect button 63a during the display of the effect button image.

Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the button image change effect is not executed during the reach effect other than the SPSP reach. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the button image change effect can be executed even during the reach effect other than the SPSP reach such as the first SP reach and the second SP reach.

[About special reach production]
Although not shown in FIG. 67, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment may develop from a normal long reach to a special reach effect, or may develop into a special reach effect by pretending to develop into an SPSP reach. .. This special reach effect (see FIGS. 91 to 93) is a reach effect that causes the player to operate the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b. During the special reach effect, four valid periods for causing the player to operate the first effect button 63a and one valid period for causing the player to operate the second effect button 63b are set. Then, the display mode of the possibility suggestion image suggesting that the jackpot game may be executed is updated every time the first effect button 63a is operated in each of the above four valid periods, and it is possible. The jackpot reliability is suggested by the final display mode of the sex suggestion image, and then the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is performed according to the operation of the second effect button 63b during the above-mentioned one valid period. Will be.

<Specific examples of special reach production>
Hereinafter, specific examples of the special reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93. Here, FIGS. 91 to 93 are screen views showing specific examples of the special reach effect. FIG. 91 (A) illustrates a state in which the above-mentioned normal long reach is performed with the red icon displayed as the icon (based on FIG. 69 (B) and the like). Here, when the variable effect pattern that develops from the normal ring reach to the special reach effect is set at the start of the variation of the first special symbol this time, the following effect is performed.

That is, first, in order to pretend that the loss notification effect is performed in the normal long reach, a similar loss effect is performed in which three effect symbols forming reach loss eyes such as "565" are displayed in a pseudo-stop manner (FIG. 91 (B). )reference). Then, an effect image including the three effect symbols forming these reach-missing eyes is reduced and displayed, and a development effect is performed in which the effect image is rotated clockwise (see FIGS. 91 (C) to 91 (D)). This development production includes a success production that succeeds in developing into a special reach production and a failure production that fails to develop into a special reach production.

Although not shown in the figure, if a variable effect pattern is set in which a failure effect is performed at the end of the normal long reach and then a loss notification effect is performed, the reduced image does not rotate clockwise and is the original. Along with returning to the posture of, a failure effect is performed in which the sizes of the three effect symbols included in the reduced image are also restored to the original size, and these three effect symbols are stopped as they are.

On the other hand, when a variable effect pattern that develops from a normal long reach to a special reach effect via a success effect is set, a state in which the reduced image rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 degrees) or more is displayed. Successful production is performed. When this success effect is performed, a title related to the special reach effect such as "chance to increase reliability" is displayed (see FIG. 91 (E)). Then, following this title display, an explanatory effect is performed in which a message explaining the content of the operation to be performed by the player, such as "press a button to increase the reliability!", Is displayed on the first display screen 7a (FIG. 91). See (F)). As is clear from the notation of FIGS. 91 to 93, during the special reach effect, the effect display related to the special reach effect is performed without displaying the reach symbol.

When a predetermined time elapses after the explanatory effect is performed, the first operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 91 (G)). This first operation promotion effect is a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a, and the first display screen 7a is a first imitating the first effect button 63a. The effect button image and the validity period gauge showing the remaining time of the first validity period are displayed. Further, in the special reach effect, the player performs a total of five operations, such as having the player operate the first effect button 63a four times and then having the player operate the second effect button 63b once. Since it is an effect to be performed and the operation has not been performed even once, when the first operation promotion effect is performed, until the first operation is performed during the special reach effect. The characters "5 more times" are displayed on the third display screen 72a.

In this embodiment, a case where the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player during the special reach effect such as "5 more times" is displayed on the third display screen 72a will be described as an example, but the remaining number of operations will be described. May be displayed on the second display screen 71a, or may be displayed on both the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a.

Next, when the first effect button 63a is operated during the valid period related to the first operation promotion effect, the first reliability increase effect is performed (see FIG. 91 (H)). In this first reliability increase effect, a reliability character as a possibility suggestion image such as "00%" is displayed in the center of the screen of the first display screen 7a, and the character owns energy to this reliability character with a raygun. An effect display is performed to show how the numerical value indicated by the reliability character is increased by injecting. In addition, FIG. 91 (H) illustrates a state in which the own character injects energy into the reliability character by itself in the first reliability increase effect, but the own character cooperates with the ally character to inject energy into the reliability character. In some cases, energy is injected into the characters. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 91 (H), since the reliability character indicates a numerical value having an extremely low jackpot reliability such as "00%", the reliability character is displayed in blue.

In this way, when the first reliability increase effect is performed, the first result display effect is performed as the result effect of the reliability increase effect (see FIG. 91 (I)). FIG. 91 (I) illustrates that a reliability character of "06%" indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 6% is displayed, but the reliability character indicates that the jackpot reliability is high. Since it still indicates that it is extremely low, the blue reliability character is displayed as in the case where the first reliability increase effect is performed.

In addition, FIG. 91 (I) exemplifies a state in which a result display effect indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 6% is performed, but the increase in the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is It is variable, and depending on the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first operation promotion effect, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character increases only to 3%, or the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is 8. In some cases, it rises to%.

In addition, there is a correlation between the increase in jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character and the number of characters appearing in the reliability increase effect, and the greater the number of characters appearing in the reliability increase effect, the more the reliability character. There is a relationship that the increase in the jackpot reliability shown by is likely to be large.

Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the first result display effect is performed, the second operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 92 (A)). This second operation promotion effect is a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a, and is the same as the first operation promotion effect, the first effect button image and the valid period. The gauge is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Then, in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first operation promotion effect, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character has increased to 6%. Therefore, during the second operation promotion effect, " A blue reliability character indicating the character "06%" is also displayed. Further, here, since one operation has already been performed for a total of five operations, the character "4 more times" indicating the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player is displayed in the third display. It is displayed on the screen 72a.

When the first effect button 63a is operated during the valid period related to the second operation promotion effect, the second reliability increase effect is performed (see FIG. 92B). In this second reliability increase effect, the reliability character indicating the character "06%" is first displayed in the center of the screen of the first display screen 7a, and the own character and the first ally character are displayed in this reliability character. In cooperation with each other, an effect display is performed to show how the numerical value indicated by the reliability character is increased.

In this way, when the second reliability increase effect is performed, the second result display effect is performed as the result effect of the reliability increase effect (see FIG. 92 (C)). FIG. 92 (C) illustrates that a reliability character of "19%" indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 19% is displayed, but the reliability character indicates that the jackpot reliability is high. Since it still indicates low, the confidence letter indicating the letter "19%" is displayed in blue.

In the first reliability increase effect (see Fig. 91 (H)), since only the character appeared, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character increased by only 6%. In the second reliability increase effect (see Fig. 92 (B)), the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is 13% because two characters, the own character and the first ally character, appear. = 19% -6%) It is rising. In this way, as the number of characters appearing in the reliability increase effect increases, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character increases more, so that the player responds to the operation of the first effect button 63a. It is possible to enjoy a special reach effect while expecting a character to appear.

Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the second result display effect is performed, the third operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 92 (D)). This third operation promotion effect is a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a, and is the same as the first and second operation promotion effects, the first effect button image. And the validity period gauge is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Then, in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the second operation promotion effect, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character has increased to 19%. Therefore, during the third operation promotion effect, " A blue reliability character indicating the character "19%" is also displayed. Further, here, since the operation has already been performed twice for a total of five operations, the character "three more times" indicating the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player is displayed in the third display. It is displayed on the screen 72a.

When the first effect button 63a is operated during the valid period related to the third operation promotion effect, the third reliability increase effect is performed (see FIG. 92 (E)). In this third reliability increase effect, the reliability character indicating the character "19%" is first displayed in the center of the screen of the first display screen 7a, and the reliability character indicates the reliability character by itself. An effect display is performed to show how the numerical value is increased.

In this way, when the third reliability increase effect is performed, the third result display effect is performed as the result effect of the reliability increase effect (see FIG. 92 (F)). FIG. 92 (F) illustrates that a reliability character of "27%" indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 27% is displayed, but the reliability character indicates that the jackpot reliability is high. Since it indicates that it is medium, the reliability character indicating the character "27%" is displayed in green.

Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the third result display effect is performed, the fourth operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 92 (G)). This fourth operation promotion effect is a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a, and is the same as the first to third operation promotion effects, the first effect button image. And the validity period gauge is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Then, in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the third operation promotion effect, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character has increased to 27%. Therefore, during the fourth operation promotion effect, " A green reliability character indicating the character "27%" is also displayed. Further, here, since the operation has already been performed three times for a total of five operations, the character "two more times" indicating the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player is displayed in the third display. It is displayed on the screen 72a.

When the first effect button 63a is operated during the valid period related to the fourth operation promotion effect, the fourth reliability increase effect is performed (see FIG. 92 (H)). In this fourth reliability increase effect, the reliability character indicating the character "27%" is first displayed in the center of the screen of the first display screen 7a, and the own character and the first ally are displayed with respect to this reliability character. An effect display is performed showing how the three characters, the character and the second ally character, cooperate to increase the numerical value indicated by the reliability character.

In this way, when the fourth reliability increase effect is performed, the fourth result display effect is performed as the result effect of the reliability increase effect (see FIG. 92 (I)). FIG. 92 (I) illustrates that a reliability character of "52%" indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 52% is displayed, but the reliability character indicates that the jackpot reliability is high. Since it indicates that it is relatively high, the reliability character indicating the character "52%" is displayed in red.

In the fourth reliability increase effect (see FIG. 92 (H)), the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability characters is 25% (= 52% -27%) because three characters have appeared. It is rising. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a reliability character (possibility suggestion image) suggesting that a jackpot game may be executed is displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first effect is achieved. In response to the operation of the button 63a, the effect display that changes the possibility suggestion image is performed so that the possibility of the jackpot suggested by the reliability character increases.

Subsequently, when the fourth result display effect is performed, the reliability character displayed in the center of the screen of the first display screen 7a is enlarged and displayed during this result display effect (see FIG. 93 (A)). Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the jackpot reliability has increased to 52% by operating the first effect button 63a four times, and the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is 2. Since it is a relatively high value indicating that it will be a big hit once per time, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the big hit, and the second production button at the end of the special reach production. It is possible to give the player a strong motivation for manipulating 63b.

When the reliability character is enlarged and displayed, an explanatory effect is performed in which a message explaining the content of the operation to be performed by the player, such as "push the lever to grab the jackpot!", Is displayed on the first display screen 7a (Fig.). 93 (B)). After that, when a predetermined time elapses after the explanatory effect is performed, the fifth operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 93 (C)). This fifth operation promotion effect is a second effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 63b, and the first display screen 7a is a second effect imitating the second effect button 63b. An effect button image, a character indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b "press!", And a valid period gauge indicating the remaining time of the fifth valid period are displayed. Further, here, since the operation has already been performed four times for a total of five operations, the character "last" indicating that the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player is one. Is displayed on the third display screen 72a.

Here, if the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment performed at the start of the change of the first special symbol is "big hit", the second effect is performed during the valid period related to the fifth operation promotion effect. In response to the operation of the button 63b, a hit notification effect is performed in which three effect symbols forming doublets, such as "555", are pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped (FIGS. 93 (D) to (F)). reference). On the other hand, if the judgment result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment performed at the start of the change of the first special symbol is "missing", the second effect button is displayed during the valid period related to the fifth operation promotion effect. Depending on the operation of 63b, a loss notification effect such as "565" is performed in which the three effect symbols forming the reach loss eye are pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped (see FIGS. 93 (G) to 93 (I)). ).

(About the jackpot reliability of reliability characters)
FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot reliability of the special reach effect. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability when the display color of the final reliability character displayed in response to the fourth operation of the first effect button 63a is blue is about 15%. It is set. In addition, the jackpot reliability when the display color of the final reliability character is green is set to about 35%, and the jackpot reliability when the display color of the final reliability character is red is about 35%. Is set to. In addition, the jackpot reliability when the display color of the final reliability character is gold is set to about 75%, and the jackpot reliability when the display color of the final reliability character is rainbow is 100%. Is set to.

As is clear from this explanation, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when the reliability character changes in a change pattern in which the display color of the reliability character finally turns blue, and when the reliability character changes. The reliability character may change depending on the change pattern in which the display color finally turns golden, and in the latter case, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed than in the former case. ..

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is notified by the display color of the final reliability character, so that the player can intuitively understand the jackpot reliability. It is possible to recognize.

(Action effect by special reach production)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reliability character changes so that the possibility of the jackpot suggested by the reliability character increases according to the operation of the first effect button 63a, so that the jackpot game It is possible to make the player feel that he / she is increasing the possibility that the first effect button 63a is executed, and it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the effect using the first effect button 63a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the possibility that the jackpot game is executed differs from each other depending on the change pattern of the reliability character. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to how the reliability character changes, and it is possible to perform a more effective effect of changing the reliability character.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed according to the operation of the second effect button 63b after changing the reliability character. Therefore, the player can operate the second effect button 63b while looking at the changed reliability character and guessing how likely it is that the jackpot game will be executed.

(Modification example related to special reach production)
The following configuration may be adopted for the special reach effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality of intermittent validity periods are provided, and the possibility of a jackpot suggested by the reliability character increases according to the operation of the first effect button 63a having the same number as these validity periods. The case of changing the reliability character is explained. On the other hand, in another embodiment, only one valid period for causing the player to operate the first effect button 63a is provided, and the player can be trusted according to the long press operation of the first effect button 63a during this valid period. The degree character may be changed continuously.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the jackpot reliability is suggested by the display color of the final reliability character is described, but in other embodiments, the jackpot reliability is suggested by the number indicated by the final reliability character. You may try to do it. In this case, for example, if the number indicated by the final reliability character becomes "77" or "100", the second effect button 63b is always operated for the fifth operation promotion effect. It is conceivable to also adopt a configuration in which the hit notification effect is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is suggested by the final display color of the reliability character displayed in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the fourth time, and the operation of the second effect button 63b immediately after that. The case of executing the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect according to the above has been described. On the other hand, in another embodiment, instead of performing the second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 93 (C)) immediately after the final reliability character is displayed, the final reliability character is displayed. After being displayed, for example, a configuration that develops into any one of the first reach to the fourth reach may be adopted. In this case, for example, when the number indicated by the final reliability character becomes a predetermined number (for example, 70), it develops into the fourth reach, which has the highest jackpot reliability among the four types of reach effects. It is conceivable to adopt the configuration together.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the increase in the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character tends to increase as the number of characters appearing in the reliability increase effect tends to increase has been described. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, a plurality of movable characters such as a first effect character, a second effect character, and a third effect character are provided, and the first effect character is provided during the reliability increase effect. The increase in the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is larger when the second effect is operated than when the object is operated, and the third effect is larger than when the second effect is operated during the reliability increase effect. It is conceivable to adopt another configuration in which the increase in the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is larger when the accessory is operated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the reliability character is displayed as the possibility suggestion image suggesting that the jackpot game may be executed has been described, but the possibility suggestion image is limited to the reliability character. It may be, for example, a gauge image in which the number of lighting points increases according to the operation (continuous hitting or long pressing) of the first effect button 63a during one valid period.

Up to this point, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b, and the case where the first effect button operation promotion effect and the second effect button operation promotion effect are performed during the special reach effect. explained. On the other hand, in another embodiment, only the first effect button 63a of the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b is provided, and the second effect button operation promotion effect described in the present embodiment is first. It may be replaced with the effect button operation promotion effect.

[Other aspects]
In this embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the effect symbol display unit are set as the subject of the game in the game state according to the game state (the first special symbol described later or the first special symbol described later). It is assumed that the variable display is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol). That is, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display unit, and by synchronizing with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the game state, the first special symbol is synchronized. It has a case and a case synchronized with the second special symbol. In such a mode, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the variable display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of. Further, when both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one of the special symbols) set as the subject of the game in the game state is displayed in a large size (subject). The effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the other special symbol) that is not the subject of the game may be displayed in a small size. Specifically, the display area is set to 1/5 or less. Further, instead of displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol at all times, both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol may be displayed according to the game state and the game situation, and the first. One of the effect symbol and the second effect symbol (main symbol) may be displayed.

Further, with respect to the above-mentioned configuration of the gaming machine, a "variable entry port" that can be changed into a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a first. It is possible to provide a "special game execution means" capable of executing a special game in which the variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered when the result of the 1st hit / fail determination or the 2nd hit / fail determination is a hit. Further, the "second starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed into the first aspect and the second aspect in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect. In addition, a game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency (first game state), and a game in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than that of the game state. It can be provided with a "game state setting means" for setting a state (second game state). Here, it is assumed that 0 is included in the "predetermined frequency".

Further, in this embodiment, the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set to one, but the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is multiple. It may be rounds or may have different open count rounds. Further, in this embodiment, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are control processes that can be changed at the same time, but the second special figure hold is preferentially digested over the first special figure hold. The so-called special figure 2 priority control process, the control process of preferentially digesting the first special figure hold over the second special figure hold, and the so-called special figure 1 priority control process may be performed. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the oldest memorized one of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold is digested in order. It may be a control procedure, that is, a control process of so-called entry order (memory order) digestion.

In addition, it is a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and is in a state where a game ball can enter and a game ball can enter. It is equipped with a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and the large winning opening is in a state where it can be entered for a predetermined time when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters a large winning opening that is ready for a ball and the game ball passes through a specific area, it becomes a big hit and a big hit game is executed, which is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko gaming machine is a so-called type 1 type 2 mixing machine, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the starting port becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without requiring passage to a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, it is possible to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port is increased. Further, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port, and to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the ball into the second starting port is increased. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by inactivating / operating the probability fluctuation function, but the type (number) of the jackpot probability is Is not limited to this, and for example, three or more types of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). May be good. Further, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , Multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low probability and high probability are provided, and any of the multiple types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable) when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, for example. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special figure hold storage unit is read out for the preliminary determination based on the starting ball, and the read acquired random number value (acquired information) is determined. Although it was supposed to be (preliminary determination) ("Starting ball entry processing (S205)". See FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), the method of prior determination is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure hold storage unit, a main control unit or a sub-control unit stores an area (acquisition information storage means) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired based on a start-in ball) to be determined in advance. It may be provided in the RAM of the unit and the acquired information stored in the storage area (predetermination storage unit) may be determined (preliminary determination). In this case, by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub control unit, it is possible to erase the acquired information (acquired information stored in another storage area) used for the preliminary determination. Alternatively, instead of preliminarily determining the acquired information stored in the special figure hold storage unit, the acquired information acquired based on the starting ball may be preliminarily determined. That is, the acquired information may be determined in advance before being stored in the special figure reservation storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquired information to be pre-determined separately from the special figure holding storage unit, and it is also necessary to read the acquired information stored in the special figure reserved storage unit for the pre-determination. do not have.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the specific period is started in the production mode D (state C, specific game state) in a situation where three or more small hit holds are continuously stored, during the specific period. Is displayed with the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 (second profit production) based on the entry into the large winning opening for small hits, and when the specific period ends, the prize is given. The number of prize-winning balls shown by the ball count image C2 is added (totaled) to the number of prize-winning balls (total number of prize-winning balls, total number of prize-winning balls) of the prize-ball count image C1. It was. On the other hand, when a new second special figure hold (ball entry into the third start port 26) occurs during a specific period, and the hold is determined by prior judgment (hold look-ahead) to be a small hit hold. , May be configured to extend a particular period that is currently running. For example, it is assumed that a specific period is started in a situation where four small hit holds are stored in succession, and two small hit holds are consumed after the start. At this time, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "2". Under such circumstances, if a new second special figure hold occurs, the number of balls held in special figure 2 becomes "3", and it is determined in advance that the hold is a small hit hold, a specific period counter (see S5005). Is "+1" (1 addition). As a result, the specific period is extended until the newly generated (memorized) small hit hold is exhausted and the small hit game related to the small hit hold is completed. Alternatively, in the same way, after the specific period is started, two small hit hold balls are exhausted and the number of special figure 2 hold balls becomes "2", and the special figure 2 hold ball number "3" is supported. It is assumed that the second special figure hold and the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold ball number "4" occur in quick succession. Then, it is preliminarily stated that the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number "3" is an off hold, and the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number "4" is a small hit hold. It is assumed that it is judged. In this case, by adding "+2" (2 additions) to the specific period counter (see S5005), the small hit hold corresponding to the special figure 2 holding ball number "4" is exhausted, and the small hit fluctuation and the small hit game are completed. Until then, the specific period can be extended. In this way, by extending the specific period after the start of the specific period, the period during which the prize ball number image S and the prize ball count image C2 are additionally displayed (second profit effect) is performed. Since it will be extended, it will be possible to further enhance the effect of profit production.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the two conditions of (1) three or more small hit reservations are continuously stored and (2) winning the start lottery for a specific period are set as the start of the specific period. Although it was a condition, the start condition for a specific period is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of (for example, two or more) small hit holds that are not continuous are stored, and a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more) small hit holds are stored regardless of whether they are continuous or not. It may be a condition for starting a specific period. In this case, the start condition of the specific period is relaxed as compared with the embodiment, and the specific period is more likely to occur (prone to start). Further, the start condition of the specific period may be only (1) out of (1) and (2) described above.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high accuracy / low base state) occurs, a mode selection period for selecting the effect mode of the state C before shifting to the state C. If the jackpot is a 4R jackpot (4R 1st jackpot, 4R 4th jackpot), a mode selection period occurs during the ending period of the jackpot game, and the 15R jackpot (15Rth) In the case of (3 big hits), the mode selection period is assumed to occur in a predetermined round game (from the start of 14R to the middle of 15R in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the number of rounds of the jackpot that triggers the setting of the state C is, for example, one type of 10 rounds, if the gaming state when the 10R jackpot occurs is the state A (left-handed game), the ending period. A mode selection period may occur during the mode selection period, and if the state is B or C (right-handed game), the mode selection period may occur in a predetermined round game (for example, from the start of 9R to the middle of 10R). Of these, in the latter case, notification to the effect that the mode selection period will start from the next round (notification before the start of the selection period) may be performed in the round before the mode selection period occurs. Further, the time of occurrence when the mode selection period is generated in the round game during the big hit game, that is, the round that is the mode selection period is not limited to the examples, and may be, for example, from the start of 5R to the end of 6R. , Only the final round, etc., may occur in any round. Furthermore, when the mode selection period is generated during the ending period of the big hit, the round effect of the final round before the start of the ending period is to notify that the mode selection period will be started after that (notification before the start of the selection period). You may do it.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect mode selection (selection of effect mode C or D) in the mode selection period can be executed based on the operation of the effect button. On the other hand, the effect mode selection in the mode selection period may be automatically selected from a plurality of predetermined effect modes by lottery or the like on the sub control side. In this case, for example, with the start of the mode selection period, a roulette image (one aspect of the mode selection screen) showing a plurality of effect modes divided into roulette shapes is displayed on the display screen of the image display device. An effect (roulette effect) in which one effect mode is determined (selected) by a roulette lottery may be performed as an effect (mode selection effect) during the mode selection period. Further, in this embodiment, the effect mode of the state C is set to two types (effect mode C and D), but it may be possible to select one effect mode from among three or more types.

In addition, the effect related to the variation display of the effect symbol shown in the above-described embodiment (variation mode, stop mode, reach effect mode, etc.), and the effect executed in association with the small hit in the state C (effect mode C, D). (Small hit look-ahead effect, first profit effect, second profit effect, etc.), notice effect (display of notice image) in effect mode D, notification screen and mode selection screen related to mode selection period, etc. The modes of the various effects are merely examples, and the modes of the effects according to the present invention are not limited to the examples.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the preview image is displayed in the effect mode D, the preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a (preliminary image display area U) of the image display device 7. On the other hand, the notice image may be displayed on another image display device included in the gaming machine, such as the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. .. Further, in addition to the image display device composed of a liquid crystal display, a display means (effect display device) for other effects such as a dot display and a drum display is provided, and the display means is used in the above-mentioned effect mode D. The notice effect corresponding to the display of the notice image of the above may be configured to be feasible.

[others]
Hereinafter, the inventions related to the embodiments (Examples) disclosed in the present specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine provided with a display means for displaying variable display of identification information, and based on the display result of the variable display being a specific display result, a gaming machine capable of performing a special game advantageous to the player can be executed. There is. In this type of gaming machine, it is possible to show (notify) the result of the variation display to the player by the display mode of the identification information displayed (deriving display) when the variation display of the identification information is stopped. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-370).

In a gaming machine provided with the display means as described above, the player pays attention to the identification information displayed on the display means and proceeds with the game. However, the player becomes tired of the game as the variable display of the identification information is repeated many times, and it becomes difficult to maintain the interest in the game. The present reference invention 1 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to realize a new mode of display that attracts the player's interest in the display of identification information, and to improve the interest of the game. It is to plan.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
It is a gaming machine capable of displaying the variation of the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and notifying the result of the variation display according to the display mode of the identification information when the variation display is stopped.
Equipped with a variable display means that can execute variable display of identification information
The variable display means is
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the variable display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode.
It is characterized in that it is possible to change the stopping mode when stopping the variable display depending on the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display.

According to such a gaming machine, while the variation display means performs the variation display of the identification information, when the variation display is stopped, the variation display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode. Then, it is possible to make the stop mode different depending on the display mode of the identification information to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display. Therefore, the player can infer the display mode of the identification information to be displayed (derived display) after that, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. As a result, it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the stop mode when the variable display is stopped, and to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 described above.
The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols and is composed of a plurality of symbols.
As the stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, at least the first stop mode in which the stop order of the plurality of symbols is a predetermined first stop order and the stop order of the plurality of symbols are the first stop order. It has a second stop mode, which is a second stop order different from the stop order.
As the display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, at least the first display mode that triggers the execution of the predetermined special game and the second display that triggers the execution of another special game different from the predetermined special game. It has a mode and a third display mode that does not trigger the execution of a special game.
The variable display means is
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display can be stopped by the first stop mode.
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the second display mode or the third display mode, the variable display can be stopped by the second stop mode. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols, and the variation display of the identification information is performed by the variation display of these symbols. In such a configuration, as a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, that is, as a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the plurality of symbols, at least the stop order of the plurality of symbols is the first stop order. It has a first stop mode to be performed and a second stop mode to be a second stop order different from the first stop order (first stop mode), and also has identification information when the variable display is stopped. As the display mode of (plural symbols), at least, a first display mode that triggers the execution of a predetermined special game, a second display mode that triggers the execution of another special game different from the special game, and a special game. It has a third display mode that does not trigger the execution of the above. Then, when the display mode of the identification information (plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is displayed in the first stop order (first stop order). It is possible to stop in the first stop mode), and in the case of the second display mode or the third display mode, the variable display of a plurality of symbols is stopped in the second stop order (second stop mode). Is possible. Therefore, the player can infer the type of special game that can be executed, the presence / absence of the execution, the possibility, and the like through the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and to arouse the expectation for the subsequent special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 described above.
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, there is a fourth display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game.
As a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, there is a third stop mode in which the stop timings of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same.
The variable display means is
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the fourth display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode or the third stop mode. be.

According to such a gaming machine, as a display mode of the identification information (plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display of the identification information (plurality of symbols), a special game is further executed. When the display mode of the identification information (plurality of symbols) which has the fourth display mode that does not trigger and is to be displayed (derived display) due to the stop of the variable display is the fourth display mode, the above-mentioned In the second stop mode or the third stop mode in which the stop timings (stop timings) of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same, it is possible to stop the variable display of the plurality of symbols. For this reason, the stop mode of the variable display when the display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game is derived and displayed includes a mode (third stop mode) in which it is possible to immediately recognize that the special game is not feasible. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to diversify the stopping mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and to prevent the player's expectation for the execution of the special game from being agitated.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 or Reference Invention 1-3 described above.
It is characterized in that a predetermined effect display is executed when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode.

According to such a gaming machine, when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, that is, the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode. If this is the case, a predetermined effect display is executed in accordance with this. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize to the player that the identification information is displayed (derived display) in the first display mode, that is, the special game is executed triggered by the display in the first display mode. It will be possible. This makes it possible to enhance the effect of the effect when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 1-2 to Reference Invention 1-4 described above.
It is equipped with a state control means that can control the game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed.
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state.
The second gaming state is characterized in that, as compared with the first gaming state, the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is more frequently changed to the first display mode. be.

According to such a gaming machine, there are at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state as a gaming state when the variable display of the identification information is performed, and the second gaming state is the first gaming state. Compared to the above, the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is more frequently the first display mode. That is, in the second game state, the execution frequency of the special game (predetermined special game) triggered by the display of the first display mode is higher than that of the first display mode. Therefore, in the second gaming state, the frequency of stopping the variable display of the identification information in the first stop mode increases. As a result, in the second game state, the player is focused on whether or not the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, and the display of the first display mode triggers a sense of expectation for the special game. It becomes possible to fan.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 described above.
As the types of symbols constituting the identification information, at least the first symbol type and the second symbol type are included.
The first display mode is composed of the symbol of the second symbol type among the first symbol type and the second symbol type.
It is characterized in that at least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first gaming state is designated as the second symbol type in the second gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, there are at least a first symbol type and a second symbol type as the types of symbols constituting the identification information, and among these first symbol types and second symbol types, The first display mode is configured by the symbols of the second symbol type, and at least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first gaming state is regarded as the second symbol type in the second gaming state. It has become a thing. Therefore, a symbol that cannot form the first display mode because it is a symbol of the first symbol type in the first game state changes to a symbol that can form the first display mode by entering the second game state. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention not only to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped but also to the symbol type.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 1, it is possible to realize a display of a new mode that attracts the interest of the player with respect to the display of the identification information, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Reference Invention 2)
Conventionally, when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, it is possible to enter the game ball into the variable entry slot (for example, the big winning opening), and the game ball enters the variable entry slot. There is known a gaming machine in which a predetermined gaming profit (for example, a prize ball) is given to a player based on the above. In this type of gaming machine, the amount of gaming profit given in response to the entry of the gaming ball into the variable entrance, that is, the amount of gaming profit that the player will acquire (acquired profit amount) is predetermined. There is known what is displayed in the display area of (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35664).

However, the display of the amount of profit earned as described above has already been adopted by many gaming machines, and the production lacks freshness. The present reference invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and the purpose of the present invention is to realize a new aspect of the production as a production for displaying the earned profit amount and to improve the game entertainment. ..

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable entrance that can change the state in which the game ball cannot enter and the state in which it can enter,
A profit-giving means capable of giving a predetermined game profit based on the ball entering the variable ball entrance, and
A profit production execution means capable of executing a profit production that displays the amount of profit earned when the game profit is granted by the profit granting means, and a profit production execution means.
Equipped with a state control means that can control the game state,
The state control means can control the gaming state to a specific gaming state based on the establishment of the control condition.
The profit effect executing means has at least a first profit effect that additionally displays the amount of profit gained based on the ball entering the variable entrance in the specific game state, and the profit effect execution means in the specific game state in the specific period. It is characterized by being able to execute a second profit effect in which the amount of profit gained is added and displayed based on the ball entering the variable ball entrance.

According to such a gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters a variable slot while being controlled to a specific gaming state, and a predetermined gaming profit is given to the player in response to the ball entering the variable slot. As an effect (profit effect) that displays the amount of game profit (earned profit amount) to be given, at least two types of effects, the first profit effect and the second profit effect, can be executed, of which the second profit effect is possible. Is to be executed during a specific period during a specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the profit effect executed based on the entry of the ball into the variable entrance in the specific game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 described above.
The profit effect executing means can execute the first profit effect on a predetermined first display unit without executing the second profit effect in a period other than the specific period, and can execute the first profit effect in the specific period. The second profit effect can be executed on the predetermined second display unit without executing the effect.
After the end of the specific period, the effect of adding and displaying the acquired profit amount displayed on the second display unit by the second profit effect in the specific period is added to the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit. It is characterized by being feasible.

According to such a gaming machine, during a specific gaming state, during a period other than the specific period, the first profit effect is executed on the first display unit based on the entry into the variable entrance, and in the specific period, the first profit effect is executed. The second profit effect is executed on the second display unit based on the ball entering the variable ball entry port. In addition, when the specific period ends, the first profit effect is performed on the acquired profit amount (acquired profit amount displayed on the second display unit) added and displayed by the second profit effect executed in the specific period. An effect of adding (adding) to the earned profit amount displayed on the first display unit is executed. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode of the earned profit amount in the specific gaming state and enhance the effect of the profit production.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2 described above.
An acquisition information storage means that can store acquisition information acquired based on the establishment of acquisition conditions,
An identification information display means that can execute variable display of identification information based on the acquired information,
A pre-determination means capable of preliminarily determining whether or not the acquired information is the specific acquired information before executing the variation display is provided.
Based on the display result of the variable display being the specific display result, it is possible to enter the ball into the variable ball entry port.
The specific acquisition information is acquisition information for deriving the specific display result as the display result of the variation display.
The specific period is a period that can be started when a predetermined number of specific acquisition information is stored in the acquisition information storage means as a result of the preliminary determination in the specific gaming state. Is to be.

According to such a gaming machine, the acquired information acquired based on the establishment of the acquisition condition can be stored, and the variable display of the identification information can be executed based on the acquired information. Prior to the execution of the variable display, it is possible to execute a preliminary determination as to whether or not the acquired information is the specific acquired information, and if the acquired information is the specific acquired information, the variable display based on the specific acquired information is displayed. As a result, the specific display result is derived, and it becomes possible to enter the ball into the variable ball entrance. The specific period in the specific gaming state is a period that can be started under the condition that a predetermined number of specific acquisition information is stored. That is, it is a period that can be started under the condition that it is confirmed that the ball can be entered into the variable entrance with a predetermined number of specific acquisition information as an opportunity. As a result, it is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the second profit effect associated with the start of the specific period during the specific game state and enhance the effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 described above.
The specific period is characterized in that it ends after the specific acquisition information stored in the acquisition information storage means can be used as an opportunity to enter the variable ball entrance at the start of the specific period. be.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific display result is derived through the execution of the variable display based on the specific acquisition information stored at the start of the specific period, and the ball enters the variable entrance based on this. After it becomes possible, the specific period ends. This makes it possible to increase the certainty that the second profit effect will be executed during the specific period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 or Reference Invention 2-4 described above.
The pre-determination means can execute the pre-determination even during the specific period.
It is characterized in that the specific period is extended based on the newly obtained determination result that the specific acquisition information is obtained by the preliminary determination during the specific period.

According to such a gaming machine, the pre-determination can be executed even during the specific period, the pre-determination is executed for the acquired information newly acquired during the specific period, and the acquired information is the specific acquisition information. If a judgment result to that effect is obtained, the specific period will be extended. As a result, the period in which the second profit effect is executed is extended, so that the effect of the profit effect can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 2-3 to Reference Invention 2-5 described above.
In the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect based on the determination result that the specific acquisition information is obtained by the preliminary determination.
When a predetermined effect is executed, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed differs depending on the number of specific acquisition information stored at that time.

According to such a gaming machine, in a specific gaming state, a predetermined effect can be executed based on the result of a preliminary determination that the acquired information is the specific acquired information, and the predetermined effect can be executed. The effect mode differs depending on the number of stored specific acquisition information when the predetermined effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to produce a profit effect and a predetermined effect during the specific game state, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the specific game state.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 2, it is possible to realize a new aspect of the production as a production for displaying the acquired profit amount and to improve the game entertainment.

(Reference Invention 3)
Conventionally, there is widely known a gaming machine in which a variable display of identification information is performed and a special game can be executed based on the display result of the variable display being a specific display result. In this type of gaming machine, there is one configured so that any one of a plurality of effect modes can be selected by a manual input operation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The time when the effect mode can be selected can be set at various times, for example, during the variable display of the identification information, the display of the standby screen (demo screen), and the special game (for example, during the big hit game). It is possible. Further, in a configuration in which the effect mode can be selected during the special game, the effect mode after the special game may be selected (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-174956).

However, in the conventional configuration in which the effect mode after the special game can be selected during the special game, there is a problem that the mode of occurrence of the selectable time and the mode of notification indicating the occurrence are uniform and lack freshness. there were. The present reference invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to select a production mode after a special game in a new manner and to improve the interest of the game. ..

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable entrance that can change the state in which the game ball cannot enter and the state in which it can enter,
It is provided with a special game execution means capable of executing a special game based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result.
The special game is composed of a predetermined number of round games.
A gaming machine configured to allow entry into the variable entrance in the round game.
It has a plurality of effect modes as an effect mode when variable display of identification information is performed.
A selection period generation means capable of generating a selection period in which the effect mode after the end of the special game can be selected from the plurality of effect modes at a predetermined time after the start of the special game.
When the selection period is generated in the predetermined round game during the special game, the first notification means for notifying the start of the selection period in the round game before the predetermined round game is provided. It is something to do.

According to such a gaming machine, at a predetermined time after the special game is started, it is possible to generate a selection period in which the effect mode after the end of the special game can be selected from a plurality of effect modes. When the selection period occurs in the predetermined round game during the special game, the notification before the start of the selection period is performed in the round game before the predetermined round game. Therefore, after notifying in advance in the round game before that that the effect mode can be selected (the selection period occurs) in the predetermined round game during the special game, the effect mode selection period is set. It is possible to select the production mode in a new mode, such as when the occurrence (start) is reached. As a result, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the selection of the production mode after the special game, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

For the selection of the effect mode during the selection period, for example, a manual selection in which the player selects and inputs one of a plurality of effect modes using a predetermined input means provided in the gaming machine, or a plurality of effect modes can be selected. Includes automatic selection, one of which is automatically selected.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 described above.
When the selection period is generated in the predetermined round game during the special game, the second notification means for notifying the selection period in the predetermined round game and the second notification means.
When the predetermined round game is completed and the next round game is started, a third notification means for notifying before the end of the selection period is provided.
The selection period is characterized in that it ends during the round game in which the notification by the third notification means is performed.

According to such a gaming machine, when a selection period of the production mode occurs in a predetermined round game, the predetermined round game is notified during the selection period, and then the predetermined round game ends and the next round game is completed. Is started, the notification is performed before the end of the selection period in the round game (the next round game after the predetermined round game). Then, the selection period ends during the round game in which the notification before the end of the selection period is performed (during the next round game of the predetermined round game). Therefore, when the selection period of the effect mode occurs in the predetermined round game, the notification before the start of the selection period performed in the round game before the predetermined round game (notification by the first notification means) and its predetermined A special game by notification during the selection period performed in the round game (notification by the second notification means) and notification before the end of the selection period performed in the next round game of the predetermined round game (notification by the third notification means). It is possible to prompt the player to select a later production mode. In this way, by adopting a new notification mode such as prompting the player to select the effect mode after the special game over a plurality of round games, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the effect mode selection. .. Further, the selection period of the production mode is from the start of the predetermined round game to the middle of the next round game, and the above-mentioned notification is performed from before the start to the end of the selection period, so that the player selects the production mode. It is possible not to miss the opportunity to select the production mode without noticing the occurrence of the period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2 described above.
It is equipped with a state control means that can control the game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed.
The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
In the first game state, the display result of the variation display becomes the specific display result and the special game is executed, and in the second game state, the display result of the variation display becomes the specific display result. It is characterized in that the occurrence time of the selection period is different depending on the case where the special game is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, there are cases where the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result in the first gaming state and a special game is executed, and a second game which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Depending on the state, the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result and the special game is executed, and the occurrence time of the selection period of the effect mode is different. As a result, it is possible to select the effect mode in a new mode, such as changing the subsequent effect mode selectable time depending on the game state when the specific display result is derived, and prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous. Is possible.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 described above.
When the special game is executed with the display result of the variable display as the specific display result in the first game state, the selection period occurs after all the round games constituting the special game are completed. Notification will be given during the selection period,
When the special game is executed with the display result of the variable display as the specific display result in the second game state, the selection period occurs in the predetermined round game during the special game. It is a thing.

According to such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result and the special game is executed in the first game state, all the round games constituting the special game are completed. Later, a selection period of the effect mode is generated, and the notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result and the special game is executed in the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, the predetermined round game during the special game is performed. In this case, the first notification means (notification before the start of the selection period), the second notification means (notification during the selection period), and the first notification means are generated. 3 Notification by the notification means (notification before the end of the selection period) will be performed respectively. Therefore, when the specific display result is derived and the special game is executed in the first game state, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode after the end of all round games, and the player is in the second game state. When the specific display result is derived and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode by the end of all the round games. As a result, it is possible to make the mode of selecting the effect mode different depending on whether the gaming state when the specific display result is derived is the first gaming state or the second gaming state, which gives the player a different impression. Can be given.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-4 described above.
As the special game, there are multiple types of special games,
It is characterized in that the occurrence time of the selection period differs depending on the type of special game to be played.

According to such a gaming machine, the time when the selection period of the effect mode occurs differs depending on the type of special game executed based on the display result of the variable display being the specific display result. As a result, it is possible to select the effect mode in a new mode, such as changing the effect mode selectable time depending on the type of the special game to be executed, and it is possible to prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 described above.
The plurality of types of special games include at least a first special game and a second special game in which the number of round games is larger than that of the first special game.
When the first special game is executed, the selection period occurs after all the round games constituting the first special game are completed, and the notification during the selection period is performed.
When the second special game is executed, the selection period occurs in the predetermined round game during the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, when the first special game in which the number of round games constituting the special game is relatively small is executed, all the round games constituting the first special game are completed. Later, a selection period of the effect mode is generated, and the notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the second special game in which the number of round games constituting the special game is relatively large is executed, the effect mode selection period is generated in the predetermined round game during the second special game. In this case, the above-mentioned notification by the first notification means (notification before the start of the selection period), notification by the second notification means (notification during the selection period), and notification by the third notification means (before the end of the selection period). Notification) will be performed respectively. Therefore, when the first special game (a special game in which the number of round games is relatively small) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the production mode after all the round games are completed, and the second special game is performed. When a game (a special game in which the number of round games is relatively large) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select an effect mode by the end of all round games. As a result, it is possible to make the mode of selecting the effect mode different depending on whether the first special game is executed or the second special game is executed, and it is possible to give a different impression to the player. Become.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 3, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by selecting the effect mode after the special game in a new manner.

(Reference Invention 4)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), the second starting port is a variable starting port, the ball entering frequency is lowered in the low base state, and the ball entering frequency is increased in the high base state. In the low base state, there was a game aimed at the first starting port, and in the high base state, there was a game aimed at the second starting port. In addition, there are gaming machines that perform so-called right-handed gaming, in which a game is aimed at the right area of the gaming area in a big hit game or a high base state. In such a gaming machine, a left-handed game is played in a low base state, and once the advantageous state is reached, a right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, and the game in the advantageous state is sharpened. Met.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, various entrances are simply arranged in the right-handed area, and it cannot be said that efficient gaming can proceed. In view of the above-mentioned circumstances, unlike conventional gaming machines, by arranging various entrances at predetermined positions in a predetermined gaming area, it is possible to diversify the game playability and improve the gaming efficiency. In addition, we will provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of gaming.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
A specific starting port where a game ball can enter, and
A variable starting port that can be changed between the first state and the second state in which the game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The first variable entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a first variable entry port,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second variable entry port,
Specific identification information that is variablely displayed based on the entry into the specific starting port, and
The identification information that is variablely displayed based on the entry into the variable starting port and
When the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the specific game execution means for executing the specific game in which the variable start port is in the second state, and
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter, and a special game execution means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with the above, and is characterized in that it is arranged in the order of a specific starting port, a first variable ball entry port, a variable starting port, and a second variable ball entry port from the upstream of the gaming area.

According to such a gaming machine, a specific start port, a first variable ball entry port, a variable start port, and a second variable ball entry port are provided at predetermined locations in the game area, and these are upstream of the game area. Downstream from the specific start port, the first variable ball entry port, the variable start port, and the second variable ball entry port are arranged in this order. This enables efficient progress of the game.

Specifically, in order for the game to proceed smoothly, first, it is necessary to set the variable start port related to the execution of the special game to the second state (open state), and the specific start port related to this must be entered. Place it in the most upstream of the ball mouth. This first increases the possibility that the variable starting port is in the second state (open state). Further, by adopting a gate type (gate 28) in which the game ball that has entered (passed) through the specific start port continues to flow down the game area, the subsequent game can proceed smoothly. In addition, by arranging the first variable ball entry port downstream of the specific starting port, it is possible to speed up the ball entry when a special game is executed and to acquire a large amount of game balls in a short period of time. Further, by providing the first variable entry port upstream of the variable start opening, the game ball enters the variable start opening that is in the second state during the special game and enters the first variable entry opening. It is also possible to prevent situations such as obstruction of ball entry.

In addition, by arranging the variable start port downstream of the first variable entry port, the variable start port in the second state can be used except when the first variable entry port is in a ball-entry state in a special game. , It is possible to give priority to the flowing game ball over other entrances. As a result, it is possible to prevent as much as possible a situation in which the ball does not enter the variable starting port even though the variable starting port is in the second state. Further, by arranging the second variable entry port downstream of the variable start opening, the game ball enters the second variable entry opening based on the change between the first state and the second state of the variable start opening. The frequency will change, and it will be possible to add a variety of playability. This makes it possible to diversify the playability while providing smooth progress of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1.
As the special aspect, the first special aspect and the second special aspect are provided.
As the special game, the first special game and the second special game are included.
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special mode, the first special game is executed, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special mode, the second special game is executed.
The first special game is considered to have more game profits that can be obtained than the second special game.
The first variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered in the first special game, and the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, there are a first special mode and a second special mode as modes of stopping display of identification information for executing a special game, and the first special game and the first special game are described as special games. It has 2 special games. Then, the first special game is a special game in which the game profit that can be obtained is larger than that of the second special game, and in the first special game, the first variable entrance is set to a ball-entry state (open state), and the second special game is made. Then, the second variable entry port is set to be in a state where the ball can enter.

Specifically, first, in order to set the variable start port to the second state (open state), the specific start port related to this is arranged at the uppermost stream among these entry ports. Next, by arranging the first variable ball entry port downstream of the specific start port, the ball entry when the first special game with a large game profit amount is executed can be speeded up, and a large amount of game balls can be played in a short period of time. Enables acquisition. Next, by arranging the variable start port downstream of the first variable entry port, the second state is variable except when the first variable entry port is in a ball-entry state in the special game. It is possible to allow the flowing game ball to enter the starting port with priority over other entry ports. Further, the second variable entry port, which is in a state where the ball can be entered in the second special game in which the game profit amount is small, is arranged downstream of the variable start opening, and it is possible to add various game features. This makes it possible to diversify the playability while providing smooth progress of the game.

As the first special aspect and the second special aspect, for example, different stop symbols can be exemplified. Further, as the first special game and the second special game, for example, a special game having different execution modes (number of rounds, opening time, earnable profit, and variable entrance to be in an open state) can be exemplified.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2.
A first game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than that of the first game state. Equipped with a game state setting means that can be set,
In the second gaming state, the game ball is inserted into the variable starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the game ball is entered into the second variable entrance opening arranged on the downstream side of the variable starting opening. By making it difficult to enter the ball,
The first game state is characterized in that the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is higher in the first game state than in the second game state. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to set a first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is low and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the ball is higher than that of the first gaming state. The variable start port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable entry port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the ballable state (open state) in the second special game, the second variable entrance is in the first game state rather than in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the ball is high. Further, this makes it possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance differently depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3.
It is characterized in that the game profit obtained by entering the ball into the second variable entrance port is larger than the game profit obtained by entering the ball into the variable starting opening.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming profit (for example, the prize ball given by the entry of one gaming ball) obtained by the entry of the gaming ball is second to that of the variable starting port. Increase the number of variable entrances. As described above, in the first game state in which the variable start opening is unlikely to be in the second state when the second special game occurs, the flowing game ball can easily enter the second variable entrance on the downstream side. In the second gaming state, in which the variable starting port is likely to be in the second state, it is easy to enter the variable starting port on the upstream side. As a result, the player expects the ball to enter the second variable ball entry port, which has more game profit that can be obtained than the variable start port, and expects that the second special game will occur in the first game state. , Enhance the game entertainment. In addition, this makes it possible to make the game profits that can be obtained different when the same second special game occurs between the first game state and the second game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest. Will be.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4.
The game state does not change based on the execution of the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state does not change due to the execution of the second special game, that is, the gaming state before the execution of the second special game and the gaming state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same gaming state. As a result, if the second special game can be executed in the first game state, the first game state continues even after the second special game is executed in the first game state, so that the second special game is performed a plurality of times. By generating a game, it becomes possible to obtain more game profits.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-2 to Reference Invention 4-5.
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-7 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-6.
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The first identification information which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the first starting port is provided.
The first identification information and the identification information can be variablely displayed in parallel.

According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information that is variablely displayed based on the entry into the first starting port and the identification information that is variablely displayed based on the entry into the variable starting opening are displayed in parallel. Variable display is possible (at the same time). As a result, in a simultaneous variable gaming machine (simultaneous variable machine) that can variablely display the first identification information and the identification information in parallel (simultaneously), it is possible to diversify the playability while providing smooth progress of the game. do.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the playability and improve the interest of the game while enabling the smooth progress of the game.

(Reference Invention 5)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), a plurality of gaming states are possessed as gaming states, and the execution of a big hit game triggers a change from a normal state to a probable change state or a time-saving state advantageous to the player. It has become a transitional gaming machine. Further, in the advantageous state, if the next big hit game does not occur while the symbol is displayed fluctuating a predetermined number of times, the advantageous state is terminated and the normal state is restored. In such a gaming machine, the transition of the gaming state has exerted a certain effect of preventing the game from getting bored.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 and the conventional gaming machine, the transition mode of the gaming state and the gaming state after the transition are uniform, and the gaming interest has not been enhanced. The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that diversifies the game playability and enhances the gaming interest by giving a feature to the transition mode of the gaming state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The first variable entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a first variable entry port,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between an enterable state in which a game ball can enter and an inaccessible state in which a game ball cannot enter,
The first identification information which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the first starting port and
The second identification information, which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the second starting port, and
A first game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than that of the first game state. Settable game state setting means and
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter. Game execution means and
It is provided with a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result. It ’s a game machine,
As the specific result, the first specific result is obtained.
When the first specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, and the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information in the gaming state. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number of times, the gaming state is characterized by changing to the first gaming state with the high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. When the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes from the second gaming state with a high probability to the first gaming state with a high probability. This makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1.
As the specific result, the second specific result is obtained.
When the second specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with the predetermined probability, and the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information in the gaming state. When the number of times of display reaches the specified number of times, the gaming state is assumed to change to the first gaming state with the predetermined probability.
The game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the high probability. By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state has the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of fluctuations displayed with and is reached a specific number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Further, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) in the predetermined probability and the second game state and the high probability and the second game state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a predetermined probability and a second gaming state or a high probability and a second gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest. Further, this makes it possible for the player to expect that the gaming state changes to the second gaming state with a high probability when a specific number of times elapses during the execution of the common effect, and the gaming interest can be enhanced. ..

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2.
It is characterized in that the game profit that can be obtained is larger in the first game state with a high probability than in the second game state with a high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state in which the high probability and the first gaming state has a higher probability of acquisition than the high probability and the second gaming state is set. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability with the passage of a specific number of times, and enhances the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-3.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port.
In the second gaming state with a high probability, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the gaming area, and the second starting port is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting opening. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entry port, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable ball entry port when the second special game occurs can be determined with high probability and the second. It is characterized in that the first gaming state is made higher with a higher probability than the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, a second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the gaming area, and a second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the ballable state (open state) in the second special game, the probability and the first game state are higher than those in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance differently depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of the reference invention 5-5 are the gaming machines of the reference inventions 5-1 to 5-4.
As the special game, the first special game and the second special game are included.
The first special game makes it possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game.
The second special game shall not change the game state after the end of the second special game.
The first variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered in the first special game, and the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-entry state makes it possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game. Further, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. As a result, when the first game state is reached with a high probability, the second special game is performed a plurality of times because the first game state continues with a high probability even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state. By generating it, it becomes possible to obtain more game profits.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 5, it is possible to diversify the playability and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 6)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The first variable entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a first variable entry port,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between an enterable state in which a game ball can enter and an inaccessible state in which a game ball cannot enter,
The first identification information which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the first starting port and
The second identification information, which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the second starting port, and
A first game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than that of the first game state. Settable game state setting means and
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter. Game execution means and
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result.
A gaming machine equipped with a launching device that launches a gaming ball into a gaming area with a predetermined firing intensity.
The first starting port is provided in the first gaming area where a gaming ball launched with the first firing intensity can enter.
The second starting port is provided in a second gaming area where a gaming ball launched with a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter.
As the specific result, the first specific result is obtained.
When the first specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, and the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information in the gaming state. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number of times, the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with the high probability.
As a result of the variation display of the first identification information based on the entry into the first starting port, the first specific result is not obtained.
It is characterized by having the first specific result as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on the entry into the second starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. Further, the first starting port is provided in the first gaming area where the ball can be entered with the first firing intensity, and the second starting opening is provided in the second gaming area where the ball can be entered with the second firing intensity. .. Then, when the first specific result is obtained, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of fluctuations displayed with and is reached a specific number, the gaming state changes from the second gaming state with a high probability to the first gaming state with a high probability. This makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest. Further, the result of the variable display of the first identification information does not have the first specific result, and the result of the variable display of the second identification information has the first specific result. As a result, different game playability can be provided depending on whether the game ball is inserted into the first start port and the game ball is inserted into the second start port, diversifying the game playability, and making the game fun. It will be possible to increase.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1.
As the specific result, the second specific result is obtained.
When the second specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with the predetermined probability, and the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information in the gaming state. When the number of times of display reaches the specified number of times, the gaming state is assumed to change to the first gaming state with the predetermined probability.
The game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the high probability. By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state has the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.
It is characterized by having the second specific result as a result of the variation display of the second identification information based on the entry into the second starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, the second specific result is obtained as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. When the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the specified number of times is reached, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Further, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) in the predetermined probability and the second game state and the high probability and the second game state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a predetermined probability and a second gaming state or a high probability and a second gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest. Further, this makes it possible for the player to expect that the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with a high probability when a specific number of times elapses during the execution of the common effect, and the gaming interest can be enhanced. ..

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 or Reference Invention 6-2.
As the specific result, the third specific result is obtained.
When the third specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the first gaming state with a high probability, and the gaming state does not change until the next specific result is obtained in the gaming state. And
It is characterized by having the third specific result as a result of the variation display of the first identification information based on the entry into the first starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, the second specific result is obtained as a result of the variable display of the first identification information. Then, when the third specific result is obtained and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the first gaming state with a high probability, the gaming state is maintained with a high probability and the first gaming state until the next specific result is obtained. It is supposed to be done. As a result, as a result of the variation display of the first identification information, there is no one that changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state with a high probability based on the variation display of a specific number of times, and the special game ends. It has a high probability of guaranteeing the gaming state of the first gaming state from later until the next specific result is obtained. Further, this makes it possible to play the game with a sense of security in the game accompanied by the variable display of the first identification information, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-3.
It is characterized in that the game profit that can be obtained is larger in the first game state with a high probability than in the second game state with a high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state in which the high probability and the first gaming state has a higher probability of acquisition than the high probability and the second gaming state is set. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability with the passage of a specific number of times, and enhances the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 6-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-4.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port.
In the second gaming state with a high probability, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the gaming area, and the second starting port is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting opening. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entry port, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable ball entry port when the second special game occurs can be determined with high probability and the second. It is characterized in that the first gaming state is made higher with a higher probability than the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, a second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and a second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the ballable state (open state) in the second special game, the probability and the first game state are higher than those in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance differently depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of the reference invention 6-6 are the gaming machines of the reference inventions 6-1 to 6-5.
As the special game, the first special game and the second special game are included.
The first special game makes it possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game.
The second special game shall not change the game state after the end of the second special game.
The first variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered in the first special game, and the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-entry state makes it possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game. Further, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. As a result, when the first game state is reached with a high probability, the second special game is performed a plurality of times because the first game state continues with a high probability even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state. By generating it, it becomes possible to obtain more game profits.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention 6, it is possible to diversify the playability and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 7)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The first variable entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a first variable entry port,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second variable entry port,
The first identification information which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the first starting port and
The second identification information, which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the second starting port, and
A first game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than that of the first game state. Settable game state setting means and
When the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter. Game execution means and
It is provided with a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result. It ’s a game machine,
As the specific result, the first specific result and the fourth specific result are included.
When the first specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, and the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information in the gaming state. When the number of times of display becomes the first number, the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with the high probability.
When the fourth specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, and the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information in the gaming state. When the number of times of display becomes the second number, the gaming state is characterized by changing to the first gaming state with the high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. Then, when the first specific result is obtained and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of fluctuations displayed with and is the first, the gaming state changes from the second gaming state with a high probability to the first gaming state with a high probability. Further, when the fourth specific result is that the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of fluctuations displayed with and is the second, the gaming state changes from the second gaming state with a high probability to the first gaming state with a high probability. This makes it possible to diversify the timing of changes in the gaming state and maintain the gaming interest for a long period of time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest.

In this embodiment, when the number of times of variation display between the first identification information and the second identification information becomes the first number or the second number, the gaming state has a high probability and a high probability from the second gaming state. 1 It is assumed that the game state changes. As another aspect, when the number of times of variation display of the second identification information becomes the first number of times or the second number of times regardless of the number of times of variation display of the first identification information, the gaming state is set to the second gaming state with high probability. It may change from the first game state with a high probability. As another aspect, when the number of times of variation display of the first identification information becomes the first number of times or the second number of times regardless of the number of times of variation display of the second identification information, the gaming state is highly probable and the second game is played. It may change from the state to the first gaming state with high probability.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1.
As the specific result, the second specific result and the fifth specific result are included.
When the second specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with the predetermined probability, and the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information in the gaming state. When the number of times of display becomes the first number, the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with the predetermined probability.
When the fifth specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information in the gaming state. When the number of times of display becomes the second number, the gaming state is assumed to change to the first gaming state with the predetermined probability.
The game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the high probability. By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state has the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the second specific result is that the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variation display between the identification information and the second identification information becomes the first number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Further, when the fifth specific result is obtained and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variation display with and is reached the second number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Further, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) in the predetermined probability and the second game state and the high probability and the second game state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a predetermined probability and a second gaming state or a high probability and a second gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the timing of changes in the gaming state and maintain the gaming interest for a long period of time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest. Further, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability when the first number of times elapses and the second number of times elapses during the execution of the common effect. It is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2.
The second number is a larger number than the first number,
It is more likely that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a higher probability when the gaming state changes in the second number of times than when the gaming state changes in the first number of times. It is a feature.

According to such a gaming machine, the second number of times is set to be larger than the first number of times, and the gaming state is higher when the second number of times is than when the change timing of the gaming state is the first number of times. There is a high probability that the game will change to the first gaming state. As a result, when the player reaches the first number of times, the player plays the game with the expectation that the game state is maintained without changing, and the player reaches the second number of times with the game state remaining in the second game state. At that time, the game is played with a high probability of raising the expectation of changing to the first game state. This has a point of increasing the expectation of a plurality of times in the second gaming state. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2.
The second number is a larger number than the first number,
It is more likely that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a higher probability when the gaming state changes in the first number of times than when the gaming state changes in the second number of times. It is a feature.

According to such a gaming machine, the second number of times is set to be larger than the first number of times, and the gaming state is higher when the first number of times is than when the change timing of the gaming state is the second number of times. There is a high probability that the game will change to the first gaming state. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the gaming state will change when the first number of times is reached, and it is possible when the gaming state reaches the second number of times while the second gaming state remains. Although the sex is lower than that of the first number of times, the game is played with the expectation that the sex will change to the first gaming state with a high probability. This has a point of increasing the expectation of a plurality of times in the second gaming state. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 7-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 7-1 to 7-4.
It is characterized in that the game profit that can be obtained is larger in the first game state with a high probability than in the second game state with a high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state in which the high probability and the first gaming state has a higher probability of acquisition than the high probability and the second gaming state is set. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability with the passage of a specific number of times, and enhances the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 7-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-5.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port.
In the second gaming state with a high probability, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the gaming area, and the second starting port is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting opening. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entry port, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable ball entry port when the second special game occurs can be determined with high probability and the second. It is characterized in that the first gaming state is made higher with a higher probability than the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, a second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the gaming area, and a second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the ballable state (open state) in the second special game, the probability and the first game state are higher than those in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance differently depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 7-7 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 7-1 to 7-4.
As the special game, the first special game and the second special game are included.
The first special game makes it possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game.
The second special game shall not change the game state after the end of the second special game.
The first variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered in the first special game, and the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-entry state makes it possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game. Further, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. As a result, when the first game state is reached with a high probability, the second special game is performed a plurality of times because the first game state continues with a high probability even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state. By generating it, it becomes possible to obtain more game profits.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 7, it is possible to diversify the playability and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 8)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The first variable entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a first variable entry port,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second variable entry port,
The first identification information which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the first starting port and
The second identification information, which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the second starting port, and
A first game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than that of the first game state. Settable game state setting means and
When the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter. Game execution means and
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result.
A first condition state in which the time for variable display of the second identification information is determined based on the first condition, and a second condition state in which the time for variable display of the second identification information is determined based on the second condition. It is a gaming machine equipped with a second identification information fluctuation time determination means capable of setting.
In the second conditional state, the average time of the variable display time of the second identification information to be determined is shorter than that in the first conditional state.
The gaming states include the predetermined probability and the first gaming state and the first condition state, the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, and the high probability and the first gaming state and the first condition. It is characterized by having a two-condition state, the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability, and a first condition state and a first condition state. (2) A second identification information fluctuation time determining means capable of setting a second condition state in which the average time of the variation display time of the identification information is shorter than the first condition state is provided. Further, the gaming states have a predetermined probability, a first gaming state and a first condition state, a predetermined probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, and a high probability and a first gaming state and a second condition state. Further, in the gaming state in which the second gaming state and the second condition state are set and the first condition state is set, the variation display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively long time, and the second condition is set. In the gaming state in which the state is set, the variation display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively short time. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1.
It is more likely that the case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is a specific result is more advantageous to the player than the case where the result of the variable display of the first identification information is a specific result. It is characterized by.

According to such a gaming machine, it is more likely that the case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is a specific result is more advantageous to the player than the first identification information. For example, it is possible to increase the game profit obtained by the special game executed as a specific result, increase the possibility of increasing the game profit, or increase the possibility of becoming advantageous after the special game ends. be. As a result, the player expects to be set to a state in which a large number of variable displays of the second identification information can be executed, that is, a second condition state in which the time for variable display of the second identification information is relatively short. Will play the game. Further, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of gaming states are set, and it is possible to diversify the gaming states, diversify the game playability, and enhance the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2.
Equipped with a third starting port that allows game balls to enter
The second identification information is varied and displayed based on the entry of the ball into the third starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that a third starting port is provided in which the second identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the gaming ball. As a result, the second identification information is variablely displayed by entering any of the variable second starting port and the third starting port, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2.
Equipped with a launcher that launches a game ball into the game area with a predetermined launch intensity,
The first starting port is provided in the first gaming area where a gaming ball launched with the first firing intensity can enter.
The second start port, the first variable entry port, and the second variable entry port are second games in which a game ball launched with the second launch intensity different from the first launch intensity can enter. Provided in the area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, the game ball is launched into the first game area to change and display the first identification information to play the game. ,
The gaming states are the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the first. In the two-condition state, by launching a game ball into the second game area, the second identification information is variablely displayed and the game is played.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first gaming area where the ball can be entered at the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the first variable entry port and the second variable entry port are provided. , It is provided in the second gaming area where the ball can be entered with the second firing intensity. Then, when the gaming states have a predetermined probability, the first gaming state, and the first condition state, the gaming ball is launched into the first gaming area and the first identification information is variablely displayed to play the game. Further, when the gaming states are a predetermined probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first gaming state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, It is assumed that a game ball is fired in the second game area and the second identification information is variablely displayed to play the game. That is, in the first condition state, the game ball is fired in the first game area and the first identification information is variablely displayed to play the game, and in the second condition state, the game ball is placed in the second game area. The game is played by firing and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest. Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player, the game is performed with the expectation that the second conditional state in which the second identification information is variablely displayed is set. Become. Further, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of gaming states are set, and it is possible to diversify the gaming states, diversify the game playability, and enhance the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3.
Equipped with a launcher that launches a game ball into the game area with a predetermined launch intensity,
The first starting port is provided in the first gaming area where a gaming ball launched with the first firing intensity can enter.
The second starting port, the third starting port, the first variable ball entry port, and the second variable ball entry port are for a game ball launched with a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity. Provided in the second possible gaming area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, the game ball is launched into the first game area to change and display the first identification information to play the game. ,
The gaming states are the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the first. In the two-condition state, by launching a game ball into the second game area, the second identification information is variablely displayed and the game is played.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first gaming area where the ball can be entered at the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the third starting port, the first variable ball entry port, and the second ball entry port are provided. The variable ball entry port is provided in the second gaming area where the ball can be entered with the second firing intensity. Then, when the gaming states have a predetermined probability, the first gaming state, and the first condition state, the gaming ball is launched into the first gaming area and the first identification information is variablely displayed to play the game. Further, when the gaming states are a predetermined probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first gaming state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, It is assumed that a game ball is fired in the second game area and the second identification information is variablely displayed to play the game. That is, in the first condition state, the game ball is fired in the first game area and the first identification information is variablely displayed to play the game, and in the second condition state, the game ball is placed in the second game area. The game is played by firing and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest. Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player, the game is performed with the expectation that the second conditional state in which the second identification information is variablely displayed is set. Become. Further, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of gaming states are set, and it is possible to diversify the gaming states, diversify the game playability, and enhance the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 8-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-5.
It is characterized in that the game profit that can be obtained is larger in the high probability, the first game state, and the second condition state than in the high probability, the second game state, and the second condition state. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state in which a high probability, a first gaming state, and a second condition state have a higher probability of acquisition than a high probability, a second gaming state, and a second condition state can be obtained. There is. As a result, the player advances the game with the expectation that the game state is set to the first game state and the second condition state with a high probability, and enhances the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machines of the reference invention 8-7 are the gaming machines of the reference inventions 8-1 to 8-6.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port.
In the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state, the game ball is made to enter the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the ball is made to enter the second starting opening. By making it difficult to enter the second variable entry port arranged on the downstream side, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable entry opening is increased with high probability and the second game. It is characterized in that the state and the first gaming state and the second condition state are higher than the second condition state with a higher probability.

According to such a gaming machine, a second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and a second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the ballable state (open state) in the second special game, the probability is higher and the first game state and the second condition state are higher in probability and second. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is higher than that in the game state and the second condition state. Further, this makes it possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance differently depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 8, it is possible to diversify the playability and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 9)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The first variable entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a first variable entry port,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second variable entry port,
The first identification information which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the first starting port and
The second identification information, which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the second starting port, and
A first game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than that of the first game state. Settable game state setting means and
When the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter. Game execution means and
It is provided with a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result. It ’s a game machine,
The gaming states include the predetermined probability and the first gaming state, the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, and the high probability and the second gaming state. death,
The second variable ball entry port is characterized in that the frequency of ball entry of the game ball increases when the game state has the high probability and the first game state is reached.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. Further, the gaming states include a predetermined probability and a first gaming state, a predetermined probability and a second gaming state, a high probability and a first gaming state, and a high probability and a second gaming state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the second variable ball entry port increases when the first game state is reached with a high probability. As a result, the player advances the game with high probability in anticipation of the occurrence of the first gaming state. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1.
Equipped with a launcher that launches a game ball into the game area with a predetermined launch intensity,
The first starting port is provided in the first gaming area where a gaming ball launched with the first firing intensity can enter.
The second starting port, the first variable ball entry port, and the second variable ball entry port are second game areas in which a game ball launched with a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter. Provided in
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the first game state, the game is played by launching the game ball into the first game area to change and display the first identification information.
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, or the high probability and the second gaming state, the gaming ball is launched into the second gaming area. Therefore, it is a gaming machine that plays a game by varyingly displaying the second identification information.
In a gaming state in which the second identification information is variablely displayed and the game is played by launching the game ball into the second game area.
The frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and the high probability and the first gaming state with a higher probability than the second gaming state. Is characterized by being higher.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first gaming area where the ball can be entered at the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the first variable entry port and the second variable entry port are provided. , It is provided in the second gaming area where the ball can be entered with the second firing intensity. Then, when the gaming state has a predetermined probability and is the first gaming state, the gaming ball is launched into the first gaming area and the first identification information is variablely displayed to play the game. Further, when the gaming state is a predetermined probability and a second gaming state, a high probability and a first gaming state, or a high probability and a second gaming state, a gaming ball is launched into the second gaming area and the second identification information is obtained. It is supposed that the game is played with a variable display. Further, in the gaming state in which the gaming ball is launched into the second gaming area to play the game, that is, in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, and the high probability and the second gaming state, the second The game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable ball entry port is the highest is defined as the first game state with high probability.

As a result, when the player enters the gaming state in which the gaming ball is launched into the second gaming area to play the game, the player proceeds with the game with the expectation that the gaming state is the first gaming state with a high probability. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 or Reference Invention 9-2.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port.
In the second gaming state with a high probability, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the gaming area, and the second starting port is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting opening. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entry port, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable ball entry port when the second special game occurs can be determined with high probability and the second. It is characterized in that the first gaming state is made higher with a higher probability than the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, a second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and a second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the ballable state (open state) in the second special game, the probability and the first game state are higher than those in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance differently depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention 9, it is possible to diversify the playability and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 10)
Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of performing a special game in which a predetermined benefit can be given to a player when a variable display of identification information is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. Widely known. In this type of gaming machine, the entertainment of the game is improved by performing various effects to raise the expectation of the player while the identification information is variablely displayed. As such an effect, for example, information regarding the variable display of the identification information currently being executed and the variable display of the identification information executed thereafter (for example, the degree of expectation (reliability) and display that the display result becomes a specific display result). There is known an effect of displaying (notifying) a variation (effect) mode until a result is derived (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-239122).

However, the effect performed during the variable display of the identification information as described above has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the effect mode is also uniform. For this reason, it is becoming difficult to enhance the game entertainment. The present reference invention 10 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to realize an effect capable of attracting the interest of a player as an effect performed during variable display of identification information. , To improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable display means that can execute variable display of identification information,
A state control means that can control the game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed, and
Based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result, a special game execution means capable of executing a special game to which a predetermined game profit can be given, and a special game execution means.
It is provided with an information display effect executing means capable of executing an information display effect that displays information about the game after the end of the variable display during the variable display of the identification information.
The information includes at least the first information, the second information, and the third information.
The first information indicates that the special game is executed after the end of the variation display.
The second information indicates that the current gaming state is continued even after the end of the variation display.
The third information indicates that the gaming state becomes a more disadvantageous gaming state than the present after the end of the variation display.
The information display effect executing means is characterized in that at least two of the first to third information can be displayed at the start of the information display effect.

According to such a gaming machine, when an information display effect for displaying information about a game after the end of the variation display is executed during the variation display of the identification information, the variation display is started at the start of the information display effect. The first information indicating that the special game is executed after the end, the second information indicating that the current gaming state continues even after the end of the variation display, and the gaming state from the present after the end of the variation display. It is possible to display at least two pieces of information among the third information indicating that the gaming state is disadvantageous. Therefore, when the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the player can make an alternative guess regarding the later game development based on the type (content) of the information displayed at that time. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the information displayed at the start of the information display effect and to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 described above.
The information display effect executing means may display the first information and the second information, or may display the second information and the third information at the start of the information display effect. Is to be.

According to such a gaming machine, there are cases where the first information and the second information are displayed and cases where the second information and the third information are displayed at the start of the information display effect. Therefore, the player can presume that if the first information and the second information are displayed at the start of the information display effect, there is no possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous, and the second When the information and the third information are displayed, it cannot be ruled out that the later game development may be disadvantageous. This makes it possible to obtain a production effect that stirs up the expectations and anxieties of the player.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 or Reference Invention 10-2 described above.
As the special game, at least the first special game and the second special game are included.
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state.
The second special game is a special game in which the game profit that can be granted is larger than that of the first special game.
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state.
The state control means controls the gaming state after the end of the first special game to the first gaming state, and controls the gaming state after the end of the second special game to the second gaming state. ,
The information display effect executing means can execute the information display effect in the second gaming state.
The first information indicates that the second special game is executed after the end of the variation display.
The second information indicates that the current second gaming state is continued even after the end of the variation display.
The third information is characterized in that the gaming state becomes the first gaming state after the end of the variation display.

According to such a gaming machine, the special game has at least the first special game and the second special game, and the gaming state has at least the first game state and the second game state, and the second special game. The game is a special game in which the game profit that can be obtained is larger than that of the first special game, and the second game state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Further, the gaming state after the end of the first special game is the first gaming state, and the gaming state after the end of the second special game is the second gaming state. Then, the information display effect can be executed in the second game state (advantageous state), and among the information displayed in the information display effect, the first information indicates that the second special game is executed. The information indicates that the current second gaming state continues even after the end of the variation display, and the third information indicates that the gaming state becomes the first gaming state. Therefore, the information display effect displays information about the game (game development) after the game in the second game state (variable display of the identification information) as a reference. This makes it possible to improve the gaming interest of the second gaming state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 described above.
Equipped with a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect during variable display of identification information.
The variation effect execution means can execute the variation effect based on a predetermined variation effect pattern.
The variation effect pattern has at least a first variation effect pattern, a second variation effect pattern, and a third variation effect pattern.
When the second special game can be executed because the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern can be executed during the variation display.
When the first special game can be executed because the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern can be executed during the variation display.
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information is a non-specific display result, it is possible to execute the variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern during the variation display.
The information display effect executing means is
The first information and the second information can be displayed when the variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern is executed and when the variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern is executed.
It is characterized in that the second information and the third information can be displayed when the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a variation effect based on a predetermined variation effect pattern during the variation display of the identification information, and as the variation effect pattern, at least the first variation effect pattern and the second variation effect pattern can be executed. It has a pattern and a third variable effect pattern. When the second special game can be executed because the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern is displayed during the variation display, and the variation display of the identification information is displayed. When the first special game can be executed by the result being a specific display result, the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is displayed during the variation display, and the display result of the variation display of the identification information is the non-specific display result. In this case, it is possible to execute the variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern during the variation display. Then, during the variation display of the identification information, the information display in the variation display is performed when the variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern is executed and when the variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern is executed. It is possible to display the first information and the second information at the start of the effect, and when the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is executed, the information display effect at the start of the variation display is the first. It is possible to display 2 information and 3rd information. Therefore, when the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is executed, the information display effect for displaying the first information and the second information is not performed. This makes it possible to match the information display effect executed during the variable display of the identification information with the variable effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 10-1 to 10-4 described above.
The information display effect executing means is characterized in that it is possible to change the display mode of information by the information display effect after the start of the information display effect.

According to such a gaming machine, after the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the display mode of the information by the information display effect can be changed. Therefore, when the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the player can recognize how the subsequent game development will be depending on the subsequent display mode of the information. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the information display effect even after the start of the information display effect.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 10, it is possible to realize an effect that can attract the interest of the player as an effect performed during the variable display of the identification information, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Reference Invention 11)
Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of performing a variable display of identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be given to the player can be executed. Is widely known. In this type of gaming machine, it is common to perform various effects with the progress of games such as variable display of identification information and special games. In such a gaming machine, there is one that performs an effect (reach effect, etc.) indicating whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific display result as a character effect by a predetermined character (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-154657).

However, a configuration in which a character is produced by a reach effect or the like has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the execution mode is also uniform. For this reason, it is becoming difficult to enhance the game entertainment. The present reference invention 11 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to give a feature to the execution mode of the character production and to improve the gaming interest of the gaming machine provided with the character production. There is something in it.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable display means that can execute variable display of identification information,
Based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result, a special game execution means capable of executing a special game to which a predetermined game profit can be given, and a special game execution means.
A gaming machine equipped with an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect.
The effect executing means is
As the effect, it is possible to execute a character effect by a character displayed on a predetermined display unit.
It is characterized in that there are cases where the character effect is executed according to the variable display of the identification information and cases where the character effect is executed according to the special game.

According to such a gaming machine, a character effect by a character displayed on a predetermined display unit may be executed in association with a variable display of identification information, or may be executed in association with a special game. As a result, it is possible to have a relationship between the effect associated with the variable display of the identification information and the effect associated with the special game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 described above.
Equipped with a state control means that can control the game state,
The state control means can control the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is performed to the specific gaming state.
When the specific gaming state is reached, a predetermined character is displayed on the predetermined display unit, and the predetermined character is displayed.
The effect executing means is characterized in that it is possible to execute a character effect by a character displayed on the predetermined display unit in the specific game state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state when the variable display of the identification information is performed becomes the specific gaming state, a predetermined character is displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the character is displayed in the variable display of the identification information. There are cases where it is executed according to the special game and cases where it is executed according to the special game. As a result, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment in a specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 or Reference Invention 11-2 described above.
As the specific display result, the first specific display result and the second specific display result are included.
As the special game, the first special game and the second special game are included.
Based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information being the first specific display result, the first special game can be executed.
Based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information being the second specific display result, the second special game can be executed.
The first special game is considered to have more game profits that can be granted than the second special game.
The effect executing means is
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the first special game can be executed, the character effect is executed in accordance with the variation display.
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result and the second special game can be executed, the character effect is executed in association with the second special game. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is executed in which the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively large. If possible, the character effect is executed along with the variable display, the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, and the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively small. When the second special game to be assumed becomes feasible, the character effect is executed in association with the second special game. As a result, the game entertainment when the variable display of the identification information that triggers the execution of the first special game (the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result) or when the second special game is performed is performed. It will be possible to increase.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 described above.
The first variable entrance that can change the state in which the game ball cannot enter and the state in which it can enter,
It is equipped with a second variable entrance that can change the state in which the game ball cannot enter and the state in which it can enter.
In the first special game, the game ball can be entered into the first variable entrance.
In the second special game, the game ball can be entered into the second variable entrance.
In the specific gaming state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance port associated with the second special game is higher than in a gaming state other than the specific gaming state.
The effect executing means is
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the first special game can be executed in the specific game state, the character effect is executed along with the variation display.
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result and the second special game can be executed in the specific game state, the character effect is executed in association with the second special game. It is characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first special game executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, the ball enters the first variable entrance. In the second special game, which is executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, the game ball can be entered into the second variable entrance. In the specific gaming state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance opening associated with the second special game is higher than in the gaming state other than the specific gaming state. As a result, the second variable input accompanying the second special game can be executed under the condition that the variable display of the identification information that triggers the execution of the first special game (the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result) can be executed. It is possible to attract the player's interest in the entry of the game ball into the ball mouth and the execution of the character production, and to enhance the game interest in the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 or Reference Invention 11-4 described above.
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game. This makes it possible to enhance the gaming interest of a gaming machine equipped with a big hit game and a small hit game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 11-3 to 11-5 described above.
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is provided.
The probability that the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result is higher than the high probability.

According to such a game machine, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result (the execution probability of the first special game) is a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability. Is possible, and the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result (the execution probability of the second special game) is higher than the high probability. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the second special game will be executed, and accordingly, the possibility of executing the character effect associated with the second special game will also increase. This makes it possible to enhance the interest in the game when the second special game is performed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 described above.
The specific gaming state is characterized in that the probability that the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is set to the high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, in the specific gaming state, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is high, so that the character effect associated with the second special game can be executed. It is possible to attract the player's interest in the execution of the character effect accompanying the variable display of the identification information under the situation where the probability is high. As a result, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment in a specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-8 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 11-1 to 11-7 described above.
The characters displayed on the predetermined display unit include a first character and a second character.
The character effect includes a first character effect and a second character effect.
The first character effect is an effect including a first effect by the first character and the second character, and a second effect by the first character and the second character after the first effect.
The second character effect is an effect by the first character and the second character and does not include the second effect.
The effect executing means is
When the character effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, the first character effect is executed.
When the character effect is executed in association with the special game, the second character effect is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the first character and the second character are displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the first character and the second character is executed. The character effect includes a first character effect and a second character effect, and the first character effect is based on the first effect by the first character and the second character and the first character and the second character after the first effect. The effect includes the second effect, and the second character effect is an effect that includes the first character and the second character, but does not include the second effect. Then, the first character effect is executed when the character effect is executed with the variable display of the identification information, and the second character effect is executed when the character effect is executed with the special game. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the character effect in a manner suitable for the situation of the game, and it becomes possible to attract the interest of the player to the character effect.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 11, it is possible to improve the gaming interest of the gaming machine provided with the character effect by giving a feature to the execution mode of the character effect.

(Reference Invention 12)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 is
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and
The effect control means for controlling the effect based on the determination result of the determination means is provided.
The effect control means is
The first countdown effect, in which the first effect image showing the numbers is displayed in the first display area and the numbers indicated by the first effect image are counted down,
The first suggestion effect suggesting that the special game may be executed according to the end of the first countdown effect, and the first suggestion effect.
A second countdown effect in which a second effect image showing a number is displayed in the second display area and the number indicated by the second effect image is counted down, and
It is characterized in that the second suggestion effect suggesting that the special game may be executed can be executed according to the end of the second countdown effect.

According to such a gaming machine, when the first countdown effect and the second countdown effect are compared, the respective effect images are displayed in different display areas, and when the countdown effect is completed, different suggestive effects are produced. Can be executed. Therefore, as compared with the case where the display area of the effect image related to the countdown effect is one, or the case where the effect executed in response to the end of the countdown is one, the variation of the effect is abundant, and as a result. , It is possible to carry out a highly entertaining production.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1.
The display mode of the first effect image and the display mode of the second effect image are different from each other.

According to such a gaming machine, the display mode of the first effect image and the display mode of the second effect image are different from each other. Therefore, for example, when the first countdown effect and the second countdown effect are executed at the same time. Even so, the player can clearly identify these countdown effects. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the problem that the interest of the effect is lowered due to the player not being able to recognize that the two types of countdown effects are being executed at the same time.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 or Reference Invention 12-2.
The effect control means is
It is characterized in that the speed at which the numbers shown by the first effect image are counted down and the speed at which the numbers shown by the second effect image are counted down can be made different from each other.

According to such a game machine, the speed at which the numbers shown by the first effect image are counted down and the speed at which the numbers shown by the second effect image are counted down are different from each other. Is monotonous, and as a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the entertainment of the production is lowered.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-4 is the gaming machine of any of Reference Inventions 12-1 to 12-3.
The initial value of the number indicated by the second effect image is fixed, while the initial value of the number indicated by the first effect image is variable.

According to such a gaming machine, since the initial value of the number shown in the first effect image is variable, the first countdown effect becomes monotonous due to the fixed number, and as a result, the effect is produced. It is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of problems such as a decrease in interest.

(Reference Invention 13)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 is
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and
The effect control means for controlling the effect based on the determination result of the determination means is provided.
The effect control means is
It is possible to execute the first specific effect suggesting that the special game is relatively likely to be executed.
As the possibility suggestion image suggesting the possibility, when the possibility suggestion image of the first display mode is displayed, and the second display suggesting that the possibility is higher than that of the first display mode. There are times when a suggestion image of the possibility of the aspect is displayed,
It is characterized in that the display of the possibility suggestion image of the second display mode makes it easier to execute the first specific effect than the possibility suggestion image of the first display mode is displayed. be.

According to such a gaming machine, it is easier to execute the first specific effect when the possibility suggestion image of the second display mode is displayed than when the possibility suggestion image of the first display mode is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to display the possibility suggestion image in the second display mode instead of the first display mode, and the synergistic effect between the effect of displaying the possibility suggestion image and the first specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a high effect.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1.
When the determination by the determination means is performed, the symbol display control means is provided, which displays the symbol in a variable manner on the predetermined symbol display means and then stops and displays the symbol indicating the determination result of the determination means.
The effect control means is
It is possible to execute a plurality of second specific effects different from the first specific effect, which suggests that the possibility is relatively high.
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is to be executed, both the first specific effect and the plurality of second specific effects can be executed during the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the determination. On the other hand
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is not executed, both the first specific effect and the plurality of second specific effects are executed during the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the determination. It is characterized by limiting the number of operations.

According to such a gaming machine, the first specific effect and the plurality of second specific effects are executed only when it is determined that the special game is to be executed. , It is possible to expect the player to perform a plurality of second specific effects in addition to the first specific effect, and a higher effect can be obtained by the synergistic effect of the first specific effect and the second specific effect. Is possible.

(Reference Invention 14)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 is
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and
The effect control means for controlling the effect based on the determination result of the determination means is provided.
The effect control means is
It is possible to execute a stepwise effect that changes a predetermined stepwise effect image step by step.
When executing the stage effect, the stage effect image is displayed in a predetermined first display area to start the stage effect, and after the start of the stage effect, the stage effect image is referred to as the first display area. Is characterized in that it is displayed in a different second display area to change the stage effect image.

According to such a gaming machine, since the staged effect image is displayed in the first display area when the staged effect is started, the player who is gazing at the first display area does not notice the start of the staged effect. It is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of such problems. Further, since the staged effect image is displayed in the second display area instead of the first display area after the start of the staged effect, the change is compared with the case where the display area in which the staged effect image is displayed is fixed. It is possible to carry out staged productions that are rich in interest and highly entertaining. Further, since the staged effect image is displayed in the second display area instead of the first display area after the start of the staged effect, it is possible to execute another effect using the first display area, for example. Yes, it is possible to obtain a high production effect by the synergistic effect of the stage production and other productions.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1.
The staged effect image displayed in the first display area is characterized in that it is larger than the staged effect image displayed in the second display area.

According to such a gaming machine, the staged effect images displayed in the first display area are larger than the staged effect images displayed in the second display area, so that the sizes of these effect images are the same. The player recognizes that the staged effect has started, as compared with the case where the staged effect image displayed in the second display area is larger than the staged effect image displayed in the first display area. It is easy, and it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the original effect of the stage effect cannot be obtained because the player does not notice that the stage effect has been started.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 or Reference Invention 14-2.
The staged effect is an effect that can be changed stepwise up to any stage below the predetermined number of stages with the predetermined number of stages as the upper limit.
The effect control means is
It is characterized by executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the special game may be executed in response to the change of the stage effect to the predetermined number of stages.

According to such a gaming machine, since the suggestion effect is executed when the stage effect changes to a predetermined number of stages, the player is expected to change the stage effect to the upper limit of the predetermined number of stages. It is possible to obtain a high effect by the synergistic effect of the step effect and the suggestion effect.

(Reference Invention 15)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-1 is
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and
A notification effect executing means for executing a hit notification effect for notifying that the special game is determined to be executed by the determination means, or a loss notification effect for notifying that the determination means has determined not to execute the special game. When,
The effect control means for controlling the effect based on the determination result of the determination means is provided.
The effect control means is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests that the hit notification effect is relatively likely to be executed.
The effect is executed in one of a plurality of effect modes including the first effect mode and the second effect mode, which suggests that the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed than the first effect mode and the first effect mode.
It is characterized in that it is possible to foretell that the suggestion effect will be executed by the effect performed in the second effect mode.

According to such a gaming machine, the second effect mode is an effect mode suggesting that the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed than the first effect mode, and is performed in the second effect mode. Depending on the effect, it may be announced that the suggestion effect will be executed. Therefore, by executing the effect in the second effect mode, it is possible to expect the player to perform the suggestion effect and the hit notification effect, and it is possible to obtain a high effect.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-1.
The effect control means is
As the effect performed in the second effect mode, it is possible to execute a stage effect that can be gradually developed to any stage equal to or less than the predetermined number of stages up to the predetermined number of stages.
When the suggestion effect is not executed, the stage effect that develops to a stage less than the predetermined number of stages and ends is executed.
It is characterized in that when the suggestion effect is executed, the stage effect that develops to the predetermined number of stages and ends is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, when a stage effect that develops to a predetermined number of stages and ends is executed during the second effect mode, a suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player who expects the suggestion effect to be executed to develop the stage effect to a predetermined number of stages, which is high due to the synergistic effect of the stage effect and the suggestion effect. It is possible to obtain a directing effect.

(Reference Invention 16)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1 is
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and
A symbol display control means for causing a predetermined symbol display means to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying a symbol indicating a determination result of the determination means.
The effect control means for controlling the effect based on the determination result of the determination means is provided.
The effect control means is
It is possible to display a variation suggestion image suggesting that the symbol is being displayed, and it is possible to execute a possibility suggestion effect suggesting that the special game may be executed.
As the possibility suggestion effect is executed during the display of the variation suggestion image, the possibility that the special game is executed from the first display aspect of the variation suggestion image is the first display aspect. It is characterized in that it can be changed to the second display mode suggesting that it is higher than the above.

According to such a gaming machine, the display mode of the variation suggestion image may change from the first display mode to the second display mode as the possibility suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation that the special game is executed by the synergistic effect of the possibility suggestion effect and the change in the display mode of the variation suggestion image, and as a result. , A high production effect can be obtained.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1.
As the possibility suggestion effect is executed during the display of the variation suggestion image, the display mode of the variation suggestion image changes from the first case where the display mode changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. There is a second case that does not
The first case is characterized in that the probability that the special game is executed is higher than that in the second case.

According to such a gaming machine, it is special that the display mode of the variation suggestion image changes from the first display mode to the second display mode as the possibility suggestion effect is executed, as compared with the case where the display mode does not change. The game is easy to execute. Therefore, by executing the possibility suggestion effect, the player can pay attention to the variation suggestion image, as compared with the case where the display mode of the variation suggestion image is changed regardless of the possibility suggestion effect. It is possible to obtain a higher effect.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1 or Reference Invention 16-2.
The possibility suggestion effect is a movement effect in which a plurality of characters move on the display screen.
The movement effect includes a movement effect of a first effect pattern in which the plurality of characters do not include a specific character, and a movement effect of a second effect pattern in which the plurality of characters include a specific character.
The effect control means is
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is to be executed, both the movement effect of the first effect pattern and the movement effect of the second effect pattern can be executed.
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is not executed, the movement effect of the first effect pattern can be executed, while the execution of the move effect of the second effect pattern is restricted. Is what you do.

According to such a gaming machine, the movement effect of the first effect pattern can be executed both when it is determined that the special game is to be executed and when it is determined not to be executed, whereas the second effect is possible. The pattern movement effect is not executed when it is determined not to execute the special game, and is executed when it is determined to execute the special game. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to perform the movement effect of the second effect pattern rather than the movement effect of the first effect pattern, and only the first effect pattern is prepared as the effect pattern of the movement effect. Compared to the case where it is not done, it is possible to execute a moving effect that has abundant variations of the effect and is more interesting.

(Reference Invention 17)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-1 is
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and
A symbol display control means for causing a predetermined symbol display means to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying a symbol indicating a determination result of the determination means.
The effect control means for controlling the effect based on the determination result of the determination means is provided.
The effect control means is
It is possible to display a fluctuation suggestion image that suggests that the fluctuation display of the symbol is in progress.
While displaying the variation suggestion image, it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the variation suggestion image into an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation means.
It is characterized in that a predetermined operation correspondence effect is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the display of the operation promotion image.

According to such a gaming machine, a change effect in which a change suggestion image is changed to an operation promotion image may be executed. For this reason, the fluctuation suggestion image has both a function of suggesting that the fluctuation display of the pattern is being displayed and a function of changing to the operation promotion image, effectively improving the fun of the production using the fluctuation suggestion image. It is possible to make it.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-1.
The reach effect executed during the variable display of the symbol includes a first reach effect and a second reach effect that can be performed after the first reach effect.
The effect control means is
While the change effect can be executed during the second reach effect, it is characterized in that the change effect is limited to be executed during the first reach effect.

According to such a gaming machine, since the change effect is not executed unless it develops into the second reach effect, it is opposed to developing into the second reach effect as compared with the case where the change effect is not executed during the second reach effect. It is possible to effectively improve the expectation of the player.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-2.
A holding means capable of holding up to a predetermined number of judgment rights by the judgment means is provided.
The effect control means is
When the right of the above judgment is reserved, a reserved image indicating that fact is displayed, and the image is displayed.
Before the start of the second reach effect during the variation display of the symbol, both the variation suggestion image and the hold image are displayed, while during the second reach effect, the variation is not displayed without displaying the hold image. It is characterized by displaying a suggestion image.

According to such a gaming machine, during the second reach effect, the variation suggestion image is displayed without displaying the reserved image, and the variation effect in which the variation suggestion image is changed to the operation promotion image is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fluctuation suggestion image as compared with the case where the hold image is displayed during the second reach effect. For example, the player pays attention to the hold image. It is possible to easily suppress the problem that the change effect is overlooked due to the cause.

(Reference Invention 18)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-1 is
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and
A symbol display control means for causing a predetermined symbol display means to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying a symbol indicating a determination result of the determination means.
The effect control means for controlling the effect based on the determination result of the determination means is provided.
The effect control means is
The possibility suggestion image suggesting that the special game may be executed is displayed during the variation display of the symbol, and the possibility suggestion image suggests according to the operation of the operation means. It is characterized in that the possibility suggestion image is changed so that the sex becomes higher.

According to such a gaming machine, the possibility suggestion image changes so that the possibility that the possibility suggestion image suggests (the special game is executed) increases according to the operation of the operation means. It is possible to make the player feel that he / she is increasing the possibility that the special game is executed, and it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the production using the operation means.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-1.
The effect control means is
The possibility suggestion image may be changed by the first change pattern or the second change pattern.
It is characterized in that the probability that the special game is executed differs between the case where the possibility suggestion image changes in the first change pattern and the case where the possibility change image changes in the second change pattern.

According to such a gaming machine, the possibility that a special game is executed differs from each other depending on the change pattern of the possibility suggestion image, so that the player can pay attention to how the possibility suggestion image changes. It is possible, and it is possible to perform a more effective effect of changing the possibility suggestion image.

Further, the gaming machine of the reference invention 18-3 is the gaming machine of the reference invention 18-1 or the reference invention 18-2.
The effect control means is
In response to the operation of the operating means after changing the possibility suggestion image, a hit notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed or a loss notification effect for notifying that the special game is not executed is performed. It is characterized by executing.

According to such a gaming machine, a hit notification effect or a loss notification effect is executed according to the operation of the operation means after changing the possibility suggestion image. Therefore, the player can operate the operating means while looking at the possibility suggestion image after the change and guessing how likely the special game is to be executed.

1 Pachinko game machine, 7b Production symbol display area (production symbol display area), 8 Production design, 20 1st start port, 21 2nd start port, 30 1st big prize opening, 35 2nd big prize opening, 39 Specific area , 41a 1st special symbol display (1st special symbol display), 41b 2nd special symbol display (2nd special symbol display), 80 main control board (main control unit), 90 sub control board (sub control) Section), 100 image control board (image control section), 103a third effect hold indicator, 103b fourth effect hold indicator.

Claims (1)

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and
When the determination is made, a symbol display control means for causing a predetermined symbol display means to display the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the result of the determination.
It is provided with an effect control means for controlling the effect based on the result of the determination.
The effect control means is
As an effect different from the reach effect, which suggests that the special game is relatively likely to be executed, the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect can be executed.
As the possibility suggestion image suggesting the possibility, when the possibility suggestion image of the first display mode is displayed, and the second display suggesting that the possibility is higher than that of the first display mode. When displaying the possibility suggestion image of the aspect, there is,
It is easier to execute the first specific effect when the possibility suggestion image of the second display mode is displayed than when the possibility suggestion image of the first display mode is displayed.
The effect control means is
There are times when the first reach effect is executed and when the second reach effect is executed, in which it is easy to be notified that the determination means has determined that the special game is executed rather than the first reach effect.
When executing the second reach effect, it is possible to execute the first specific effect and then execute the second reach effect.
The third specific effect is an effect that can be executed during the second reach effect.
The effect control means is
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is to be executed, all of the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect are displayed in the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the determination. While being feasible
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is not executed, the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect are displayed in the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the determination. A gaming machine characterized by limiting everything from being executed.

Images